Nokia N97 User Manual
Nokia N97 User G uide Issue 5
Contents Safety 6 About your device 6 Network services 7 Shared memory 7 Mail for Exchange 8 Find help 9 Support 9 In-device help 9 Do more with your device 9 Update device software 9 Settings 10 Access codes 11 Remote lock 11 Prolong battery life 11 Free memory 12 Get started 13 Keys and parts (top) 13 Keys and parts (front) 13 Keys and parts (back) 14 Keys and parts (sides) 14 Insert the SIM card and battery 15 Memory card 16 Antenna locations 17 Switch the device on an d off 17 Charge the battery 18 Headset 18 Attach wrist strap 19 Touch screen actions 19 Write text 21 Lock the keys and touch screen 24 Nokia Switch 24 Profiles 26 Your device 27 Home screen 27 Display indicators 29 Shortcuts 30 Search 30 Volume and loudspeaker control 31 Offline profile 32 Fast downloading 32 Ovi (network service) 3 2 Make calls 35 Touch screen during calls 35 Make a voice call 35 During a call 36 Voice and video mailboxes 36 Answer or reject a call 37 Make a conference call 37 Speed dial a phone number 37 Call waiting 38 Voice dialling 38 Make a video call 38 During a video call 39 Answer or reject a video call 40 é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 2
Internet calls 40 Video sharing 41 Log 43 Contacts (phonebook) 45 Save and edit names and numbers 45 Contacts toolbar 45 Manage names and numbers 45 Default numbers and addresses 46 Contact cards 46 Set contacts as favourit es 46 Ringing tones, images, and call text for contacts 46 Copy contacts 47 SIM services 47 Contact groups 48 Ovi Contacts 48 Messaging 54 Messaging main view 54 Write and send messages 55 Messaging inbox 56 Mailbox 56 View messages on a SIM card 58 Cell broadcast messages 58 Service commands 59 Messaging settings 59 Mail for Exchange 63 Connectivity 64 Data connections and access points 64 Network settings 64 Wireless LAN 6 5 Access points 67 Active data connect ions 69 Synchronisation 69 Bluetooth connectivity 70 USB 73 PC connections 73 Administrative setting s 74 Internet 75 Browse the web 75 Browser toolbar 7 5 Navigate pages 76 Web feeds and blogs 7 6 Content search 76 Bookmarks 7 7 Empty the cache 77 End the connection 77 Connection security 77 Web settings 78 Position ing (GPS) 79 About GPS 79 Assisted GPS (A -GPS) 80 Hold your device correctly 80 Tips on creating a GPS connection 80 Position requests 81 Landmarks 81 GPS data 82 Positioning settings 83 é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 3
Ovi Maps 84 Maps overview 84 Use the compass 84 View your location and the map 85 Map view 85 Change the look of the map 85 Find a location 86 View location details 86 Plan a route 87 Save places and routes 88 View and organise places or routes 88 Send places to your friends 89 Synchronise you r Favourites 89 Share location 89 Get voice guidance 90 Walk to your destination 90 Drive to your destination 91 Navigation view 91 Get traffic and safety information 91 Camera 92 Activate t he camera 92 Image capture 92 Video recording 96 Camera settings 97 Photos 98 About Photos 98 View images and videos 98 View and edit file details 99 Organise images and video clips 100 Photos toolbar 100 Albums 100 Tags 100 Slide show 101 TV-out mode 101 Edit images 102 Edit video clips 103 Image print 103 Share online 104 Music 104 Play a song or a podcast 104 Playlists 105 Podcasts 106 Transfer music from a com puter 106 Ovi Music 106 FM transmitter 107 Nokia Podcast ing 10 8 FM radio 111 Videos 112 Download and v iew video clips 112 Video feeds 113 My videos 113 Transfer videos from your PC 114 Video settings 114 Personalise your device 115 Change the look of your device 115 Profiles 115 é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 4
3-D tones 115 Modify the home screen 116 Modify the main menu 116 Applications 116 Calendar 116 Clock 117 RealPlayer 118 Recorder 119 Notes 120 Office 120 Settings 125 Phone settings 125 Application manager 131 Calling settings 133 Troubleshoot ing 135 Green tips 137 Save energy 137 Recycle 137 Product and safety informatio n 138 Index 1 44 é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 5
Safety Read these simple guidelines . Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAF ELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be suscepti ble to interference, which coul d affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN RESTRICTED ARE AS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off in aircraft, near medical eq uipment, fuel, chemicals, or blasting areas. ROAD SAFETY COM ES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free t o operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. QUALIFIED SERVI CE Only qualified personnel ma y install or repair this product. ACCESSORIES AND BATTERIES Use only approved acce ssories and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESIST ANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for information about networks. When using the features in th is device, obey all laws and respect local customs, privacy and legitimate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright protection may prev ent some images, music, and other content from being copi ed, modified, or transferred. Your device supports several methods of connectivit y. Like computers, your devic e may be exposed to viru ses and other harmful content. Exercise caution with messages, connectivity requests, browsing , and downloads. Only i nstall and use services and other software from trustworthy sources that offer adequate se curity and protection aga inst harmful software, such as app lications that are S ymbia n Signed or have passed the Ja va Verified⢠testing. Consider é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 6 MHz MHz use on the (E)GSM 850, 900, 1800, 1900 , a n d U M T S 9 0 0 , 1900, 2100 n e t w ork s . C o n tac t y o ur s e r v ice p rov i d er for more
installing antivi rus and other secu rity software on your device and any connected computer. Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one appl ication with antivirus functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functioning. Your device may have preins talled bookmarks and links for third-party internet sites. Yo u may also access other third- party sites through your device. Third-party sites are not affiliated with Nokia, an d Nokia does not endorse or assume liability for them. If you choos e to access such sit es, you should take precautions for security or content. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device must be swi tched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. The office applications support common features of Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Microsoft Office 2000, XP, and 2003). Not all file formats can be viewed or modified. Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device. When connecting to any other de vice, read its user guide for detailed safety in structions. Do not connect incompatible products . The images in this guide may di ffer from your device display. Network services To use the device you must have service from a wireless service provider. Some features a re not available on all networks; other features may re quire that you make specific arrangements with your serv ice provider to use them. Network services involve transmission of data. Check with your service provider for details about fees in your home network and when roaming on other networks. Your service provider can explain what charges will ap ply. Some networks may have limitation s that affect how y ou can use some features of this device requ iring networ k su pport s uch as support for specific technologies like WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/ IP protocols and language- dependent charact ers. Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain features be disabled or not ac tivated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your devi ce menu. Your device may also h ave customized it ems such as menu names, menu order, and icons. Shared memory The following features in this device may s hare memory: multimedia messagin g (MMS), e-mail application, instant messaging. Use of one or more of these features may reduce the memory available for the remaining feat ures sharin g memory. Your device ma y display a message t hat the memory is full when you try to use a sh ared memory feature. In this case, delete some of the inform ation or entries stored in the shared memory features before continuing. During extended operation such as an active video call an d high speed data connection, th e device may feel warm. In é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 7
most cases, this condition is normal. If you suspect the device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorised service facility. Mail for Exchange Use of the Mail for Exchange is limited to over-the-air synchronisation of PIM info rmation between the Nokia device and the authorised Microsoft Exchange server. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 8
Find help Support When you want to learn more about how t o use your product or you are unsure how your device should funct ion, go to www.nokia.com/support , or using a mobile device, nokia.mobi/s upport. You can als o select Menu > Applications > Help in your device. If this does not resolve your issue, do one of the following: ⢠Reboot your device. Switch off the device, and remove the battery. After about a minute, replace the battery, and switch on the device. ⢠Restore the original factory settings. ⢠Update your device software. If your issue remains unsolv ed, contact Nokia for repair options. Go to www.nokia.com/repair. Before sending your device for repair, always back up the data in your device. In-device help Your device contains instru ctions to help to use the applications in your device. To open help texts from the main menu, select Menu > Applications > Help and the application for which you want to read instructions. When an application is open, to access the help text for the current view, select Options > Help . When you are reading the instru ctions, to change the size of the help text, select Options > Decrease font size or Increase font size . You may find links to related topics at the end of the h elp text. If you select an underlined word, a short explanation is displayed. Help texts use the following indicators: Link to a related h elp topic. Link to the application being discussed. When you are reading the inst ructions, to switch between help texts and the app lication that is open in the backgroun d, select Option s > Show open apps. and the desired application. Do more with your device There are various applicati ons provided by Nokia and third party software develo pers, that help you do more with your device. To find and download applications, visit the Ovi Store at store.ovi.com. These applications are explained in the guides that are available on th e product support pages at www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia website. Update de vice softwar e About devi ce software and application updates With device software updates and application updat es, you can get new featu res and enhanced function s for your device. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 9
Updating the so ftware may also improv e your device performance. It is recommended that you back up your personal data before updating your device software. Warning: If you install a software update , you cannot use the device, even to make emergency calls , until the installation is completed and the device is restar ted. Be sure to back up data before accepting insta llation of an update. Downloading s oftware updat es may inv olve the transmission of large amounts of data (network service). Make sure that the device battery has enough power, or connect the charger before starting the update. After you update your device software or applications, the instructions in the user guide ma y no longer be up to date. Update software using your device You can check if there are upda tes available for your device, and download them to your device (network ser vice). Select Menu > Settin gs > Phone > Phone mg mt. > Device updates and Options > Check for update s . Update de vice software using yo ur PC You can use the Nokia Software Upda ter PC application to update your device software. To update your device software, you need a compatible PC, a high -speed internet connection, and a compatible USB data cabl e to connect your device to the PC. To get more information and to download the Nokia Software Updat er application, go to www. nokia.com/ softwareupdate. Settings Your device norm ally has MMS, GP RS, streaming, and m obile internet settings automat ically configured, based on your network service provider info rmation. You may have settings from your service providers alre ady installed in your device, or you may receive or request the settings from the network service prov iders as a special message. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 10
You can change the general settings in your device, such as language, standby mode, display, and keypad lock settings. Access codes If you forget any of the access codes, contact your service provider. Personal identification numb er (PIN) code â This code protects your SIM card again st unauthorised use. T he PIN code (4 - 8 dig its) is usually s upplied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unblock it. UPIN code â This code may be supplied with the U SIM card. The USIM card is an enhanced version of the SIM card and is supported by 3G mobile phones. PIN2 code â This code (4 - 8 digits) is supplied with some SIM cards, and is required to access some function s in your device. Lock code (also known as se curity code) â Th e lock code helps you to protect your device aga inst unauthorised use. The preset code is 12345. You c a n create and change the code, and set the device to request the code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe pla ce sepa rate from your device. If you forget the code and your device is locked, your device will require service. Additional ch arges may ap ply, and all th e personal data in your device may be deleted. For more information, contact a Nokia Care Point or your device dealer. Personal Unblocking Key (PUK) code and PUK2 code â These codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact the network s ervice provider whose SIM card is in your device. UPUK code â This code (8 digi ts) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the code is not supplied with the USIM card, contact the ne twork serv ice provider whose USIM card is in your device. International Mobile Equipment Id entity (IMEI) number â This number (15 or 17 digits) is used to identify valid devices on the GSM network. Devices th at are, for example, stolen, can be blocke d from accessing the network. The IMEI number for your de vice can be found under the battery. Remote lock To prevent unauthorised use of your device, you can lock your device and memory card remote ly using a text message. You must define the text message, and to lock your device, send the text message to your device. T o unlock your device, you need the lock code. To enable remote locking, and to define the text message, select Menu > Settings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Security settings > Phone and SI M card > Remote phone locking > En abled . Tap t he text input fi eld to enter the text message content (5-20 characters) , select , and verify t he message. Enter the lock code. Prolong bat tery life Many features in your device increase t he demand on battery power and reduce the battery lifetime. To save battery power, note the following: é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 11
⢠Features that use Blu etooth technology, or allow ing such features to run in the ba ckground while using other features, increase the demand on battery power. Deactivate Bluetooth tech nology when you do not need it. ⢠Features th at use wireles s LA N (WLAN), or allowing su ch features to run in the ba ckground while using other features, increase the dema nd on battery power. WLAN on your Nokia device deactivates when you a re not trying to connect, not connected to an access point, or not scanning for avai lable ne tworks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can specify that your device does not scan, or scans less often, for available networks in the background. ⢠If you have set Packet data connection to When available in connection settings , and there is no packet data coverage (GPRS), the de vice periodically tries to establish a packet data co nnection. To prolong the operating time of your device, select Packet da ta connection > When needed . ⢠The Maps application downloads new map information when you scr oll to new areas on the map, whic h increases the demand on ba tte ry power. You can prevent the automatic download of new maps. ⢠If the signal strength of the cellular network varies much in your area, your device must scan for the available network repeatedly. This increases the demand on battery power . If the netwo rk mode is s et to dual mode in the net work settings, the device searches for the 3G network. You can set the device to use only the GSM network. To use only the GSM network, select Menu > Settings and Connectivi ty > Ne twork > Network mode > GSM . ⢠The backlight of the display increases the demand on battery power. In the display settings, you can change the length of the time-out period af ter which the backlight is switched off. Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Display > Light time-out . T o adjust the light sensor that observes lighting conditions a nd adjusts the display brightness, in the display settings, se lect Light sensor . ⢠Leaving applications runn ing in the background increases the demand on ba ttery power. To close the applications you are not using, if they are not responding, select Options > Sh ow open apps. , and go to the application using the menu key. Press and hold the menu key to open the application, and select Options > Exit . Free memory To view how much space is availa ble for different da ta types, select Menu > Appli cations > Office > File mgr. . Many features of the device use memory to store data. The device notifies you if the memory in different memory locations is low. To free memory, transfer data to a compatible memory card (if available) or to a compati ble computer. To remove data you n o longer need, use File m anager or open the respective ap plication. You can remove the followi ng: é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 12
⢠Messages in the folders in Messaging and retrieved e-mail messages in the mailbox ⢠Saved we b pages ⢠Contact information ⢠Calendar notes ⢠Applications shown in Appl ication manager that you do not need ⢠Installation files (.sis or .s isx) of applications you have installed. Transfer the inst a llation files to a compatible computer. ⢠Images and video clips in Phot os. Back up the files to a compatible computer. Get started Keys and parts ( top) 1 Power key 2 Nokia AV connector (3.5 mm) for compatible headsets, headphones, and TV-out connectors Keys and parts (front) 1 Proximity sensor 2 Earpiece 3 Touch screen 4 Menu key é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 13
5 Call key 6 Secondary camera lens 7 Light sensor 8 End key Do not cover the area above the touch screen, for example, with protective film or tape . Keys and parts (back) 1 Camera flash 2 Camera lens 3 Lens cover Keys and parts (sides) 1 Stereo speaker 2 Micro U SB conn ector 3 Charging indicator light 4 Lock switch 5 Volume up/Zoom in key 6 Volume down/Zoom out key 7 Capture key Note: The surface of this device does not contain nickel in the platings. The surface of this device con tains stainless steel. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 14
Insert the SIM ca rd and battery Follow the instructions carefully, to avoid damaging the back cover. Always switch the device o ff and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. 1 Remove the back cover by lifting it from the bottom end of the device. 2 If the battery is inserted, li ft the battery in the direction of the arrow to remove it. 3 Pull out the SIM card holder , and insert the SIM card. Ensure that the gold-coloured contact area on the card is facing down and that the bevelled corner on the card is facing the bevelled corner on the holder. Push the SIM card holder back in. 4 Align the contacts of the ba ttery with the corresponding connectors on the battery co mpartment, an d insert the battery in the direction of the arrow. 5 To replace the back cover, di rect the top locking catches toward their slots, and pre ss down until t he cover locks into place. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 15
Memory card Use only compatible microSD cards approved by Nokia for use with this device. Nokia uses a p proved industry standards for memory cards, but some brands may not be fully compatible with this dev ice. Incompati ble cards may damage t he card and the device and corrupt data stored on the card. Insert the memory card A memory card may be already in serted in the device. If not, do the following: 1 Remove the back cover of the device. 2 Insert a compatible memory card in the slot. Ensure that the contact area on the card is facing down and tow ards the slot. 3 Push the card in. You can hea r a click when the card locks into place. 4 Replace the back cover. K eep the device facing down when replacing the cover. Ensure that the cover i s properly closed. Remove the memory card Important: Do not remove the memory card during an operation when the card is being accessed. Doing so may damage the memo ry card and the device, and corrupt data stored on the card. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 16
1 Before you remove the card, pres s the power key, and select Remove me mory car d . All applications are closed. 2W h e n Removing memory card will close all open applications. Remove anyway? is displayed, select Yes . 3W h e n Remove memory card and press 'OK' is displayed, remove the back cover of the device. 4 Press the memory card to release it from the slot. 5 Pull out the memory card. If the device is switched on, select OK . 6 Replace the back cover. Ensu re that the cover is properly closed. Antenna location s Your device may have internal and external antennas. Avoid touching the antenna a rea unnecessarily while the antenna is transmitting or receiving. Co ntact wi th antennas affects the communication quality and may cause a higher power level during operation and may reduce the battery life. Switch the device on and of f To switch on the device: 1 Press and hold the power key. 2 If the device asks for a PIN co de or lock code, enter it, and select OK . T he preset lock code is 12345 . If y ou forget the code and your device is locked, your device will require service and additional ch arges may apply. For more é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 17
information, contact a Nokia Care point or your device dealer. To switch off th e device, press th e power key briefly, and select Switch off! . Charge the b attery Your battery has been partially charged at the fact ory. There is no need to charge the devi ce in advance. If the device indicates a low charge, do the following: Regular charging 1 Connect the charg er to a wall outlet. 2 Connect the charger to the de vice . The char ging ind icator light next to the USB connect or is lit when the battery is being charged. 3 When the device indicates a full charge, disconnect the charger from the device, th en from the wall outlet. You do not need to charge the battery for a specific length of time, and you can use the device while it is charging. If the battery is completely discharged, it may ta ke several minutes before the charging indicato r appears on the display or before any calls can be made. Tip: Disconnect the charger from the wall outlet when t he charger is not in use. A charg er that is connected to the outlet consumes power even when it is not connected to the device. USB charging You can use USB charging when a wall outlet is not available. With USB charg ing, you can al so transfer da ta while charging the device. 1 Connect a compatible USB device to your device using a compatible USB cable. Depending on the type of device t h a t i s u s e d f o r c h a r g i n g , it may take a while for charging t o start. 2 If your device is switched on, you can select from the available USB mode options on the display of the device. Note: During extended operation or charging, the device or the charger may feel warm. In most cases, thi s condition is normal. If you suspect that the devi ce or the charger are not working properly, take them to the nea rest authorised service facility. Headset You can connect a compati ble headset or compatible headphones to your device. You may need to select the cable mode. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 18
Warning: When you use the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. Do not connect products that crea te an output sig nal as this may cause damage to the device. Do not connect any voltage source to the Nokia AV Connector. When connecting any external device or any headset, other than those approved by Nokia for use with this device, to the Nokia AV Connect or, pay special attention to volu me levels. Attach wris t strap 1 Open the back cover. 2 Thread a wrist strap, and tighten i t. 3 Close the back cover. Touch screen actions Use the to uch screen with your finger or with a stylu s (if available). Important: Use only a stylus approved by Nokia for use with this device. Using any othe r stylus may invalidate any warranty applying to the device a nd may damage the touch screen. Avoid scratching the t ouch screen. Never use an actual pen or pencil or other sharp objects to write on the touch screen. Tap and double-tap To open an application or othe r element on the touch screen, you normally tap it with your finger. However, to open the following items, you must tap them twice. ⢠List items in an application, s uch as the Drafts folder in the Messaging applicati on. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 19
⢠Files in a file list, for ex am ple, an image in the Captured folder in the Photos application. Tip: When you open a list view, the first item is already highlighted. To open the hi ghlighted item, tap it once. If you tap a file or similar it em once, it is not opened, it becomes highlighted. To see th e options available for the item, select Options or, if available, select an icon from a toolbar. Select In this user documentation, to open ap plications or items by tappi ng them once or t w ice, you "select" them. Example: To select Options > Help , tap Options , and then tap Help . Drag To drag, plac e your finger on the screen, and slide it across the screen. Example: To scroll up or down on a web page, drag the page with your finger. Swipe To swipe, slide your f inger quic kly left or right on the screen. Flick To flick, place your finger on th e screen, slide it quickly across the screen, then quickly lift yo ur fing er. The conten t of the screen will continue scrolling with the speed and direction it had at the moment of release. To select an item from a scrolling list and to stop th e movement, tap the item. In your device, flicking is available in Music player. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 20
Scroll To scroll up or down in lists th at have a scroll bar, drag the slider of the scroll bar. In some list views, you can place your finger on a list item and drag up or down. Tip: To view a brief description of an icon, place your finger on the icon. Descriptions are not available for all icons. Touch screen backlight To turn the screen backlight on , unlock the screen and keys, if necessary, and press the menu key. Write text You can enter text in differe nt modes. The full keyboard works as a traditional keyboard, and the on-screen alphanumeric keypad mod e allow you to t ap characters. T he handwriting recognition modes allow you to write characters directly on the screen. To activate text input mode, tap any text input field. In the text inp ut view, to sw itch between the available text input modes, tap , and select the desired input mode. The input methods a nd languages supported by the handwriting recognition vary by region. Keyboard input Keyboard Your device has a full keyboard. To open the keyboard, push the touch screen up. In all a pplications, the screen rotates é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 21
automatically from portrait to landscape when you open the keyboard. 1S h i f t k e y . To change between u ppercase and lowercase modes, press the shift key twice. To enter a single uppercase letter in lowercase mode, or a single lowercase letter in uppercas e mode, press the shift key once, and then the desired alphabet key. 2S p a c e k e y 3S y m k e y . To insert special characters not shown on the keyboard, press the sym key once, and select the desired character from the table. 4 Function key . To insert special characters printed at the top of keys, press the function key once, and then press the desired key. To enter several special characters in a row, press the function key twice quickly. To r eturn to normal mode, press the function key once. 5 Backspace key . To erase a char acter, press the backspace key. To erase several characters, press and hold the backspace key. Insert letters not shown on the key board It is possible to inse rt variations of letters, for example, letters with accents. To insert á, press and hold the sym key, and simultaneously press the A key repeatedly , until the desired character is displayed. The or der and availability of letters depends on the selected w riting langua ge. Touch input Handwriting The input methods a nd languages supported by the handwriting recognition vary by region and may not be available for all languages. To activate handwriting mode, select > Handw riting . Write legible, upright characters on the text input area, and leave a space between each character. To teach the devi ce your handwrit ing style, select > Handwriting training . To enter letters and numbers (default mode), write words as you would normally. To select number mode, select . To enter non-Lati n characters, s elect the correspondi ng icon, if available. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 22
To enter special characters, writ e them as you would normally, or select and the desired character. To delete characters or mo ve the cursor back, swipe backwards (see Figure 1). To insert a space, swipe forwards (see Figure 2). Touch input sett ings Select Menu > Se ttings and Phone > Touch input . To configure text inpu t settings for the touch screen, select from the following: Handwriting training â Open the ha ndwriting trainin g application. Train the device to recognise your handwriting better. This option is not available in all languages. Writing language â Define which language-speci fic characters in your handwriting a re recognised and how you r on-screen keyboard is laid out. Writing speed â Adjust the spee d at which handwriting is recognised. Guiding line â Show or hide the guiding line in the writing area. The guiding line helps you write in a straight line, and it also helps the device recogn ise your writing. This option may not be available in all languages. Pen trail w idth â Change the thi ckness of the text. Writing colour â Change the colour of the text. Virtual keypad With the virtual keypad ( Alphanumeric keypad ), you can enter characters like you would with a traditional phy sical keypad with numbers on the keys. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 23
1 Close - Closes the virtual keypad ( Alphanumeric keypad ). 2 Input menu - Opens th e touch input m enu, which includes commands such as Activate predictive t ext and Writing language . 3 Text input indicator - Opens a pop-up window, in which you can activate or deactivate predictive text input modes, change the character case, and switch between letter and number modes. 4 Input mode - Opens a pop-up window, in which you can select the input mode. When you tap an item, the current input method view closes, and the selected one opens. The availability of input modes ma y vary depending on whether the automatic input mode (sensor settings) is activated or not. 5 Arrow keys - Scroll left or right. 6 Backspace 7 Numbers 8 Star - Opens a speci al characters table. 9 Shift - Changes the character cas e, activates or deactivates predictive text in put modes, and switches between letter and number modes. Lock the keys and touch screen To lock or unlock the touch screen and the keys, s lide the lock switch on the side of the device. When the touch screen and keys are locked, the touch screen is switched off and the keys are inactive. To change settings for auto matic screen and key locking, select Menu > Sett ings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Auto. keyguard . Nokia Switch Transfer co ntent You can use the Switch application to copy content such as phone numbers, addresses, cale ndar items, and images from your previous Nokia device to your device. The type of cont ent that can be transferred depends on the model of the device from which you wan t to transfer content. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 24
If that device supports synchronisation , you can also synchronise data between the devices. Your device notifies you if the other device is not compatible. If the other device cannot be sw itched on without a SIM card, you can in sert you r SIM car d in it . When your device is switched on without a SIM card, the Offline profile is automatically activated, and tr ansfer can be done. Transfer content for the first time 1 To retrieve data from the other device for the first time, on your device, select Menu > Settings > Connectivity > Data transfer > Phone switch . 2 Select the connection type you want to use to tran sfer the data. Both devices must sup port the selected connection type. 3 If you select Bluetooth con nectivity as the connection type, connect the two devices. To have your dev ice search for devices with Bluetooth connectivity, select Continue . Select the device from which you want to transfer content. You are as ked to enter a code on your device. Enter a code (1- 16 digits), and select OK . Enter the same code on the other device, and select OK . The devices are now paired. Some earlier Nokia devices may not have the Sw itch application. In this case, the Switch application is sent to the other device as a message. To ins tall the Switch application on the other de vice, open the message, and follow the instructions on the display. 4 On your device, select the content you want to transfer from the other device. When the transfe r has started, you can cancel it and continue later. Content is transferred from th e memory of the other device to the corresponding location in your device. The tra nsfer time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. Synchronise, retrieve, or send content Select Menu > Settin gs > Connectivity > Data transfer > Phone swit ch . After the first transfer, select from the following to start a new transfer, depending on the model: to synchronise content between your device and the other device, if the other device supports synchronisation. The synchronisation is two-way. If an item is deleted in one device, it i s deleted in both. You cannot restore deleted items with synchronisation. to retrieve content from the other devi ce to your device. With retrieval, content is transferred from the other device to your device. You may be asked to keep or delete the origin al content in the other device, depending on the device model. to send content from your device to your other device If you cannot send an item, depending on the type of the other device, you can add the item to the Nokia folder, to C: \Nokia or E:\Nokia in your device. When you select the folder to transfer, the items are sync hronised in the corr esponding folder in the other device, and vice versa. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 25
Use shortcuts to repeat a transfer After a data transfer, you can save a shortcut with the trans fer settings to the main view to repeat th e same transfer later. To edit the shortcut, s elect Optio ns > Shortcut settings . For example, you can create or chan ge the name of the shortcut. A transfer log is shown after ev ery transfer. To view the log of the last transfer, select a shortcut in the main view and Options > View log . Handle transfer conflicts If an item to be transferred ha s been edited in both devices, the device attempts to merg e the changes automatically . If this is not possible, there is a transfer conflict. Select Check one by one , P riority to this phone , or Pri ority to other phone to solve the conflict. Profiles Select Menu > S ettings and Profiles . You can use profiles to set an d customise the ringing tones, message alert tones, and othe r tones for different events, environments, or caller groups . The name of the selected profile is displayed at the top of the home screen. To change a profile, scroll to the profile, and select Options > Acti vate . To personalise a profile, scroll to the profile, and select Options > Personal ise . Select the setting y ou want to change. To set the profile to be active until a certain time within the next 24 hours, scroll t o the profile, select Options > Timed , and set the time. When the time expires, the profile changes back to the previously active non-timed profile. When the profile is timed, is displayed in the home screen. The Offline profile cannot be timed. To create a new profile, select Op tions > Create new . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 26
Your device Home screen About the ho me screen In the home screen, you can qui ckly access your most frequently used applications, control applications, such as the music player, view your favo urite contacts, and view at a glance if you have mis sed calls or new messages. Interactive home scre en elements To open the clock applic ation, tap the clock (1). To open calendar or change pr ofiles in the home screen, tap the date or the p rofile name (2). To view or change connectivity s ettings ( ), to see the available wireless LANs if WLAN scanning is enabled, or to view the missed events, tap the top right corner (3) . To make a phone call, select (4). To open the main menu, press the m enu key (5). To hide and show content, sw ipe the home screen with your finger. Add items to t he home screen To add an item to the home screen, select Options > Ed it content > Options > Add content , and select the item from the list. Using widgets may involve the tr ansmission of large amounts of data (network service). To move an item, select Options > Edit content , select the desired item, and drag and dr op it to a new location. Remove an item from the home screen Select Options > Edit content and the item to be removed. Select Options > Remove > Done . E-mail notificatio ns About e-m ail notifi cations E-mail notifications in the home screen help you keep track of e-mail messages in your mailbox. You can set the device to show a preview of e-mail headers or just the number of unread e-mail. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 27
Work with e-ma il in the home scr een Set up your e-mail account in the home screen Select Set up e-mail , and follow the instructions. When the set-up is complete, the e-ma il icon appears in the home screen. To open your e-mail mailbox, select the icon. To define how you want t o be notified of new e-mail messages in the home screen, select Menu > Setti ngs and Personal > Home screen > E-mail widget , and from the following: Mailbox â Select from which mailbox you want to see notifications. Show message details â To see only the number of unread messages in the home screen, select Off . To see also the sender and subject of the message, select On . The available options may vary. Music player in the home screen You can use the music player from the home s creen. To activate the music player con trols, select Opti ons > Edit content > Options > Add content > Music player . Go to Music appears in the home screen. To open the music player, tap Go to Music , and select the items you want to listen to. The music player control keys, and, if available, the title of the song, artist, and album art are displayed when a song is played. Favour ite contac ts in the hom e screen You can add several cont acts dire ctly to th e home screen, an d quickly make calls or send messages to the cont acts, view the contacts' web feeds, or access the contact information and settings. 1 To add your favourite contacts to the home screen, select Option s > Edit content > Options > Add content > Favourite contacts . A row of icons is displayed in the home screen. 2 Select any of the icons ( ) and a contact from Con tacts. Add your favourite Share online feed to your home screen By adding the Share online widget to your home screen, you can quickly access your favourite Share online feed. 1 In the home screen, select Options > Edit cont ent > Option s > Add content > Share online . 2 Select the feed you want to add. You may need to register to a service of your service provider before you are able to add a feed. The widget displays thumbnail images from a selected feed of any of your Share online ac counts. The latest images are displayed first. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 28
Display indicators General indicators The touch screen and keys are locked. The device alerts silent ly for incoming calls or messages. You have set a clock ala rm. You are using a timed profile. Call indicators Someone has tried to call you. You are using your second phone line (network service). You have set your device to divert incoming calls to another number (network service). If you have two phone lines, a number indicates the active line. Your device is ready for an internet call. You have an ongoing dat a call (network service). Messaging indicators You have unread messages. If the indicator is blinking, the SIM card memory for messages may be full. You have received new mail. You have messages waiting to be sent i n the Outbox folder. Network indicators Your device is connected to a GSM n etwork (network service). Your device is connected to a 3G n etwork (network service). You have a GPRS pack et data connection (network service). indicates that the connection is on hold and that a connecti on is being established. You have an EGPRS packet data connection (network service). indicates that the connection is on hold and that a connecti on is being established. You have a 3G packet da ta connection (network service). indicates that the connection is suspended and that a connection is being established. You have a high-speed downli nk packet access (HSDPA) connection (network service). indicates that the connec tion is suspended and that a connection is being established. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 29
A WLAN connection is available (network service). indicates that the connection is encrypted and that the connection is not encrypted. Connectivity indicators Bluetooth is active. indicates that your device is sending data. If the indicator is blinking, your device is tryi ng to connect to another device. You have connected a USB cable to your device. GPS is active. The device is synchronising. The FM transmitter is active, but it is not transmitting. indicates th at the FM transmitter is tra nsmitting. You have connected a compatible headset to the device. You have connected a co mpatible TV-out cable to the device. You have connected a compatible text phone to the device. Shortcuts To switch between open appl ications, press and hold the menu key. Leaving applications running in the background increases t he demand on battery power an d reduces the battery life. To open the browser application , in the dialler, tap and hold 0 . To change the profi le, press the power key, and select a profile. To call your voice mailbox (net work service), in the dialler, tap and hold 1 . To open a list of last dialle d numbers, in the home screen, press the call key. To use voice commands, in the home screen, press and hold the call key. When writing, to change the writing language, press and the sym key. Search About Search Select Menu > Applications > Search . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 30
Search (network service) enable s you to use various internet- based search se rvices to find , for example, websites and images. The content and availabili ty of the services may vary . Start a search Select Menu > Applications > Search . To search the contents of your mobile device, en ter search terms in the search field, or browse the content categories. While you enter the search terms, the results are organised into categories. The most recently accessed results appear at the top of the result list, if they match your search terms. To search for web pages on the internet, select Search the Internet and a search provider, and enter your sea rch terms in the search field. The search provider you selected is set as your default internet search provider. If a default search provider is al ready set, select it to s tart a search, or select Search more to use another search provider. To change the defaul t search provider, select Options > Settings > Search services . To change the cou ntry or region setting to find more search providers, selec t Options > Settings > Country or region . Search settings Select Menu > Applications > Search . To change the Sea rch application settin gs, select Optio ns > Settings and from the following: Country or region â Select the country or region you want to search from. Connection â Select the access point, and allow or deny network connections. Search services â Select whether service providers and search categories are shown. General â Enable or disable tooltips, and clear the search history. Volume and loudspeaker contro l To adjust the volume level wh en you have an active call or are listening to a sound clip, us e the volume key. The built-in loudspeaker allows you to speak and listen from a short distan ce without ha ving to hold the device to your ear. To use the loudsp eaker during a call, select Loudspeaker . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 31
To turn off the lo udspeaker, select Activate handset . Offline pr ofile The offline profile lets yo u use the device without connecting to the wireless cellular networ k. When the offline prof ile is active, you can use your device without a SIM card. Activate t he offline profi le Press the power key briefly, and select Offline . When you activate the offline profile, the connection to the cellular network is closed. All radio frequency signals to and from the device to the cellular network are prevented. If you try to send messages using the cellular network, they are placed in the Outbox folder to be sent later. Important: In the Offline profile you cannot make or receive any calls, or use other features that require cellular network coverage. Calls may still be poss ible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To make calls, you must first activat e the phone function by chan ging profiles. If the device has been locked, enter the lock code. When you have activated the offline profile, you can still use a wireless LAN, for example, to read your e-mail or browse on the intern et. You can also use Bluetooth connectivity while in the offline profile. Remember to comply with any applicable safety requirements when establishing and using wireless LAN or Bluetooth connections. Fast downloading High-speed downlink packet a ccess (HSDPA, also called 3.5G, indicated by ) is a network service in UMTS networks and provides high-speed data do wnloads. When HSDPA support in the device is activated and the device is connected to a UMTS network that suppo rts HSDPA, downloading data such as messages, e-mail, a nd browser pages th rough the cellular network may be faster. An active HSD PA connection is indicated by . You can activate or deactiv ate support for HSDPA in packet data setting s. For availability and subscription to da ta connection services, contact your service provider. HSDPA only affects the dow nload speed; sending data to t he network, such as messages an d e-mail, is not affected. Ovi (network service) Visit Ovi by Nokia With Ovi by Nokia, you can find new places and services, and stay in touch with y our friends. You can do, for example, the following: ⢠Create a mail account ⢠Plan trips and view locations on a map ⢠Download games, applicat ions, videos, and ringing tones to your device ⢠Purchase music é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 32
Some downloadable items are free of charge, others you may need to pay for. The available services may vary by country or region, and not all languages are supported. To access Nokia's Ovi services , go to www.ovi.com , and register your own Nokia account. For more information, go to www.ovi.com/support. Ovi store About Ovi S tore In Ovi Store, you can download mobile ga mes, applications, videos, im ages, themes, and ringing tones to your device. Some items are free of charge; others you need to pay for with your credit ca rd or in your phone bill. The availability of payment methods depends on your country of residence and your network service provider. Ovi Store offers content that is compatible with your mobile device and relevant to your ta stes and location. Create a Nokia account When you create a Nokia Account, you can access Ovi and all its services with a si ngle user name and password. 1 Select Create a Nokia account . 2 Enter a user name. 3 Select your country from the list . 4 Enter your date of birth. 5 Enter your e-mail address or phone number. 6 Enter a pass word, and confir m it. 7 Enter the characters displa yed in the box on the right. 8 Select Submit . Sign in to Ovi Store Sign in Select Sign in , and enter your Nokia account user name and password. Retrieve forgotten us er name or password Select Options > Retriev e . Search Ovi Store Items in Ovi Store are or ganised into categories. You can browse the categories, or search with a key word. You can also select the type of items you want to see: free or most popular items, or items recommended for you. View details of an item Select an item to see detail ed information and other users' reviews. If you have signed in to Ovi Store, you can also write your own reviews. Read more reviews from others Select More reviews . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 33
Write a review Select the link to write a revi ew, enter your review, and assign a rating to fro m 1 to 3 stars. View information abo ut the publisher Select the publisher profile link. Find related it ems Select More related . Purchase content 1 Select the item you want to purchase. 2 Select Buy . 3 Enter your Nokia accoun t user name and password. I f you do not ha ve an account , select Create a Nokia accoun t , and enter the required information. 4 Select to pay using your credit card or through your phone bill. If you already have your credit card information stored in your Nokia account, and you want to use another credit card, select Edit payment settings , and enter the required information. To save your credit card information to your Nokia account, select the Save this card to my Nokia account check box. 5 Select the e-mail address to which you wa nt to receive a receipt of your purchase. 6 Select Purchase . Share favourites w ith friends Ovi Store enables you to sen d a text message containi ng a link to items in Ovi Store. 1 Select the item you want to share. 2 Select Send to friend . 3 Enter a phone number in the international format. 4 Select Send . Report inappropri ate content Contact Nokia if you find inapp ropriate content in Ovi St ore. 1 Select the item with inappropriate content. 2 Select Report issue . 3 Select the reason from th e list, and enter additional details, if needed. 4 Select Submit . Edit the Ovi Store settings In the Ovi Store settings, you can change your account information, grant your frie nds permission to see your activities in Ovi Store, an d change your passwo rd and security question. To change the Ovi Store settings , select Optio ns > Settings and from the following: Ovi sharing â Allow you r Ovi contacts to see you r activities in Ovi Store. Account information â Change the details of your Nokia account. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 34
Change password â Change your Nokia account pa ssword. Change security question â Chan ge the security question with which you can retrieve your user name and password. Installation preferences â Sele ct how you want to install content in your device. Make calls Touch screen during calls Your device has a proximity sensor. To extend battery life and prevent accidental selections, the touch screen is disabled automatically during calls, when you place the device next to your ear. Do not cover the proximity sensor, for example, with protective film or tape. Make a voice call 1 In the home screen, select to open the dialler, and enter the phone number, in cluding the area code. To remove a number, select C . For international calls, se lect * twice for the character (which replaces the interna tional access code), and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. 2 To make the call, press the call key. 3 To end the call (or to cancel the call attempt), press the end key. Pressing the end key always en ds a call, even if another application is active. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 35
Call a contact 1 Select Menu > Co ntacts . 2 Go to the desired name. Or, enter the firs t letters or characters of the name in the sea rch field, and go to the name. 3 To call the contact, press the ca ll key. If you have saved several numbers for a contact, select the desired numbe r from the list, and p ress the call key. End a call Press the end key. During a call To mute or unmute the microphone , select or . To put the call on hold or unhold it, select or . To activate the loudspeaker, select . If you have attach ed a compatible heads et with Blue tooth connectivity, to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Activate BT handsfree . To switch back to the hands et, select . To end the call, select . To switch between the acti ve and held calls, select . Tip: Whe n you have only one active voice call, to put the call on hold, press the call key. To unhold the call, press the call key again. 1 To send DTMF to ne strings (for example, a password) , select Options > Send DTMF . 2 Enter the DTMF string, or search for it in the contacts list . 3 To enter a wait ch aracter (w) or a pa use character (p), press * repeatedly. 4 To send the to ne, select OK . You can add DTMF tone s to the phone number or DTMF field in contact details. To end an active call and repla c e it by answering the waiting call, select Options > Replace . To end all your calls, select Options > End all calls . Many of the options that you can use during a voice call are network services. Voice and video mailboxe s To call your voice or video ma ilbox (network services, video mailbox available only in UMTS networks), in the home screen, select to open the dialler, tap and hold 1 , and select Voice mailbox or Video mailbox . 1 To change the phone number of your voice or video mailbox, select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call mailbox , a mailbox, and Options > Change number . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 36
2 Enter the number (ob tained from your network ser vice provider), and select OK . Answer or reject a call To answer a call, press the ca ll key. To answer the call when the to uch screen is locked , swipe Swipe to answer from left to right. To unlock the touch screen without an swering a call, swipe Swipe to unlock from right to left, an d then answer or reject the call, or send a reject ca ll text message. The ringin g tone is muted auto matically. If you do not want to answer a ca ll, to reject the call, p ress the end key. If the call divert feature (network service) is activated, reje cting an incomi ng call also diverts the call. To mute the ringing tone of an incoming call, select Si lence . To send a reject call text mess age without actually rejecting the call, informing the caller th at you cannot answer the call, select Silence and Send m sg. , edit th e message text, and press the call key. To activate the reject call text message feature, and to write a standard messa ge, select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call > Reject call with message , and Message text . Make a conference call Your device sup ports confer ence calls between a maximum of six participants, including yourself. 1 Make a call to the first participant. 2 To make a call to another participant, select Options > New call . The first call is put on hold. 3 When the new call is answered, t o join the first participant in the conf erence call, select . To add a new person to the call, make a call to another participant, and add the new ca ll to the conference call. To have a private conversation with one of the participants, select . Go to the participant, and select . The conference call is put on hold on your devi ce. The other participants can still continue the conference call. To return to the conference call, select . To drop a participant, select , go to the participant, and select . 4 To end the active conferen ce call, press the end key. Speed dial a phon e number To activate the feature, se lect Menu > Settings and Calling > Call > Speed dialling . 1 To assign a phone number to one of the number keys, select Menu > Settin gs and Calling > Spee d dialling . 2 Scroll to the key to which you want to assign the phone number, and select Options > Assign . 1 and 2 are reserved for th e voice and video mailboxes. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 37
To call in the home screen, select to open the dialler, select the assigned key number, and press the call key. To call in the home screen when speed dialling is active, select to open the dialler, and tap and hold the assign ed key number. Call waiting You can an swer a call wh en you have anot her call in progr ess. To activate call waiting (n etwork service), select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call > Call waiting . 1 To answer the waitin g call, press the call key. The first call is put on hold. 2 To switch between th e two calls, select Options > Swap . 3 To connect a call on hold wi th an active ca ll, and to disconnect yourself from the calls, select Options > Transfer . 4 To end the active call, press the end key. 5 To end both calls, select Options > End all calls . Voice dialling Your device automatically creates a voice tag for contacts. Listen to a voice tag for a contact 1 Select a contact and Options > Voice tag details . 2 Go to a contact detail, and select Options > Play voice tag . Make a call with a voice tag Note: Us ing vo ice tag s may be diffic ult in a noi sy environment or during an emer gency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialli ng in all circumstances. When you use voice dialling, th e loudspeaker is in use. Hold the device at a shor t distance awa y when you say the voice tag. 1 To start voice dialling, in th e home screen, press and hold the call key. If a compatible headset with the headset key is attached, press and hold the headse t key to start voice dialling. 2 A short tone sounds, and Sp eak now is displayed. Say clearly the name that is saved for the contact. 3 The device plays a synthesised voice ta g for the recognised contact in the selected device language , and displays the name and numb er. To cancel the voice dialling, select Quit . If several numbers are saved fo r a name, you can say also t he name and the number type, su ch as mobile or telephone. Make a video call When you make a video call (network service), you can see a real-time, two-way video betwe en you and the recipient of the call. The live video image, or video image captured by the camera in your device is shown to the video call recipient. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 38
To be able to make a video call, you must have a USIM card and be in the coverage of a UM TS network. For availability, pricing and subscription to video call services, contact your network service provider. A video call can only be made b etween two parties. The video call can be made to a compatible mobile device or an ISDN client. Video calls cannot be ma de while another voice, video, or data call is active. Icons You are not receiving video (the recipient is not sending video or the network is not transmittin g it). You have denied video sending from your device. To send a still image instead, select Menu > Se ttings and Calling > Call > Image in vid eo call . Even if you denied video sending during a video call, the call is still charged as a video call. Check the pricing with your service provider. 1 In the hom e screen, select to open the dialler, and enter the phone number. 2 Select Options > Call > Video call . The secondary camera on the fro nt is used by default for video calls. Starting a vi deo call may take a while. If the call is not successful (for example, video calls are not supported by the network, or the receiving device is not compatible), you are asked if you want to tr y a normal call or send a message instead. The video call is active when you see two video images, and hear the so und through th e loudspeaker. The call recipient may deny video sending (indicated by ), and you only hear the voice of the caller and may see a still image or a grey screen. 3 To end the video call, press the end key. During a video call To change between showing video or hearing the voice of the caller only, select or . To mute or unmute the microphone , select or . To activate the loudspeaker, select . If you have attached a compatible headset with Bluetooth connectivity, to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Activate BT handsfree . To switch back to the handset, select . To use the camera in the back of your device to send video, select Option s > Use secondary camera . To switch back to the camera in the front of your device, select Options > Use main camera . To take a snapshot of the video you are sending, select Options > Send snapshot . Video sending is paused and the snapshot is show n to the reci pient. The sna pshot is not save d. To zoom your image in or out, select Optio ns > Zoom . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 39
To change the video quality, select Options > Adjust > Video preferen ce > Normal quality , Clearer detail or Smoother motion . Answer or reject a video call When a video call arr ives, is displayed. 1 To answer the video call, press the call key. 2 To start sending live video image, select Yes . If you do not activate the video call, you only hear the voice of the caller. A grey screen replaces the video image. To replace the grey screen with a still image captured by the camera in your device, select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call > Image in video cal l . Internet calls About interne t calls With the internet call network s ervice, you can make and receive calls over the internet . Internet call services may support calls between computer s, between mobile phones, and between a VoIP device and a traditiona l telephone. For availability and cost s, contac t your internet call service provider. To make or receive an internet call, you must be in the service area of a wireless LAN (WLAN) or have a packet data (GPRS) connection in a UMTS network, and be connected to an internet call service. Your device may offer you an in stallation widget, to install internet call services. Log into an internet call service When an internet call service ha s been installed, a tab for the service is displayed in the contacts list. To log into a service, select Menu > Contacts , the service, and Options > Log in . To add contacts as service contacts to the friends list manually or from the contac ts list, select Optio ns > New contact . Make internet calls To call a contact when you are logged into a service, tap the contact in the friends list, and select . T o m a k e a n i n t er n e t c a ll i n the home screen, select , enter the number, and select Options > Call > Interne t call . To make an internet call to an internet call address, in the home screen, selec t and Optio ns > Open ke yboard . Enter the address, and select . Internet communication settings Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > Admin. settings > Net settings . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 40
To view and edit the settings fo r a service, select the service name. To remove a service from your service list, select Options > Delete service . Internet c all service se ttings Select Menu > Contacts , open a service tab, and select Options > Sett ings . To set an internet call service as the default service, select Default service . When you press the call key to call a number, your device makes an internet call using the default service if the service is connected. Yo u can set only one service at a time as the default service. To edit the service destination, select Servi ce connectivity . Video sharing Use video sharing (net work service) to send live video or a video clip from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. The loudspeaker is active when you activate vide o sharing. If you do not w ant to use the loudspeaker for the voice call while you share video, you can also use a compatible headset. Warning: Continuous exposure to hi gh volume may damage y our hearing. Listen to music at a moderate level, and do n ot hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use. Video sharing requirement s Video sharing requires a UMTS connection. Your ability to use video sharing depends on the availa bility of the UMTS network. For more information on the service, UMTS network availability, and fees as sociated with usin g this service, contact your service provider. To use video sharing, ensure the following: ⢠Your device is set up for person-to-person connections. ⢠You have an act ive UMTS connection and are within U MTS network coverage. If you move out side the UMTS network during a video sharing session, the sharing stops while your voice call continues. ⢠Both the sender and recipien t are registered to the UMTS network. If you inv ite some one to a sharing session and the recipientâÂÂs device is not within UMTS network coverage or does not have video sharing installed or person-to-person connection s set up, the recip ient does not receive invitations. You receive an error message that indicates that the recipient ca nnot accept the invita tion. Settings To set up video sharing , you need person-to-person and UMTS connection settings. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 41
Person-to-pe rson connection set tings A person-to-person connection is also known as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) conn ection. The SIP profile settings must be configured in your device before you can use video sharing. Ask your service provid er for the SIP profile settings , and save them to your device. Your service provider may sen d you the settings or give you a list of the needed parameters. To add a SIP address to a cont act: 1 Select Menu > Co ntacts . 2 Open the contact or crea te a new contact. 3 Select Options > Edit . 4 Select Options > Add detail > Share video . 5 Enter the SIP addr ess in the format username@domainname (you can use an IP address instead of a domain name). If you do not know the SIP address for the contact, you can use the phone number of th e recipient, including the country code, to share video (i f supported by the network service provider). UMTS connection sett ings To set up your UMTS connection: ⢠Contact your service provider to establish an agreement for you to use the UMTS ne twork. ⢠Ensure that the UMT S access p oint connection settings for your device are config ured properly. For more information about the s ettings, contact your se rvice provider. Share live video or vid eo clips During an active voice call, s elect Optio ns > Share video . 1 To share live video during the call, select Live video . To share a video clip, select Video clip. A list of video clips saved in the device memory, the mass memory, or a memory card (if availa ble) op ens. Select the clip you want to share. You may need to convert the video clip into a suitable format to be able to share it. If y our device notifies you that the video clip must be converted, select OK . Your device must have a video editor for the conversion to work. 2 If the recipient has several SIP addres ses or phone numbers including the country code saved in Contacts, select the desired address or number. If the SIP address or phone number of the recipi ent is not available, enter the address or number of the recipient including the country co de, and select OK to send the invitation. Your device sends the invitation to the SIP address. Sharing begins automat ically when the recipient accep ts the invitation . Options during video sharin g or to mute or unmute the microphone or to switch the loudspeaker on and off or to pause and resume video sharin g to switch to full screen mode (available for receiver only) é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 42
3 To end the sharing se ssion, select Stop . To end the voice call, press the end key. Wh en you end the call, video sharing also en ds. To save the liv e video you shared, select Yes when pro mpted. The device notifies you of th e location of the saved video. If you access other applications while you are sharing a video clip, the sharing is paused. To return to the video sharing view and to continue sh aring, in the home screen, select Options > Continue . Accept an invitation When someone sends you a vi deo sharing invitati on, the invitation message displays th e senderâÂÂs name or SIP address. If someone sends you a sharing invitation and you are not within 3G network coverage, you will n ot know that you received an invitation. When you receive an invitation , select from the following: Yes â Accept the invitation, an d activate the sharin g session. No â Reject the invitation. Th e sender receives a message that you rejected the invitat ion. You can also press the e nd key to reject the invitation and end the voice call. To end the sharing session, select Stop . To end the voice call, press the end key. When you en d the call, video sh aring also ends. Log The log stores information ab out the communication history of the device. The device registers missed and received calls only if the network supports these functions, the device is switched on, and within the netw ork service area. Recent calls Select Menu > Applications > Log and Recent calls . To view missed, received, and dialled calls, select Missed calls , Received calls or Dialled numbers . Tip: To open the dialled numbers list in the home screen, press the call key. Tip: To open the dialled numbers list in the home screen, press the call key. On the toolbar, select from the following: Call â Call the desired contact. Create message â Send a message to the desired contact. Open Conta cts â Open the contacts list. Select Options and from the following: Save to Contacts â Save the high lighted phone number from a recent calls list to your contacts. Clear list â Clear the selected recent calls list. Delete â Clear a highlighted ev ent in the selected list. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 43
Settings â S e l e c t Log duration and the length of time that the communication information is saved in the log. If you select No log , no information is saved in the log. Call duration Select Menu > Applications > Log . To view the approximate duration of your last call, dialled and received calls, select Call duration . Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, de pending on network features, rounding off for billing, taxes, and so forth. Packet data Select Menu > Applications > Log . You may be charged for your packet data connection s by the amount of data sent and re ceived. Check the amount of data sent or received during packet data connectio ns Select Packet data > All sent data or All received dat a . Clear both sent and received information Select Packet data > Optio ns > Clear counters . You need the lock code to cl ear the information. Monitor all communication even ts Select Menu > Applications > Log . To open the general log where you can monitor all voice calls, text messages, or data an d wireless LAN connections registered by the device, select the general log tab . Subevents, such as a text message sen t in more than one part and packet data connection s, are logged as one communication event. Connecti ons to your mailbox, multimedia messaging centre , or web pages are shown as packet data connections. To view how much data was trans ferred and how long a certain packet data connection lasted, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event indicated by GPRS , and select O ptions > View . To copy a phone number from the log to the clipboard, and paste it into a text message, for example, select Op tions > Use number > Copy . To filter the log, select Options > Filter and a filter. To set the log duration, select Optio ns > Settings > Log duration . If you select No l og , all the log contents, recent calls register, and messagi ng delivery reports are permanently deleted. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 44
Contacts (pho nebook) To open Contacts, s elect Menu > Contacts . You can save and update conta c t information, such as phone numbers, home addresses, or e-mail addresses of your contacts. You can add a personal ringing ton e or a thumbnail image to a contact. Y ou can also create contact groups, w hich allow you to send text messages or e-ma il to many recipients at the same time. Save and edit names and nu mbers 1 To add a new contact to t he contacts list, tap . 2 Tap a field to enter the inform ation in the field. To close the text input, select . Fill in the fields that you want, and select Done . To edit contacts , select a contact an d Optio ns > Edit . Contacts toolbar On the contacts list toolbar, select from the following: Call â Call the desired contact. Create message â Send a message to the desired contact. New contact â Create a new contact. Manage names and numbe rs Select Menu > Contacts . Delete contacts Select a contact and Options > Delete . To delete several contacts at the same time , select Options > Mark/Unmark to mark the desired contacts, and to delete, select Optio ns > Delete . Copy contacts Select the contact, Options > Copy , and the desired location. Send a contact to another device Tap and hold a c ontact, and s elect Send busine ss card . Add contacts to favourites Tap and hold a c ontact, and s elect Add to favo urites . Listen to the voi ce tag assigned to a contact Select the contact and Options > Voice tag details > Options > Play v oice tag . Before using voice tags, note the following: ⢠Voice tags are not langua ge-dependent. They are dependent on the speaker's voice. ⢠You must say the name exactly a s you said it when you recorded it. ⢠Voice tags are sensitive to background noise. Record voice tags and use them in a quiet environment. ⢠Very short nam es are not acce pted. Us e long names, and avoid similar names for different numbers. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 45
Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emer gency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialli ng in all circumstances. Default numbers and addresses You can assign defa ult numbers or addresse s to a contact. If a contact has se veral numbers or addresse s, you can eas ily call or send a message to a cert ain number or address . The default number is also used in voice dialling. 1 In the contacts list, select a contact. 2 Select Options > Defaults . 3 Select a default to which you want to add a number or an address, and select Assign . 4 Select a number or an address you want to set as a default. 5 To exit the Defaults view and save the chan ges, tap outside the view. Contact cards Select Menu > Contacts and a contact. All available communication methods for the selected cont act are displayed in the contact cards view. Select a contact f rom the li st, the desired communication method, Options , and from the following: Edit â Edit, add, or delete the contact card f ields. Defaults â Define the numbers and addresses to use by default when you communicate with th e contact, if a contact has more th an one num b er or address defined. Voice tag details â View the voice tag details, or listen to the voice tag for the contac t. The available options and comm unication methods may va ry. Set contacts as favourites Select Menu > Contacts . Favourites are the contacts yo u have set as your fav ourite contacts. Thes e contacts ap pear at the top of the con tacts list. To set a contact as a favou rite, select a contact and Options > Add to favourites . Favourites are marked wi th a star icon. To remove a contact from favourites, select a contact and Options > Remove from favourit es . The rem oved contact is moved back to the standard contacts lis t. Ringing tones, images, an d call text f or contacts You can define a ringing tone for a contact or group, and a n image and a call text for a contac t. When the contact calls you, the device plays the selected ringing tone and shows the call text or image (if the callerâÂÂs phone number is sent with the call and your device recognises it). To define a ringing tone for a contact or a contact group, select the contact or contact group an d Options > Edit > Ringing tone , and a rin ging tone. To add more fields to a contact details view, select th e contact and Options > Edit > Options > Add detai l . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 46
To define a call t ext for a cont act, select th e contact and Options > Edi t > Options > Add detail > Call alert tex t . Tap the text field to enter the call text, an d select . To add an image for a contact saved in the device memory, select the contact, Options > Ed it > Add image , and an image from Photos. To remove the ringing tone, select Default to ne from the list of ringing tones. To view, change or remove the imag e from a contact, select the contact, Options > Image , and the desired option. Copy contacts When you open t he contacts list for the first tim e, the device asks if you want to copy names and numbers from th e SIM card to your device. To start copying, select OK . If you do not want to copy the contacts from the SIM card to your device, select Cancel . T h e d e v i c e a s k s i f y o u w a n t t o v i e w the SIM card contacts in the co ntacts directory. To view the contacts, select OK . The contact s list opens, and the names stored on your SIM card are indicated with . SIM services For availability and informati on on using SIM card services, contact your SIM card vendor. This may be the network service provider or other vendor. SIM contacts To set the names and num bers stored on the SIM card t o be shown on the contacts list, select Options > Settings > Contacts to display > SIM memory . You can add and edit SIM contacts, or call them. The numbers you save in the contacts list may not be automatically saved to your SIM card. To save n umbers to the SIM card, select a contact and Options > Copy > SIM memory . To select whether the new contacts you enter are s aved to your device or your SIM card, select Options > Settin gs > Defaul t savi ng memo ry > Phone me mory or SIM memory . Fixed dialling Select Menu > Contacts and Options > SIM n umbers > Fixed dial contacts . With the fixed dialling service, you can restrict calls from your device to certain phone numbers. Not all SIM cards support the fixed dialling service. Fo r more informat ion, contact your service provider. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 47
When security features that restrict calls are in use (such as call barring, closed user group, and fixed dialling), calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Call barrin g and call diverting cannot be active at the same time. You need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivat e fixed dialling or edit your fixed dialling con tacts. Contact your service provider for your PIN2 code. Select Options and from the following: Activate fixed dialling â A ctivate the fixed dialing. Deactivate fixed dialling â Deac tivate the fixed dialing. New SIM contact â Enter the contact name and phone number to which calls are allowed. Add from Contact s â Copy a contact from the list of cont acts to the fixed dialling list. To send text messages to the SIM cont acts while the fixed dialling service is active, you need to add th e text message centre number to the fixed dialling list. Contact groups To open the group list, open the contacts list, and tap . Create contact groups 1 To create a new group, in the group list, select Options > Ne w group . Use the default name or enter a new name. Select OK . 2 To add members to the group, select th e group and Options > Add members . 3 Mark each contact you want to add, and select OK . Manage contact groups To send a message to all group members, to set a ringing tone for a group, or to rename or delete a group, tap and hold the group, and select Create me ssage , Ringing tone , Rename , or Delete . To add a co ntact to a g roup, select the gr oup and Option s > Add members . To check which other groups a contact belongs to, select the group, scroll to the contact, an d select Option s > Belongs to groups . To remove a contact from a group, select the group, scroll to the contac t, and select Options > Remove from group . Ovi Contacts About Ov i Contacts With Ovi Contacts, you can stay connected to your friends and family, follow what they are up to, and discover new friends in the Ovi community. You ca n also back up cont acts from your device to Ovi. Additionally, you can share your location with your friends. To use Ovi Contacts, go to www.ovi.com. Start using Ovi Contact s Select Contacts , and open the Ovi tab . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 48
The Ovi Contacts service is pa rt of Ovi, and uses the same account information. If you are new to Ovi and its services, to st art using the Ovi Contacts application, you must register to Ovi by creating a Nokia account. Create a Nokia account 1 Select Ovi Chat , and when prompted, connect to the internet. 2 Enter the required information. 3 In the My profile view, ente r your profile information. Your first and last na me are mandatory deta ils. 4 Select Done . If you have already registered to Ovi using your PC or mobile device, you can start u sing Ovi Contacts wit h the same account details. Sign in to Ovi Contacts and activate the service Select Ovi Chat , and enter your user name and password. If you have not yet provided yo ur profile information for Ovi Contacts, do so, and se lect Done . Your first and last name are mandatory details. Connect to the service Select Menu > Contacts , and open the Ovi tab. Connect to Ovi Contacts Select Go onli ne and the connection method. Use a wireless LAN (WLAN) connection where available. Cancel the connection Select Options > Cancel connect ing . A packet data connection ma y generate additional data transmission charges. For pricing details, contact your network service provider. Select Go online > Options and from the following: Select â Select the item. Go online â Connect to the service if you are offline. My profile â Edit your profile information. Recommend to friend â Invite a contact to join Ovi Contacts. The invitation is sent as a text messa ge. Settings â Modify the O vi Contacts settings. The available options ma y vary. Create and e dit your profil e Edit your profile informati on Select My profile . View the profiles of your Ovi Cont acts friends Select a friend and Options > Profile . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 49
Your profile information is visibl e to your Ovi Contacts friends. Only the following profile detai ls are displayed to other Ovi Contacts users, for example, du ring a search: first name and last name. To modify your priv acy setting s, access Ovi on yo ur PC, and sign in to your N okia account. Change your profile image Select the profile image, Select existi ng image , and the new image. You can also edit or re move the current profile image or capture a new one. Change your availability By default, your availa bility is set to Available . To change your availability, select the icon. Tell your friends what yo u are doing at the mome nt Select What are you doing? , and enter text in the field. Show your friends what music you are currently listening to Select Now play ing . To do this, you must allow your now playing informat ion to be shared in the presence settings . Edit your contact information Select a field, and ent er text. In the My profile view, select Options and fr om the following: Edit â Cut, copy, or paste text. Change â Change your s tatus (when t he status field is selected). Activate â S tart broadcasting your locat ion or your now playing information to your friends (when either field is selected). Undo changes â Undo the changes you made in the profile view. Edit shared locations â Select the landmarks you want to broadcast to your friends (when the My location field is selected). Stop sharing â Stop broadcasti ng your location to your friends (when the My location field is selected). The available options ma y vary. Find and add friends Select Options > Invite friend . Search for a friend Enter the name of the friend in the Search friends field, an d select the search icon. You ca nnot search for friends based on their mobile number or e-mail address. Browse the search results Select Next results or Previous results . Start a new search Select New search . If the friends you searched for could not be found, t hey are not registered Ovi members, or they have chosen to be invisible in searches. When prompted, s end a text message to your friends to invite them to join Ovi Contacts. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 50
Send an invita tion to join Ovi Cont acts Select Select service: and the service you know your friend uses. Enter you r friendâÂÂs user name, and s elect the send icon. Select Options and from the following: Select â Select an item. Open â Open an item. Invite as friend â Send an invitation to the con tact. Show profile â View the profile of the contact. Renew invitati on â Resend an invitation to join Ovi Contacts to a pending friend. Search â Search for the contact whose name or other related keyword you entered in the Search friends field. Edit tex t â Cut, copy, or paste text. The available options may vary. Chat with your friends Start a chat with a friend Select the friend. Send a chat message Enter the text in the message field, and select the send icon. In the chat view, select Op tions and from the following: Send â Send the message . Send file â Send an image, video clip, audio file, or other file to your chat partner. Send my location â Send your location details to your chat partner (if supported by both devices). Add smiley â Insert a smiley. Profile â View the details of a friend. My profile â Select your presence status or profile image, personalise your message, or change your details. Edit text â Copy o r paste text . End chat â End the active chat. Exit â End all active chats , and close the application. The available options ma y vary. To receive location information from your friend, you must have the Maps app lication. To send and receive location information, both the Maps an d Positioning applications are needed. To receive any files, you or the recipient must accept the file. To cancel sending or receiv ing while the file is being transferred, select Cancel . View the location of your friend Select Show on map . Return to th e Ovi Con tacts ma in view without en ding the chat Select Back . Add, call, or c opy phone numbers from a chat Go to a phone number in a chat, and select Op tions and the appropriate option. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 51
Ovi Sync To sync your device with Ovi, you must ha ve a Nokia account and activate the Ovi Contacts service on your device. Sync your device with Ovi 1 If you sync your device with Ovi for the first ti me, use the Sync wizard to select what content you w ant to sync, and the sync interval. 2 Select Synchronise . If your device is in the Offline profile, connect to the internet when prompted. Select Options and from the following: Start â Sync your device with Ovi. Cancel â Cancel an ongoing sync. Synchronisation settings â Modify your sync settings. The available options may vary. Share your location Open the Contacts application an d the Ovi tab. To share your location, select Options > Settings > Presence > Share my location and from the following: Sharing allowed â Allow your friends to see your location. My shared landmarks â Select the landmarks from where your location is broadcast to your friends. Refresh inte rval â Select how often you broa dcast your current location. Add and sele ct landmar ks: To add a location to the landmarks list, select Share my location > My sha red landmarks > Options > New landmark . To add your current locat ion as a landmark , select Current position . To browse for a location on a map, select Select from map . To add a landmark manually, select Enter manually . To select the locations you wan t to share with your friends, select Share my l ocation > My shared landmarks , and select the landmarks fr om the list. Select Options to edit, mark, and unmark item s on the list. Whenever you are online with the Contacts on Ovi service, and in one of the selected loca tions, your friends can see your location. Ovi Contacts sett ings Select Options > Settings . Select from the following: Account â Access your account details, and define your visibility to others in a search. Presenc e â Show information about your location to your friends, and allow them to s ee when you are making a phone call (call status). é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 52
Personalisation â Modify the settings related to th e startup and tones of the Ovi Contacts appl ication, and automatica lly accept friend invitations. Connection â Select th e network conn ection to use, and activate roaming wa rnings. Using a packet data connection may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. For information abou t data transmission charges, contact your network service provider. Exit â End all a ctive chats, and close th e application. Nokia account settings Select Options > Settings > Account . Edit yo ur acc ount de tails Select My account . Define your visibi lity in searches Select My account > Visibility in search . You must be online to change your visibility. Presence settings Select Options > Settings > Presence . Modify pres ence settings Select from the following: Share my location â Allow your friends to see your location. Share now playin g â Allow your friends to see what music you are currently listening to on your mobile device. Share call status â Allow your friends to see your call status. Share your location Select Share my l ocation and from the following: Sharing allowed â Allow your friends to see your location in selected landmarks. My shared landmarks â Select the landmarks from where your location is broadcast to your friends. Refresh interval â Se lect how often you broadcast your current location. Add a location to the landmarks list Select Share my l ocation > My shared landmarks > Options > New landmark . Add your current location as a landmark Select Curre nt position . Browse for a location on a map Select Select f rom map . Add a landmark manually Select Enter man ually . Select locations you want to share with your friends 1 Select Share my location > My shared landmarks . 2 Select the landmarks from the list. 3 Select Options to edit, mark, and unmark items on the list. Depending on you r settings, your friends ca n see é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 53
your location when you are in one of the selected locations. Personalisation settings Select Options > Settings > Personalisation . Select from the following: Login on start-up â Sign in automatically to Ovi Contacts when you switch on your mobile device. Auto-accept frien d invit. â Ac cept friend requests automatically with out notification. Message tone â Select a tone for new messages. Friend online tone â Select the tone that sounds when a friend comes online. Icon on Home scre en â Add the Ovi Contacts shortcut icon to your device home screen. Connection settings Select Options > Settings > Connection . Modify connec tion settings Select Network connection and the desired connection. To use the default connection defined in your device connection settings, select Default connection . Set the de vice to notify y ou when your home ne twork is not available To receive a warning when your device is trying to connect to another network, se lect Roaming warning > On . Messaging Messaging main view Select Menu > Messaging (network service). To create a new message, select New message . Tip: To avoid rewriting messages that you send often, use texts in the Templates folder in My folders. You can also create and save your own templates. Messaging contains the following folders: Inbox â Received messages, except e-mail and c ell broadcast messages, are stored here. My folders â Organise your messages into folders. Mailbox â Connect to your remote mailbox to retrieve your new e-mail messages, or vi ew your previously retrieved e-mail messages offline. Drafts â Draft messages that hav e not been sent are stored he re. Sent â The last message s that have be en sent, excludin g messages sent usi ng Bluetooth connectivity, are stored here. You can change th e number of messages to save in this folder. Outbox â Messages waiting to be sent are temporarily stored in the outbox, for ex ample, when your device is outside network coverage. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 54
Del ivery reports â Y ou can request the network to send you a delivery report of the text mess ages and multimedia messages you have sent (net work service). Write and send messages Select Menu > Messaging . Important: Exercise caution wh en opening messages. Messages may contain maliciou s software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Before you can create a multim edia message or write a mail, you must have the correct co nnection settings defined. The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exceeds th is limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. Only devices that have compat ible features can receive and display multimedia m essages. The ap pearance of a message may vary depending on the receivi ng device. Check the size limit of mail messages w ith your service provider. If you attempt to send a mail message that exceeds the size limit of the mail serv er, the message is left in the Outbox folder, and the device attempt s to resend it periodically. Sending a mail requires a data connection, and continuous attempts t o resend the mail ma y incur charges from your service provider. In the Outbox folder, you can delete such a message or move it to the Drafts folder. Messag ing r equires netwo rk ser vices. Send a text or multimedia mess age Select New message . Send an audio or mail message Select Options > Create message , and the relevant option. Select recipients or groups from the contacts list Select from the toolbar. Enter the number o r mail address manually Tap the To fi eld. Enter the subject o f the mail or m ultimedia me ssage Enter it in the Subject field, . If the Subject field is not visible, select Option s > Message head er fields to change the fields that are visible. Write the me ssage Tap the message field. Add an object to a message or mail Select and the relevant type of content. The message type may change to mu ltimedia messa ge based on the inserted content. Send the mess age or mail Select , or press the call key. Your device supports text messag es beyond the limit for a single message. Longer messag es are sent as two or more messages. Your service provid er may charge accordingly. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 55
Characters with accents, ot her marks, or some language options take more space, and limit th e number of characters that can be sent in a single message. Messaging inbox Receive messa ges Select Menu > Messaging and Inbox . In the Inbox folder, indicates an unread text message, an unread mu ltimedia message, an unread audio message, a nd data received through Bluetooth connectivity. When you receive a message, and 1 new me ssage are displayed in the home screen . To open the message, select Show . To open a message in the Inbo x folder, select the message. To re ply to a received me ssage, select Op tions > Reply . Multimedia mess ages Important: Exercise caution wh en opening messages. Messages may contain maliciou s software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. You may receive a notification tha t a multimedia message is waiting in the multimedia message centre. To start a packet data connection to retrieve th e messa ge to your device, select Options > Retrieve . When you open a multimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a mes sage. is shown if sound is included, or if video is included. To play the sound or the video, select the indicator. To see the media objects that have been included in the multimedia message, select Option s > Objects . If the message includes a multimedia presentation, is displayed. To play the presen tation, select the indicator. Data, settings, and web service message s Your device can r eceive many kinds of messa ges that contain data, such as busines s cards, ringing tones , operator logos, calendar entries, and e-mail noti fications. Yo u may also receive settings from your serv ice provider in a configuration message. To save the data from the messag e, select Options and th e corresponding option. Web service messages are notifications (fo r example, news headlines) and may con tain a text mess age or a link. For availability and subscript ion, contact your service provider. Mailbox Define e-m ail settin gs Select Menu > Messaging and Mailbox . To use e-mail, you must have defined a valid internet access point (IAP) in the device an d have defined your e-mail settings corr ectly. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 56
You must have a separat e e-mail account. Follow the instructions given by your remote mailbox and internet service provider (ISP). If you select Messag ing > Mailbox and have not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. To start creating the e-mail settings with the mailbox guide, select Start . When you create a new mailbox, the n ame you give to the mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailbox es. Open the mai lbox Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. When you open the ma ilbox, the device asks if you want to connect to the mailbox. Connect to your mailbox and re trieve new e-mail headers or messages Select Yes . When you view messages online, you are continuously connected to a remote mail box using a data connection. View previo usly retriev ed e-mail messages offline Select No . Create a new e-mail mess age Select Options > Create message > E-mail . Close the da ta connection to the remote mailbox Select Options > Disconnect . Retrieve e- mail mess ages Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. If you are offline, select Options > Connect to open a connection to the remote ma ilbox. Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Messages may contain ma licious software or othe rwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1 When you have an open connection to a remote mai lbox, select Opti ons > Retrieve e-mai l > New to retrieve all new messages, Selected to retrieve only selected messages, or All to retrieve all messages from the mailbox. To stop retrieving messages, sele ct Cancel . 2 To close the connection an d view the e-mail messages offline, select Options > Disconnect . 3 To open an e-mail message, select the message. If the e- mail message has not been retrieved and you are offline, you are asked if you want to retrieve this message from the mailbox. To view e-mail attachments, open the message, and select the attachment field indicated by . If the attachment has not been retrieved to the device, select Options > Retrieve . To retrieve e-mail messag es automatically , select Options > E-mail settings > Automatic re trieval . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 57
Setting the device to retrieve e-mai l automatically may involve the transmission of la rge amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transmission cha rges. Delete e-m ail messages Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To delete the con tents of an e-mail mess age from the device while still retaining it in the remote mailbox, select Options > Delet e > Phone only . The device mirrors the e-mail headers in the remote mailbox. Although you delete the messag e content, the e-mail header stays in your device. If you want to remove the header as well, you must be co nnected to th e s erver when deleting the message from your device and the remote ma ilbox. It there is no connection to the server , the header is deleted when you make a connection from your device to the remote mailbox again to upda te the status. To delete an e-mail from th e device and the remote mailbox, select Options > Delete > Phone and serv er . To cancel deleting an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted from the device an d server during the next connection ( ), select Options > Restore . Disconnect from the mailbox When you are online, to end the data connection to the remote mailbox, select Opt ions > Disconnect . View messages on a SIM card Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > SIM messages . Before you can view SIM messag es, you must copy them to a folder in your device. 1 Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 2 Select Options > Copy . A list of folders opens. 3 To start copying, select a folder. To view the messages, open the folder. Cell broadcast messages Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > Operator msgs. . Cell broadcast (network service) allows you to receive messages on various topics, su ch as weather or traffic conditions, from your service provider. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, co ntact your service provider. This service may not be available for all regions. Cell broadcast messages cann ot be received in UMTS networks. A packet da ta co nnection may prevent cell broadcast reception. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 58
Service commands Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Service commands . With service comman ds (network service) you can enter and send service requests (also known as USSD commands), such as activation comman ds for netw ork services, to your servi ce provider. This service may not be available for all regions. Messaging settings The settings may be preconfigured in your device, or you may receive them in a messa ge. To enter settings man ually, fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or an asterisk. Some or all message centres or access points may be preset for your device by your service provide r, and you m ay not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Text message settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Text message . Select from the following: Message centres â View a list of all text message centres that have been defined. Message centre in use â Select which message centre to use to deliver text messages. Character encoding â To use character conversion to another encoding system when available, select Reduced support . Receive report â Select whether the network sends delivery reports on your me ssages (network service). Message validi ty â Select how long the message centre resends your message if the first at tempt fails (network service). If the m essage cannot be sent within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre. Message sent as â To learn if your message centre is able to convert text messages into t hese other formats, contact your service provider. Preferred connection â Select the connecti on to use. Reply via same centre â Select whether you want the reply message to be sent using the sa me text message centre number (network service). Multimedia me ssage setti ngs Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > Settings > Multimedia message . Select from the following: Image size â Define the size of the image in a multimed ia message. MMS creation mod e â If you select Guided , the device informs you if you try to send a message that may n ot be supported by the recipient. If you select Restricted , the device prevents you from sending me ssages that may not be supported. To inclu de content in your m essages without notifications, select Free . Access point in use â Select which access point is used as the preferred connection. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 59
Multimedia retri eval â Select how you want to re ceive messages, if available. To receive messages automatically in your home network, select Auto in home net w. . Outsi de your home network, you receive a notification that there is a message to retrieve in the mult imedia message centre. If you select Always automatic , your de vice automatically makes an active packet da ta connec tion to retrieve the message both in and outside your home network. Select Manual to retrieve multimedia message s from the message ce ntre manually, or Off to prevent receipt of any mu ltimedia messages. Automatic retriev al may not be supported in a ll regions. Allow anonymous msgs. â Reject messages from anonymous senders. Receive adve rts â Receive multimedia message advertisements (n etwork service). Receive reports â Display the st atus of sent messa ges in the log (network service). Deny rep ort sendin g â Prevent your device from sending delivery reports of received messages. Message validity â Select for how long the message centre resends your messa ge if the first attemp t fails (ne twork service). If the message canno t be sent within this time period, the message is delete d from the message centre. The device requires network su pport to indicate that a sent message has be en received or read. Depending on the network and other circumstan ces, this information may not always be reliable. E-mail settings Manage mailboxes Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > Settings > E- mail . To select which mailbox you want to use to send and receive e-mail, select Mailbox in use and a mailbox. To remove a mailbox and its messages from your device, select Mailboxes , tap the mailbox to be removed if it is not already highlight ed, and select Options > Delete . To create a new mailbox, select Mailboxes > Options > New mailbox . The name you give to the new mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Mess aging main view. You can ha ve up to six mailboxes. Select Mailboxes and a mailbo x to change the con nection settings , user sett ings, re tr ieval settings, and automatic retrieval settings. Connection settings Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > Settings > E- mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and Connection settings . To edit the settings for the e-mail you receive, select Incoming e-mail , and f rom the following: User name â Enter your user name given to you by your service provider. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 60
Password â Enter your password. If you leave this field blank, you are prompted for the password when you try to connect to your remote mailbox. Incoming mail server â E n t e r t h e I P a d dr es s o r ho s t n a m e of the mail server that receives your e-mail. Access point in use â Select an internet access point (IAP). Mailbox name â Enter a name for the mailbox. Mailbox type â Defines the e-mail protocol that your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4. This settin g cannot be changed. Security â Select the security op tion used to secure the connection to the remote mailbox. Port â Define a port for the connection. APOP secure login (for POP3 only) â Use with the POP 3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to the remote e-mail server while connecting to the mailbox. To edit the settings for th e e-mail you send, select Outgoing e-mail and from the following: My e-mail address â Enter the e-mail address given to you by your service provider. Outgoing mail se rver â E n te r th e IP a dd r es s o r ho s t n a me of the mail server that send s your e-mail. Yo u may only be able to use the outgoing server of your service provider. For more information, contact your service provider. The settings for user n ame, password, a ccess point, security, and port are similar to the ones in incoming e-mail. User settings Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > Settings > E- mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and User settings . Select from the following: My name â Enter your own name. Your name replaces yo ur e-mail address in the recipien tâÂÂs device if the recipientâÂÂs device supports this function. Send message â Define how e-mail is sent from your device. Select Immediately for the device to connect to the mailbox when you select Send message . If you select During next conn. , e-mail is sent when th e co nnection to the remote mailbox is available. S e n d c o p y t o s e l f â Select whether you want to send a copy of the e-mail to your own mailbox . Include signature â Select whether yo u wa nt to attach a signature to your e-mails. New e-mail alerts â Select whether you want to receive the new e-mail indication s (a tone, a note, and a mail indicator) when new e-mail is received. E-mail deletion â Select whether you want to delete e- mails from phone only, from phon e and server, or to be asked each time separately. Reply-to address â Define an e-mail address to which replies to e-mails sent from the mailbox in question are delivered. Retrieval se ttings Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > Settings > E- mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and Retrieval settings . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 61
Select from the following: E-mail retrie val â Define which parts of the e-mail are retrieved: Headers only , Size limit (POP3), or Msgs. & attachments (POP3). Retrieval amount â Define how many new e-mail messages are retrieved to the mai lbox. IMAP4 folder path ( for IMAP4 only) â Define the folder path for folders to be subscribed. Folder subscriptions (for IMAP4 only) â Subscribe to other folders in the remote mailbox, and retrieve content from those folders. Automatic retri eval settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > E- mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and Auto matic retrieval . Select from the following: E-mail notif ications â To automatically retrieve the headers to your device when you receive new e-mail in your remote mailbox, select Auto -update or Only in home netw. E-mail retrieval â To automa tically retrieve the headers of new e-mail from your remote mailbox at defined times, select Enabled or Only in home netw. Define when and how often the e-mails are retrieved. E-mail notif ications and E-mail retrieval cannot be active at the same time. Setting the device to retrieve e-mai l automatically may involve the transmission of la rge amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transmission charge s. Web service mess age settings Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > Settings > Service message . Select whether you want to re ceive service messages. To set the device to automatically activate the browser and start a network connection to retrieve content when you receive a service message , select Download messages > Automatically . Cell broadcast se ttings Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > Settings > Operator message . Check the available topics and related topic n umbers with your service provider. Select from the following: Reception â Select whether you want to receive cell broadcast messages. Langua ge â Select the langu ages in which you want to receive messages: All , Selected , or Other . Topic detection â Select whether the device automatically searches for new topic numbers, and saves the ne w numbers without a name to the topic list. Other settings Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > Settings > Other . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 62
Select from the following: Save sent messages â Select whether you want to save copies of the text, multimedia, or e-mail messages th at you send to the Sent folder. Number of saved msgs. â Define how many sent messages are saved to the sent folder at a time . When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. Memory in use â Select the memory where you want to save your mess ages. Show messages i n groups â Define whether you want to group the messages in I nbox, Sent, Drafts and My folders . Show e-mai ls in grou ps â Define whether you want to group your e -mail messages. Mail for Exchange With Mail for Exchange, you ca n receive your work e-mail to your devi ce. You can r ead and re ply to your e-mails, view and edit compatible attachments , view calendar information, receive and reply to meeting requests, schedule meetings, and view, add, and ed it contact inform ation. Mail for Exchange Use of the Mail for Exchange is limited to over-the-air synchronisation of PIM info rmation between the Nokia device and the authorised Microsoft Exchange server. Mail for Exchange can be set up only if your company has Microsoft Exchange Server. In additi on, your company's IT administrator must have activa ted Mail for Exchange for your account. Before starting to set up Mail for Exchange, ensure that you have the following: ⢠A corporate e-mail ID ⢠Your office network user na me ⢠Your office network password ⢠Your network domain name (contact your compan y's IT department) ⢠Your Mail for Exchange server name (contact your company's IT department) Depending on your company's Mail for Exchange server configuration, you may need to enter other information in addition to those listed. If you do not know the correct information, c ontact your comp any's IT d epartment . With Mail for Excha nge, the use of th e lock code may be m a n d a t o r y . T h e d e f a u l t l o c k c o d e o f y o u r d e v i c e i s 1 2 3 4 5 , b u t your company's IT administrator may ha ve set a different one for you to use. You can access and modify the Mail for Exchan ge profile and settings in the Messaging setti ngs. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 63
Connectivity Your device offers several opt ions to connect to the internet or to another compatible device or PC. Data connections and access points Your device supports packet data connections (network service), such as GPRS in the GSM network. W hen you use your device in GSM and UMTS networ ks, multiple data connections can be active at the same time, and a ccess points can share a data connection. In the UMTS network, data connections remain active during voice calls. You can also use a WLAN data co nnection. O nly one connection in one wireless LAN can be active at a time, but several applications can use t h e same internet access point. To establish a data connection , an access point is required. You can define differen t kinds of access points, such as the following: ⢠MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages ⢠Internet access point (IAP) to send and receive e-mail and connect to the internet Check the type of access poin t you need with your service provider for the service you want to access. For availability and subscription to packet data connection services, contact your service provider. Network settin gs Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > Network . Your dev ice can aut o matica lly switch between GSM and UMTS networks. GSM networks are indicated with . UMTS networks are indicated with . An active high-speed downli nk packet access (HSDPA) connection (network serv ice) is indicated with . Select from the following: Network mode â S e l e c t w h i c h n e t w o r k t o u s e . I f y o u s e l e c t Dual mode , the device uses the GSM or UM TS network automatically, according to the network param eters and the roaming agreements betwe en the wirele ss service providers. For details and roaming costs, contact your network service provider. This option is shown only if supp orted by the wireless service provider. A roaming agreement is an ag reement between two or more service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use the services of other service providers. Operator selection â Select Au tomatic to set the device to search for and select one of th e available networks, or Manual to manually select the ne twork from a list. If the connection to the manually se lected network is lost, the device sounds an error tone and asks you to reselect a network. The selected network must have a roaming agreement with your home network. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 64
Cell info display â Set the device to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on microcellular network (MCN) technology and to activate cell info reception. Wireless LAN Your device can detect and connect to wireless local area networks (WLAN). Using a WL AN, you can co nnect your devic e to the internet and compatib le devices that have WLAN support. About WLA N To use a wireless local area netw ork (WLAN) connect ion, it must be available in the loca tion, and your device must be connected to the WLAN. Some W LANs are protected, and you need an access key from the se rvice provider to connect to them. Using WLAN may be restricted in some countries. For example, in France, you ar e only allowed to use WLAN indoors. For more information, contact your local authorities. Features that use WLAN, or that are allowed to run in th e background while using ot her features, increase the demand on battery power and redu ce the battery life. Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increase the security of your wireless LAN connection. Using encrypt ion reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your data. WLAN connections To use a wireless LAN (WLAN) connection, you must create an internet access poin t (IAP) for WLAN. Use the acc ess point for applications that need to connect to the internet. A WLAN connection is establis hed when you create a data connection using a WLAN inte rnet access point. The active WLAN connection ends when you end the data connection. You can use WLAN du ring a voice call or wh en packet data is active. You can only be connected to one WLAN access point device at a time, but several applications can use the same internet access point. When the device is in the offline profile, you can still use WLAN (if available). Remember to comp ly with any applicable safety requirements when establ ishing and using a WLAN connection. Tip: To check the unique media access control (MAC) addr ess that identifies your device, open th e dialler and enter *#62209526# . WLAN wiza rd Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > WLAN . The WLAN wizard helps you to connect to a w ireless LAN (WLAN) and mana ge your WLAN connections. If the search finds WLAN s, to cr eate an internet access point (IAP) for a connecti on and start the web browser using this IAP, select the connection and Start web browsing . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 65
If you select a secured WLAN, you are asked to enter the relevant password. T o connect to a hidden network, you must enter the correct network name (service set identifier, SSID ). If you already have th e web browser running usi ng the currently active WLAN connection, to return to the web browser, select Continue web browsing . To end the active connection , select the connection and Disconnect WLAN . WLAN internet access points Select Menu > Se ttings and Connectivity > WLAN > Options . Select from the following: Filter WLAN net works â Filter out wireless LANs (WLANs) from the list of found networ ks. The selected networks are not displayed the next time the applica tion searches for WLANs. Details â View the details of a network shown in the list. If you select an active connection, the connection details are displayed. Operating modes There are two operating modes in WLAN: infrastructure and ad hoc. The infrastructure operating mode allows two kinds of communication: wireless devices are connected to each other through a WLAN acces s poin t device, or wireless devices are connected to a wired LAN through a W LAN access point device. In the ad hoc operating mode, devices can send and receive data directly wi th each other. Wireless LAN setti ngs Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > WLAN > Options > Settings . Select from the following: Show WLAN availabilit y â Select whether is displayed when a wireless LAN (WLA N) is available. Tip: To access the WLAN Wizard application and view the available options, select the WLAN icon, and in the pop-up window, select the hig hlighted text next to the WLAN icon. Scan for networks â If you set Show WLAN availability to Yes , you can select how often the device searches for available WLANs an d up dates the indicator. Internet connectivity test â Select whether you wan t the device to test the internet capability of the select ed WLAN automatically, to ask for permis sion every time, or to never perform the connectivity test. If you select Run automa tically or allow the test to be performed when the device asks for it, and the co nnectivity test is performed successfully, the access point is saved to the internet destinations. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 66
To view advanced settin gs, select Optio ns > Adv anced settings . Changing the advanced settings for the WLAN is not recommended. Access points Create a new access point Select Menu > Se ttings and Connectivity > Destinations . You may recei ve access point setti ngs in a message from a service provider. Some or all access points may be preset for your devi ce by your s ervice pro vider, and y ou may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. When you open one of the access point groups ( , , , ), you can see the access point types: indicates a protected access point indicates a packet data access point indicates a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point Tip: You can create internet access points in a WLAN with the WLAN wiza rd. To create a new acc ess point, select Access point . The device asks to check for available connecti ons. After the search, connections that are already ava ilable are shown an d can be shared by a new access poi nt. If you skip this step, you are asked to select a connection method and to define the settings needed. To edit the settings of an acce ss point , open one of the access point groups, and select an access point. Follow the instructions from your service provider. Connection name â Enter a name for the connection. Data bearer â Select the data con nection type. Depending on the data connect ion you select, only certain setting fields are available. Fi ll in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red *. Other fields can be left empty, unless your service provider has instructed otherwise. To use a data connect ion, your service provider must support this feature, and if necessary, activate it for your SIM card. Create access point gro ups Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > Destinations . Some applications allow you to use access point groups for network connections. To avoid selecting a single access point every time the device makes a network connection, yo u can create a group that contains various access points to connect to that net work and define the order in which the access points are used. For example, you can add wireless LAN (WLAN) and packet data access points to an intern et access point group, and use the group for browsing the web. If you give WLAN the h ighest priority, the device connects to the internet throug h WLAN, if available, and through a packet dat a connection if not. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 67
To create a new access point group, select Options > Manage > New d estination . To add access points to an access point group, select the group and Optio ns > New access point . To copy an existing access point from anot her group, select the group, tap the relevant access point if it is not already hig hlighted, and select Options > Organi se > Copy to other dest . . To change the priority of an access point within t he group, select Options > Organi se > Change priority . Packet data access points Select Menu > Se ttings and Connectivity > Destinations > Access point , and follow the instructions on the screen. To edit a packet data access p o int, open one of the access point groups, an d select an access point marked with . Follow the instructions from your service provider. Select from the following: Access point name â You obtain the access point name from your service provider. User name â The user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by your service provider. Prompt password â If you must enter the password every time you log in to a server, or if you do n ot want to save your password in the device, select Yes . Password â A password may be needed to make a data connection and is usually provid ed by your service provider. Authentication â Select Secure to always send your password encrypted or Normal to send your password encrypted when possible. Homepage â Depending on the access point you are setting up, enter the web address or the address of the multimedia message centre. Use access point â Select After confirmatio n if you want the device to ask for confirmation before the conn ection using this access point is created, or Automatically if you want the device to connect to the destinati on using this access point automati cally. Select Options > Advanced settings and from the following: Network type â Select the internet protocol type to transfer data to and from your device . The other sett ings depend on the selected network type. Phone IP address (for IPv4 only) â Enter the IP address of your device. DNS addresses â Enter the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers, if required by your service provider. To obtain these addresses, co ntact your internet service provider. Proxy serv er address â Enter the address of the proxy server. Proxy p ort numb er â Enter the port number of the proxy server. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 68
WLAN internet access points Select Menu > Se ttings and Connectivity > Destinations > Access point , and follow the instructions. To edit a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point, open one of the access point groups, and select an access point marked with . Follow the instructions from your WLAN service provider. Select from the following: WLAN network name â Select Enter manually or Search for networks . If you select an existing netw ork, WLAN network mode and WLAN security mode are determined by the settings of its access point device. Network status â Define wh ether the network n ame is displayed. WLAN network mode â S el ec t Ad-hoc to create an ad hoc network and to allow devices to send a nd receive data directly; a WLAN access point de vice is not needed. In an ad hoc network, all devices must use the same W LAN network name. WLAN security mode â Select the encryption used: WEP , 802.1x , or WPA/WPA 2 (802.1x and WPA/W PA2 are not available for ad hoc networks). If you select Open net work , no encryption is used. The WEP, 802.1x and WPA functions can be used only if the network supports them. Homepage â Enter the web address of the st arting page. Use access point â Set the device to create a connection using this access point automatically or after confirmation . The available options ma y vary. Active data conn ections Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > Connection mgr. . In the active data connection s view, you can see open data connections: data calls packet data connections wireless LAN (WLAN) connections To end a connection, select Options > Disconne ct . To end all open connections, select Options > Disconn ect all . To view the details of a connection, select Option s > Details . Synchronisation With the Sync application, you can synchronise your notes, messages, contacts, and othe r information with a remote server. Select Menu > Settin gs > Connectivity > Data transfer > Sync . You may receive synchronisation settings as a configu ration message from your service provider. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 69
A synchronisation profile contai ns the nece ssary settings for synchronisation. When you open the appli cation, the defau lt or previously us ed synchron isation profile is displayed. Include or exclude content typ es Select a content type. Synchronise data Select Options > Synchronise . Create a new synchronisatio n profile Select Options > New sync profile . Manage synchronisation profiles Select Options and the desired option. Bluetooth connectivity About Bluetooth connectivity With Bluetooth connectivity , you can make a wireless connection to other compatib le devices, such as mobile phones, computers, headsets, and car kits. You can use the conn ection to se nd images, video clips, music and sound clips, and notes, transfer files from your compatible PC, and prin t images with a compatible printer. Since devices wit h Blue tooth wireless technology communicate using radio wa ves, they do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. However, they must be within 10 metres (33 feet) of each other, al though the connection may be subject to interference from obstructions such as w alls or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 2.0 EDR supporting the following profiles: Dial-Up Networking (DUN), Object Push Profile (OPP), File Transfer Profile (FTP), Hands Free Profile (HFP), Headset Profile (HSP), Basic Imaging Profile (BIP), Remote SIM A ccess Profile (SimAP), Devi ce Identification Profile (DI), Ph onebook Access Profile (PBAP), Generic Audio/Video Distribution Profile (GAVDP), Audio/ Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP), Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP). To ensure interoperability between other devices supporting Bluet ooth technology, use Nokia approved accessories for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other devices to determine their compatibility with this device. Features using Bluetooth technology increa se the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. When the device is locked, on ly connections to authorised devices are possible. Settings Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > Bluetooth . When you open the application for the first time, you are asked to define a name for your device. You can change the name later. Select from the following: Bluetooth â Turn Bluetooth connectivity on or off. My phone's visibility â To allow your device to be found by other devices with Blu etooth wireless technology, select Shown to all . To set a time period after whi ch the visibility é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 70
is set from shown to hidden, select Set visibility period . To hide your device from other devices, select Hidden . My phone's name â Edit the name shown to other devices with Bluetooth wireles s technology. Remote SIM mode â Enable or disable another device, such as a compatible car kit accessory , to use the SIM card in your device to connect to the netw ork. Security tips Select Menu > Se ttings and Connectivity > Bluet ooth . When you are no t using Bluet ooth connectivity, to control who can find your device and connect to it, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visi bility > Hidden . Do not pair with or accept connection requests from an unknown device. This helps to protect your device from harmful content. Send data using Bluetooth connectivity You can have several B luetooth connections active at a time. For example, if you are connected to a compatible headset, you can also transfer files to another comp atible device. 1 Open the application where th e item you want to send is stored. 2 Go to an item, and select Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . Devices with Bluetooth wireless technology that a re within range are displayed. Device icons are as follows: computer phone audio or video device other device To interrupt the search, select Cancel . 3 Select the device with which you want to connect. 4 If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds, and you are asked t o enter a passcode. The same pass code must be entered in both devices. When the connection is established, Sending data is displayed. Tip: When sear ching for devices, some device s may show only the unique address (devic e address). To find the unique address of your device, in the home screen, enter *#282 0# . Pair de vices Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > Bluetooth . To pair with compatible devices and view your paired devices, open the Paired device s tab. Before pairing , create your o wn pass code (1 to 16 digi ts), an d agree with the owner of the other device to use the same code. Devices that do not have a user interface have a factory- set passcode. The passcode is used only once. 1 To pair with a device, select Opti ons > New paired device . Devices that are within ran ge are displayed. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 71
2 Select the device, and enter the passcode. The same passcode must be entered on the other device, as well. 3 Some audio accessories connect a utomatically to your device after pairing. Otherwise, to connect to an accessory, select Op tions > Connect to audio device . Paired devices are indicated by in the device search. To set a device as authorised or unauthorised, select from the following: Set as authorised â Connections between your device and the authorised device can be made without your knowledge. You will not b e asked for au thorisation or acceptance separately. Use this status only for y o u r o w n de v i c es , s u c h a s your compatible headset or PC, or devices th at belong to someone you trust. indicates authorised devices in the paired devices view. Set as unauthorised â Connection requests from this device must be accepted separately every time. To cancel a pairing with a device, select Option s > Dele te . To cancel all pairings, select Options > Delete all . Receive data using Blu etooth connectivity When you receive data using Bluet ooth connectivity, a ton e sounds, and the device asks y ou if you want to accept the message. If you accept, is displayed, and you ca n find an informative message about the da ta in the Inbox folder in Messaging. The recei ved data is automatically saved to t he device memory. Messages received using Bluetooth connectivity are indi cated with . Block devices Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > Bluetooth . To block a device from establ ishing a Bluetooth connection to your device, open the Pair ed devices tab. Tap a device you want to block, if it is no t already highlighted, and select Options > Block . To unblock a device, open the Blocked device s tab, tap a device, if it is not already highlighted, and select Option s > Delete . To unblock all blocked devices, select Options > Delete all . If you reject a pairing reques t from another dev ice, you are asked if you want to block all future connection requests from this device. If you accept the query, the remote dev ice is added to the list of blocked devices. Remote SIM mod e Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > Bluetooth . Before the remote SIM mode can be activated, the two devices must be paired and th e pairing initiated from the other device. When pairing, us e a 16-digit passcode, and set the other device as authoris ed. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 72
To use the remote SIM mode with a compatible ca r kit accessory, activate Bluetooth connectivity, and enable the use of the remote SIM mode with you r device. Activate the remote SIM mode from the other device. When the remote SIM mode is on in your device, Remote SIM mode is displayed in the home sc reen. The connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator area, and yo u cannot use SIM card services or features requiring cellular network coverage. When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only use a compatible conn ected accessory, s uch as a car kit, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not make any calls while in this mode , except to the emergency numbers programmed into your device. To make calls from your device, you must lea ve the remot e SIM mode. If the device is locked, enter the lock code to unlock it. To leave the remote SIM mode, press the power key, and select Exit remote SIM mode . USB Select Menu > Se ttings and Connectivity > USB . To have the device ask the pu rpose of the connection each time a compatible data ca ble is connected, select Ask on connecti on > Yes . If the Ask on connection option is turned off or you want to change the mode du ring an active connection, select USB connecti on mode and from the following: PC Suite â Use Nokia PC applications such as Nokia Ovi Suite, and Nokia Software Updater. Mass storage â Transfer d ata between your device and a compatible PC. Image transfer â Print images with a compatible print er. Media transfer â Synchronise music with Nokia Music or Windows Media Player. PC connections You can use your m obile device with a variety of compatible PC connectivity and data co mmunicati ons applications. With Nokia Ovi Suite you can, for example, transfer files and images between your device an d a compatible computer. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 73
To use Ovi Suite with USB connection mode, select PC Su ite mode . For more information about Ov i Suite, see the support area at www.ovi.com. Administrative settings Select Menu > Se ttings and Connectivity > Admin. settings . To set the online time for the da ta call connection, select Data call . The data call settings affect all access points that use a GSM data call. Packet data se ttings Select Menu > Se ttings and Connectivity > Admin. settings > Packet data . The packet data settings affect all access points using a packet data connection. Select from the following: Packet data connection â If you select When available and you are in a n etwork that sup ports packet data, th e device registers to the packet data n etwork. Starting an active packet data connection (for exam ple, to send and receive e-mail) is quicker than if the device establishes a packet data connection when n eeded. If there is no packet data coverage, the device pe riodically tries to establish a packet data connection. If you select When needed , t he device uses a packet data co nnection only if you start an application or act ion that needs it. Access point â The access point name is needed to use your device as a packet dat a modem to a compatible comp uter. High speed packet access â Enable or disable the use of HSDPA (network service) in UMTS networks. SIP setti ngs Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > Admin. settings > SIP settings . Session Initiation Protocol (S IP) settings are needed for certain network services using SIP. You may receive the settings in a special text mess age from your service provider. You can view, delete, or create these setting profiles in SIP settings. Access point name control Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > Admin. settings > APN control . With the access point name co ntrol service, you can restrict packet data connections and a llow your device to use only certain packet data access points. This setting is only availa ble if your SIM card supports the access point control service. T o t u r n t h e c o n t r o l s e r v i c e o n o r o f f , o r t o c h a n g e t h e a l l o w e d access points, select Options and the corresponding option. To change the options, you need your PIN2 code. Contact your service provider for the code. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 74
Internet With the Web browser, you can view hypertext markup language (HTML) we b pages on the internet as originally designed. You can also browse web pages tha t are designed specifically for mobile devices, and use extensible hypertext markup language (XHTML ), or the wireless markup lan guage (WML). To browse the web, you need to have an internet access point configured in your device. Using the web browser requires network support or WLAN available. Browse the web Select Menu > Web . To browse the web, select Go to web address from the toolbar, and enter a web address. By default, the browser is in full screen mode. To exit full screen mode, select the arrow icon in the bottom right corner. Some web pages may contai n material, such a s graphics or video clips, th at requires a large amount of m emory to view. If your device runs out of memory while loading such a web page, insert a memory card. Ot herwise, the video clips are not displayed. To browse web pages with g raphics disabled, to save memory and increase the page loading speed, select Options > Sett ings > Page > Load content > Text only . To refresh the content of the web page, select Options > Web page options > Reload . To save the current web pa ge as a bookmark, select Options > Web page optio ns > Save as bookmark . To view snapshots of the web pages you have visited during the current browsing session, select Back (available if History list is activated in the browse r settings and the current web page is not the first web page you visit). To prevent or allow the automatic opening of multiple windows, select Options > Web page options > Block pop-ups or Allow pop-ups . To zoom in on a web page, double-tap the display. Tip: To sen d the browser to the background without exiting the application or connection , press the end key once. Browser toolbar The browser toolbar he lps you select freque ntly used functions of the browser. To open the toolbar when brow sing, select the arrow in the bottom right corner. From the toolbar, select from the following: Expand toolbar â Expand the toolbar to access more toolbar functions. Go to web address â Enter a web address. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 75
Show zoom â Zoom in or out on the web page. To use the expanded toolbar, select Expand toolbar and from the following: Go to feed s â View your current feed subscriptions. Send URL â Send the web addr ess of the current page to another device. Switch win. â Switch between open browser windows. Subsc. feeds â View a list of available web feeds on the current web page, and subscribe to a web feed. Settings â Edit the settings. Save bkmrk. â Save the current web page as a bookmark. Reload â Refresh the web page. Overview â View an over view of the current web page. Homepage â Go to the homepage (if defined in settings). Bookmarks â Open the bookmark s view. Find keywd. â Searc h on the current web page. Navigate pages When you are browsing a web page th at contains a large amount of information, you ca n use Page overview to vi ew what kind of information the web page contains. To see an overview of the curr ent web page, open the toolbar, and select > . Web feeds and blogs Select Menu > Web . Web feeds are XML files on web pages that are used to share, f o r e x a m p l e , t h e l a t e s t n e w s h e a d l i n e s o r b l o g s . I t i s c o m m o n to find web feeds on web, blog, and wiki pages. The browser application automa tically detects if a web page contains web feeds. If web feeds are available, to subscribe to a web feed, select Options > Subscribe to w eb feeds . To update a web feed, in the Web feeds view, select a feed and Options > Web feed options > Refresh . To define whether the web f eeds are updated au tomatically, in the Web feeds view, select Options > Edit > Edit . Th is option is not available if one or more feeds are marked. Content search Select Menu > Web . To search for text within the current web page, select Options > Find key word . To go to the next match, from the toolbar, select Find next . To go to the previous match, from the toolbar, select Find previous . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 76
Bookmarks Select Menu > Web . Select Options > Go to > Bookmarks . You can select web addresses from a list or from a co llection of bookmarks in the Recently visited pages folder. The toolbar helps you select freq uently used functions of the browser. From the toolbar, sele ct from the following: Add bookmark â Add a new bookmark. Go to web address â Enter a new web add ress. Delete â Delete a bookmark. To go to a new web page, select Options > Go to > New web page . To send and add bookmarks, or to set a bookmark as the homepage, select Optio ns > Bookm ark options . To edit, move, or delete bookmarks, select Options > Bookmark manager . Empty the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the device. A cache is a memory location tha t is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information requ iring passwords, empty the cache after each use. To empty the cache, select Option s > Cl ear privacy data > Cache . End the connection To end the connection and close the browser, select Options > Exit . To delete the information the network server collects about your visits to various web pa ges, select Options > Clear privacy data > Cookies . Connection security If the security indicator ( ) is displayed duri ng a connect ion, the data transmi ssion between the device and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indi cate that the data transmission between the gateway and th e co ntent server (w here the data is stored) is secure. The service provider secures the data transmission between the gateway a nd the content server. Security certificates may be re quired for some services, such as banking services. You are noti fied if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 77
Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connecti ons and software insta llation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; the certificate manager must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increased security to be available. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid y et" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, chec k that the current date and time i n your device are correct. Before changing any cert ificate settings, you must make sure that you really trust the own er of the certificate an d that the certificate really belong s to th e listed owner. Web settings Select Menu > Web and Options > Settings and from the following: General settings Access point â Change the default access point. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider. You may not be able to change , create, edit, or remove them. Homepage â Define the homepage. History list â If you select On , while browsing, to see a list of the pages you have visi ted during the current sessi on, select Back . Web address suffix â Enter a web address suffix that the device uses by default when you enter a web address in the Go to field (for example, .com or .org). Security warnings â Hide or show security notificat ions. Java/ECMA script â Enable or disable the use of scripts. Java/ECMA script errors â Select whether you want to receive script notifications. Open while download ing â Select whether you want to be able to open a file while it is being downloaded. Page setti ngs Load content â Select whether yo u want to load images and other objects while browsing. If you select Text only , to load images or objects later during browsing, select Options > Tools > L oad images . Default encoding â If text characters are not shown correctly, you can select an ot her encoding according to the language for the current page. Block pop-ups â Allow or block automatic opening of different pop-ups while browsing. Automatic reload â Select whether you want the web pages to be refreshed automatically while browsing. Font size â Define the font size that is used for web pages. Privacy s ettings Recently visited page s â Enable or disable au tomatic bookmark collecting. If you want to continue saving the addresses of the visited web pages into the Recently visi ted pages folder, but hide the folder from the bookmarks view, select Hide folder . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 78
Form data saving â Select whether you want the password data or data you enter on different forms on a web page to be saved and used the next time you open the page. Cookies â Enable or disable the receiving and send ing of cookies. Web feed settings Acc. point for auto-upda te â Select the desired access point for updating. This opt ion is only available when Automatic u pdates is active. Update when roaming â Select whether you want the web feeds to be updated automatically when roaming. Positioning (GPS) You can use applica tions such as GPS data to find out your location, or measure distan ces and coordinates. These applications require a GPS connection. About GPS The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States , which is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenanc e. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adju stments to GPS sa tellites made by the United States government a nd is subject to change with the United States Departme nt of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satelli t e geometry. Availabili ty and quality of GPS signals ma y be affected by your location, buildings, natural obstacles, and weather condit ions. GPS signals may not be available inside buildings or underground and may be impaired by materials such as concrete an d metal. GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you should never rely solely on location data fr om the GPS receiver and cellular rad io networks for positioning or navigation. The trip meter ha s limited accu racy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. The coordinates in the GP S are expressed using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. The availability of the coordinates may vary by region. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 79
Assisted GP S (A-GP S) Your device also supports assiste d GPS (A-GPS). A-GPS requires network support. Assisted GPS (A-GPS) is used to ret rieve assistance data over a packet data connection, whic h assists in calculating th e coordinates of your current lo cation when your device is receiving signals from satellites. When you activat e A-GPS, your device receives useful satellite information from an assistan ce data server over the cellular network. With the help of assisted data, your device can obtain the GPS position faster. Your device is preconfigured to use the Nokia A-GPS service, if no service provider-specific A-GPS settings are av ailable. The assistance dat a is retrieved from the No kia A-GPS service server only when needed. To disable the A-GPS service, select Menu > Applications > Location and Options > Positioni ng settings > Position ing meth ods > Assisted G PS > Disable . You must h ave an intern et acce ss point defined in the device to retrieve assistance data from the Nokia A-GPS service over a packet data connection. The access point for A-GPS can be defined in positioning settings. A wireless LAN (WLAN) access point cannot be used for this service. Only a packet data internet access point can be used. Your device asks you to select the intern et access poi nt when GPS is used for the first time. Hold your device correctly When using the GPS receiver, ensure you do not cover the antenna with your hand. Establishing a GPS connection may take from a couple of seconds to several minutes. Establishing a GPS connection in a vehicle may take longer. The GPS receiver draws its po wer from the device battery. Using the GPS receiver may drain the battery faster. Tips on creating a GP S connection Check satellit e signal status To check how ma ny satellites your dev ice has found, and whether your device is receiv ing satellite signals, select Menu > Applications > Location and GPS data > Options > Satellite status . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 80
If your device has found satelli tes, a bar for each satellite is shown in the satellite info vi ew. The longer the bar, the stronger the satellite signal. When your device has received enough data from the satellite sig nal to calculate your location, the bar colour changes. To view the positions of found sate llites, select Chg. vi ew . Initially your device must rece ive signals from at least fou r satellites to be able to calculate your location. When the initial calculation has been made, it may be possible to continue calculating your location with three sat ellites. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. If no satellite signal can be found, consider the following: ⢠If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better signal. ⢠If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. ⢠Ensure that yo ur hand does not cover th e GPS antenna of your device. ⢠If the weather conditions ar e bad, the signal strength may be affected. ⢠Some vehicles have tinted (a thermic) windows, wh ich may block the s atellite signals. Position requests You may receive a request from a network service to receive your position information. Service providers may offer information about local topics, such as weather or traffic conditions, based on the location of your device. When you receive a position request, the service that is making the request is displayed. Select Accept to allow your position information to be sent or Reject to deny the request. Landmarks Select Menu > Applications > Location and Lan dmarks . With Landma rks, you can sav e the position information of specific locations in your device. You can sort the saved locations into different categories, such as business, and add other information to them, s uch as addresses. You can use your saved landmarks in compatib le applications, su ch as GPS data. GPS coordinates are expressed using the internationa l WGS-84 coordinate sy stem. Select Options and from the following: New landmark â Create a new landmark. To make a positioning request for your current location, select Current position . To enter the position information manually, select Enter manually . Edit â Edit or add information to a saved landmark (for example, a street address) . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 81
Add to category â Add a landmark to a category in Landmarks. Select each catego ry to which yo u want to add the landmark. Send â Send one or several landmarks to a compatible device. Your received landma rks are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You can sort your landmarks into preset categories, and create new categories. To ed it and create new landmark categories, open the cate gories tab, and select Options > Edit categori es . GPS data GPS data is designed to prov ide route guidance information to a selected destination, position information about your current location, a nd traveling information, such as the approximate distance to the destination and app roximate duration of travel. Select Menu > Applications > Location and GPS data . Route guidance Select Menu > Applications > Location and GPS data > Navigation . Start the route guidan ce outdoors . If started indoors, the GPS receiver may not receive the necessary information from the satellites. Route guidance is designed to show the straig htest route and the shortest distance to the des tination, measured in a straight line. Any obstacles on the route, such as buildings and natural obstacles, are ignored. D ifferences in altitude are not taken into account when ca lculating the distan ce. Route guidance is active only when you move. To set your trip destination, select Options > Set destination and a landmark as the destination, or enter the latitude and longitude coordinates. To clear the destination set for your trip, select Stop navigation . Retrieve positio n information You can view the position information of your current location and an estimate of the accuracy of the location. Select Menu > Applications > Location and GP S data > Positio n . Save yo ur curre nt locati on as a land mark Select Options > Save position . Landmarks can be used in other compatible applications and transferred between compatible devices. Trip mete r Select Menu > Applications > Location and GP S data > Trip distance . The trip meter ha s limited accu racy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 82
To turn trip distance calc ulation on or off, select Options > Start or Stop . The calculated values remain on the display. Use this feature outdoors to receive a better GPS s ignal. To set the trip distance and time and avera ge and maximum speeds to zero, and to start a new calculati on, select Options > Reset . To set the odometer and total time to zero, select Restart . Positioning se ttings Select Menu > Applications > Location and Positioni ng . Position ing meth ods Select from the following: Integrated GPS â Use the integrated GPS receiver of your device. Assisted GPS â Use Assisted GPS (A-GPS) to receive assistance data from a n assistance data se rver. Bluetooth GPS â Use a compatible external GPS receiver with Bluetooth connectivi ty. Network based â Use information from the cellular network (network service). Position ing server To define an access point and p ositioning server for network- assisted positioni ng methods, such as assisted GPS or network-based positioning, select Posi tioning server . The positioning server may be preset by your service provider, and you may not be able t o edit the settings. Notation settings To select which measurement system you want to use for speeds and di stances, select Measurement system > Metric or Imp erial . To define in which format the coordinate information is displayed in your device, select Coordinat e format and the desired format. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 83
Ovi Maps Maps overvi ew Select Menu > Maps . Welcome to Maps. Maps shows you w hat is nearby, helps you plan your route, and guides you where you want to go. ⢠Find cities, street s, and services. ⢠Find your way with tu rn-by-turn directions. ⢠Synchronise your favourite locations and routes b etween your mobile device and the Ovi Maps internet service. ⢠Check weather forecasts and other local information, if available. Note: Downloading content such as ma ps, satellite imag es, voice files, guides or traffic information may involve transmission of large amounts of data (network service). Some services may not be available in all countries, and may be provided only in selected languages. The services may be network dependent . For more informat ion, contact y our network service provider. Almost all digital ca rtography is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the ca rtography that you download for use in this device. Content such as satellite images, g uides, weather and traffic information and related servic es are generated by third parties independent of Nokia. The content m ay be inaccurate and incomplete to some extent and is subj ect to availability. Never rely solely on the afor ementioned content and related services. Use the compass If your device has a compass, when activated, bot h the arrow of the compass and the map rotate a utomatically in the direction to which the top of your device is pointing. Select Menu > Maps and My position . Activate the compa ss Select . Deactivate the compass Select again. The map is oriented north . The compass is active when ther e is a green outline. If the compass needs calibration, the ou tline of the compas s is red or yellow. To calibrate the compass, rotate the device around all axes in a contin uous movement. The compass has limited accuracy. Electromagnetic fields, metal objects, or other exte rnal circumst ances may also affect the accura cy of the compass. The compass should always be properly calibrated. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 84
View your location and the map See your current location on the map, and brow se maps of different cities and countries. Select Menu > Maps and My pos ition . When the GPS connec tion is active, marks your current or last known location on the map . If the icon's colours are faint, no GPS signal is av ailable. If only cell ID based positioning is available, a red halo around the positioning icon indicates the general area you might be in. The accuracy of the estimate increases in densely populated area s. Move on the map Drag the map with your fin ger. By default, the map is orient ed north. View your current or last known location Select . Zoom in or out Select or - . If you browse to an area not covere d by maps that are stored on your device and you ha ve an active da ta connection, new maps are automatically downloade d. Map coverage varies by country and region. Map view 1 Selected location 2 Indicator a rea 3 Point of interest (for exam ple, a railway station or a museum) 4 Information area Change the look of the map View the map in different modes, to easily identify where you are. Select Menu > Maps and My position . Select and from the following: é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 85
Map view â In the standard map view , details such as location names or motorway numbers, are easy to read. Satellite vie w â For a detailed view , use satellite images. Terrain view â View at a glance the ground type, for example, when you are travelling off-road. 3D â For a more realistic view, change the perspective of the map. Landmarks â Display prominent bu ildings and attracti ons on the map. Night mode â Dim the colours of the map. When travelling at night, the map is easier to read in this mode. Find a location Maps helps you find specific locations and types of business you are looking for. Select Menu > Maps and Find places . 1 Enter search terms, such as a st reet address or postcode. To clear the search field, select . 2 Select . 3 Select an item from the list of proposed matches. The location is displayed on the map. To view the other locations of the search result list on the map, select one of the arrows beside the information area ( ). Return to the list of propos ed matches Select List . Search for different types of nearby places Select Browse categories and a category, such as shopping, accommodation, or transport. If no search resu lts are found, ensure th e spelling of your search terms is correct. Problems with your internet connection may also affect re sults when searching online. To avoid data tran sfer costs, you can also get search results without an active internet connecti on, if you have maps of the searched area stored on your device. To ensure your device does not use the inte rnet connection, in the main menu, select > Internet > Conne ction > Offline . View location details View more information about a specific location or place, such as a hotel or restaurant, if available. Select Menu > Maps and My position . View the details of a place Select a place, its informa tion area ( ), and Show details . Rate a place Select a place, its informa tion area ( ), Show deta ils , and the star rating. For example, to rate a place a s being 3 out of 5 stars, select the third star. To rat e a place, you need an a ctive internet connection. When you find a place that does not ex ist or contains inappropriate information or in correct details, such as the é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 86
wrong contact information or location, it is recommended that you report it to Nokia. Report incorrect information Select a place and its information area ( ), and select Show details > Report this Place and the a ppropriate opti on. To report a place, you need an active internet connection. The available options may vary. Plan a route Plan your journey, and create yo ur route and v iew it on the map before setting off. Select Menu > Maps and My pos ition . Create a route 1 Tap the location of your star ting point. To search for an address or place, select Search . 2 Tap the location's information area ( ). 3 Select Add to route . 4 To add another route point, select Add new route point and the appropriate option. Change the order of the route points 1 Select a route point. 2 Select Move . 3 Tap the place where you want to move the route point to. Edit the location of a route point Tap the route point, and select Edit and t he appropriate option. View the route on the map Select Show route . Navigate to the de stination Select Show route > Option s > Start driving or Start walking . Change the sett ings for a route The route settings affect the navigation guidance and the way the route is di splayed on the map. 1 In the route planner view, open the Settings tab. To get to the route planner view from the navigation view, select Options > Route points or Route point list . 2 Set the transportation mode to Drive or Walk . If you select Walk , one-way streets are regarded as normal streets, and walkways and ro utes through, for example, parks and shoppi ng centres, can be used. 3 Select the desired option. Select the walking mode Open the Settings tab, and select Walk > Preferred route > St reets or Straight line . Straight line is useful on off-road terrain as it indi cates the walking direction. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 87
Use the faster or sho rter driving route Open the Settings tab, and select Drive > Route selection > Faster route or Shorter route . Use the opt imised dri ving route Open the Settings tab, and select Drive > Route selection > Optimised . The optimised driving route combines the advantages of both the s horter and the faster routes. You can also ch oose to allow or avoid using, for example, motorways, toll roads, or ferries. Save places and routes Save addresses , places of interest, and routes, so they can be quickly used later. Select Menu > Maps . Save a place 1 Select My position . 2 Tap the location. To search for a n address or place, select Search . 3 Tap the location's information area ( ). 4 Select Save place . Save a route 1 Select My position . 2 Tap the location. To search for a n address or place, select Search . 3 Tap the location's information area ( ). 4 To add another route point, select Add to route . 5 Select Add new ro ute point and the appropriate option. 6 Select Show route > Option s > Save route . View your saved places and routes Select Favourite s > Place s or Rout es . View and organise places or routes Use your Favourites to quickly access the places and routes you have saved. Group the places and routes in to a collection, for example, when planning a trip. Select Menu > Maps and Favourites . View a saved place on the map 1 Select Places . 2 Go to the place. 3 Select Map . To return to the list of saved places, select List . Create a collect ion Select Create new colle ction , and enter a collection name. Add a saved place to a collection 1 Select Places and the place. 2 Select Organise coll ections . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 88
3 Select New collection or an existing collection. If you need to delete places or routes, or add a route to a collection, go to the Ovi Maps internet service at www.ovi.com. Send places to your frien ds When you want to share place information with your friends, send these details directly to their devices. Select Menu > Maps and My pos ition Send a place to yo ur friend's compatible de vice Select a location, tap the lo cation's information area ( ), and select Send . Synchronise your Favourites Plan a trip on your computer at the Ovi Maps website, synchronise the saved places , routes, and collections with your mobile device, and access the plan on the go. To synchronise places, routes , or collections between your mobile device and the Ovi Maps internet service, you need a Nokia account. I f you do not have one, in the ma in view, select Accounts > N okia account > Create new account . Synchronise saved places, route s, and collections Select Favourites > Synchronise with Ovi . If you do not have a Nokia account, you are p rompted to create one. Set the d evice to synchroni se Favourites autom atically Select and Synchronisation > Synchronisation > At start-up and shut-d. . The device starts the synchronisation when you open or close the Maps application. Synchronising requires an acti ve internet connection, an d may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service providerâÂÂs network. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transmission charge s. To use the Ovi Maps internet service, go to www.ovi.com. Share locati on Publish your current location to Fa cebook, together with t ext and a picture. Your Facebook friends ca n see your location on a map. Select Menu > Maps and Share location . To share yo ur location, you need a Nokia account and a Facebook account. 1 Sign in to your Nokia a ccount, or, if you do no t yet have one, select Create new account . 2 Sign in to your Facebook account. 3 Select your current location. 4 Enter your stat us update. 5 To attach a picture to your post, select Add a photo . 6 Select Share location . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 89
Manage your Facebook a ccount In the main view, select Accounts > Share location settings > Facebook . Sharing your location and vi ewing the location of others requires an internet connec tion. This may involve the transmission of large amounts of data and related data traffic costs. The Facebook terms of use appl y to sharing your location on Facebook. Familiarise yourself with the Facebook terms of use and the privacy practices. Before sharing your location to others, always consider carefully with whom you are sharing it. Check the privacy settings of the social networking service you are using as you might share your location with a large group of people. Get voice guidance Voice guidance, if available fo r your langua ge, helps you fin d your way to a destination, leaving y ou free to enjoy the journey. Select Menu > Maps and Drive or Walk . When you use drive or walk navi gation for the firs t time, you are asked to select the langua ge of the voice guidance, and download the appropriate files. If you select a langua ge that includes street names, also the street names are said aloud. Voice guidance may not be available for your language. Change the voic e guidance languag e In the main view, select > Navigation > Drive guidance or Walk guidance and the appropriate option. Repeat the voi ce guidance for car navig ation In the navigation view, select Options > Repeat . Adjust the vo lume of the vo ice guidance for car navigation In the navigation view, select Options > Volume . Walk to your dest ination When you need directions to follow a route on foot, Maps guides you over squares, and through parks, pedestrian zones, and even shopping centres. Select Menu > Maps and Walk . Walk to a destination Select Set de stination and the appropriate option. Walk to your home Select Walk home . When you select Driv e home or Walk home for the first time, you are prompted to define your home location . To later change the home location, do the following: 1 In the main view, select . 2 Select Navigation > Home Location > Redefine . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 90
3 Select the approp riate option. Tip: To walk without a set destination, select Map . Y our location is displayed on the centre of the map as you move. Drive to your destinat ion When you need turn-by-turn directions while driving, Maps helps you get to your destination. Select Menu > Maps and Drive . Drive to a destination Select Set destination and the appropriate op tion. Drive to your home Select Drive home . When yo u selec t Drive home or Walk home for the first time, you are prompted to define your home location. To later change the home locati on, do the following: 1I n t h e m a i n v i e w , s e l e c t . 2 Select Navigation > Home Location > Redefine . 3 Select the approp riate option. Tip: To drive without a set destination, select Map . Your location is displayed on the centre of the map as you move. Change views during navigation Swipe the screen to select 2D view , 3D view , Arrow view , or Route over view . Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Yo ur first consideration while driving should be road safety. Navigation view 1 Route 2 Your location and direction 3 Compass 4 Information bar (speed, distance, time) Get traffic and safety information Enhance your driving experience with real-time information about traffic events, lane a ssistance, and speed limit warnings, if available for your country or region. Select Menu > Maps and Drive . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 91
View traffic ev ents on the map During drive navi gation, select Options > Traffic info . The events are displayed as triangles and lines. Update traffic information Select Options > Traffic info > Update traffic info . When planning a route, you can set the device to avoid tra ffic events, such as tra ffic jams or roadworks. Avoid traffi c events In the main view, select and Navigation > Re route due to traffic . The location of speed cameras may be shown on your route during navigation, if this feature is enabled. Some jurisdictions prohibit or regu late the use of speed camera location data. Nokia is not respon sible for the accuracy, or the consequences of using speed camera location data. Camera Your device supports an image capture resolution of 2592x1944 pixels (5 mega pixels ). The image resolution i n this guide may appear different. To ensure good quality ph otos, wipe the camera lens carefully with a cleaning cloth. Activate th e camera To activate the camera, open th e lens cover. If the camera is active in the backgro und, and the lens cover is open, press the capture key to activa te the camera. Image capture Customise th e active tool bar The active toolbar provides you wit h shortcuts to different items and settings before capturing an image or recording a video clip. The capture and reco rding settings return to the default settings after you close the camera. Select Menu > Applications > Camera . To add or remove a toolbar item, select > Customise toolbar and from the following: or â Switch between video and image mode. â Select the scene. or â Show or hide the viewfinder grid (images only). é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 92
â Activate the self-timer (ima ges only). â Activate seq uence mode (images only). â Open Photos . â Select a colour effect. â Adjust the white balance. Select the current lighting conditions. This allows the camera to reproduce colours more accurately. â Adjust the exposure compensation (images only). If yo u are shooting a dark subject against a very light background, such as snow, adjust the exposure to 1 or 2 to compensate for the background brightne ss. For light subjects against a d ark background, use -1 or -2. â Adjust light sens itivity (images only). Increase the light sensitivity in low light conditions to avoid too dark images and blurry images. Increasing the light sensitivity may also increase the image noise. â Adjust contrast (imag es only). Adjust the difference between the lightest and dar kest parts of the image. â Adjust sharpnes s (images only) . The screen display changes to match th e settings you define. Saving the captured image may ta ke longer if you change the zoom, lighting, or colour settings. The capture settings are shooting-mode sp ecific. Switching between the modes does not reset the defined s ettings. If you select a new scene, the capture settings are replaced by the selected scene. You ca n change the capture settings after selecting a scene if needed. Capture images When capturing an imag e, note the following: ⢠Use both hands to keep the camera still. ⢠The quality of a digitally zoomed imag e is lower than that of a non-zoomed image. ⢠The camera goes into battery saving mode if there are no actions for about a minu te. To continue ca pturing images, select Continue . ⢠Keep a safe distance when us ing the flash. Do no t use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. To capture an image with the main camera, do the following: 1 To switch from video mode to image mode, if necessary, select > . 2 To capture an image, press the capture key. Do not move the device before the image is saved and th e final image displayed. Capture images with secondary camera To capture an image, select . Do not move the device before the image is saved an d the final image displayed. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 93
To zoom in or out when capturing an image, use the zoom slider. To leave the camera open in the background and use other applications, press the menu ke y. To return to the camera, press and hold the capture key. On-screen controls and indicators for stil l image capture The still image viewfinder displays the following: 1 Capture mode indicator 2 Zoom slider. To turn the zoom slider on and off, tap the screen. 3 Capture icon. Tap to capture an image. 4 Flash mode. Tap to change setting s. 5 Capture settings. Tap t o change settings. 6 Battery charg e level indicator 7 Image resolution indicator 8 Image counter (the estimated number of images yo u can capture using the current image quality setting and available memory) 9 Memory in use. Depend ing on the s etup of you r device, there are the following op tions: device memory ( ). 10 GPS signal indicator Location information You can automati cally add capt ure location information to the file details of the captured material. For example, in the Photos app lication, you can then view the location where an image was captured. Select Menu > Applications > Camera . Add location information to all captured mate rial Select Options > Settings > Show GPS info > On . The location information is availa ble only for images captured with the main camera. It may take several minutes to obtain the coordinates of your location. The availabi lity and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, buil dings, natural obstacles, and weather conditions. If you share a file that includes location information, also the location information is shared, and your location may be vis ible to thir d parties viewing the file. The device requires network services to acquire location information. Location information indicators: é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 94
â Location information unavailable. GPS stays active in the background for several minu tes. If a satellite connection is made and the indicator changes to within that time, all the images captured and vide o clips recorded during that time are tagged based on the received GPS positioning information. â Location information is available. Location information is added to the file details. Files with location inform ation are indicated with in the Photos application. After capturing an image After you capture an ima ge, sele ct from the following options (available only if you have selected Options > Settings > Show captured image > Yes ): â Send the image in a mu ltimedia or e-mail message, or through connection me thods such as Bluetooth connectivity. â Upload the image to a compati ble online album. Delete â Delete the image. To use the image as wallpaper in the home screen, select Options > Use image > Set as wallpaper . To set the image as a default call image to be used for every call situation, select Option s > Use image > Set as call image . To assign the image to a co ntact, Options > Use image > Assign to contact . To return to the viewfinder to capture a new im age, press the capture key. Flash and video light Keep a safe distance when us ing the flash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close rang e. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. The camera of your device has a dual LED flash for low light conditions. To select the desired flash mo de, tap the current flash mode indicator, which is one of the following: Automatic , Reduce red , On , and Off . Avoid touching the flash LEDs when the back cover has been removed. The LEDs may get hot after prolong ed usage. Video light To increase light levels when recording video in low light, select . Scenes A scene helps you to find the ri ght colour and lighting settings for the current environment. Th e settings of each scene have been set according to a ce rtain style or environment. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 95
The default scene in image and video modes is indicated with ( Automatic ). To change the scene, select > Scene mod e and a scene. To create your own scene suitable for a certain environment, select User defined and Edit . In the user defined scene, you can adjust differen t lighting and colour settings . To copy the settings of another scene, select Base d on scene mode and the desired scene. To save the changes and return to the scenes list, select Back . To activate your own scene, select User defined > Select Capture images in a sequence Select Menu > Applications > Camera . Sequence mode is available only in the main camera. To start capturing images in a quick sequence, select > Sequence . To c lose the settings window, select . Press and hold the capture key. The devi ce captures images until you select Stop or until the memory runs out. The captured images are displayed in a grid. To view an image, select the image. To return to the sequence mode viewfinder, press the capture key. You can also use sequence mode with the self-timer. To deactivate sequence mode, select > Single shot . You in the image â self-timer Use the self-timer to delay the capture so that you can include yourself in the image. To set the self-timer delay, select > , and the delay needed before the image is captured. To activate the self-timer, select Activate . The stopwa tch icon on the screen blinks and the remaining time is displayed when the timer is ru nning. The camera captures the image after the selected delay elapses. To switch off the self-timer, select > > . Tip: Select 2 seconds to keep your hand steady when capturing an image. Video recording Record a video clip 1 To switch from image mode to video mode, if necessary, select > . 2 To start recording, press the capture key, or select . A red record icon is displayed. 3 To pause recording, select Pause . To resume, select Continue . If you pause recording and do not press any key within one minute, the recordi n g stops. To zoom in or out, use the zoom keys. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 96
4 To stop recording, press th e capture key. The video clip is automati cally saved in Photos . Video recording on-screen controls and indicators The video viewfinder displays the following: 1 Capture mode indicator 2 Audio mute on indicator 3 Capture icon. Select to record video clips. 4 Video light indicator 5 Recording settings. Se lect to change setti ngs. 6 Battery charg e level indicator 7 Video quality indi cator. To change this se tting, select Options > Settings > Video quality . 8 Video clip file type 9 Available recording time. When you are recording, the current video length indicator also shows the elapsed and remaining time. 10 The location to which the video clip is saved 11 GPS signal indicator After re cording a video cli p After you record a video clip , select from the following options (available only if you have selected Options > Settings > Show last ca ptured video > Yes ): Play â Play the video clip you just recorded. â Upload the image to a compatible online albu m. Delete â Delete the video clip. To return to the viewfinder to record a new video clip, press the capture key. Camera settings Still image camera settings To change the main sett in gs, in image mode, select Options > Settings and from the following: Image quality â Set the resolution . The higher the image resolution, the more memo ry the image consumes. Show captured image â View the image after it is captured, or continue im age capturing immediately. Default image name â Define the default name for captured images. Capture tone â Set the tone that sounds when you capture an image. Memory in use â Select where to store your images. Show GPS info â To add GPS location coordinates to each image file, select On . Receiving a GPS signal may ta ke time, or the signal may not be available. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 97
Auto-rotate images â Select whether you want images that are captured wh en the device is held upright to be rotated when you open them in Photos. Restore camera se ttings â Res tore the camera settings to the default values. Video settings To change the main set tings, in video mode, select Options > Sett ings and from the following: Video quality â Se t the quality of the video clip. Se lect Sharing , if you want to send the video clip using a multimedia message. The cl ip is recorded with QCIF resolution, in the 3GPP file fo rmat, and the size is limited to 600 kB (approximately one minute) . You may not be able to send video clips saved in the MPEG4 file fo rmat in a multimedia message. Show GPS info â To add GPS loc ation coordinates to each file, select On . Receiving the GPS signal may take time, or the signal may not be available. Audio recordi ng â Record sound. Show last captured video â View the first frame of the recorded video clip after the recording stops. To view the entire video clip, select Play . Default video name â Enter the default name for recorded video clips. Memory in use â Select where to store your video clips. Restore camera se ttings â Res tore the camera settings to the default values. Photos About Pho tos With Photos, you can view im ages and video clips you have captured and recorded, downlo aded from the web, received in a multimedia or e-mail mess age, saved on a memory card, or copied to your device memory from a memory card or other sources. Select Menu > Photos and from the following: Captured â View all the images and video clips you have captured and recorded. Months â View images and video clips categorised by the month they were captured or recorded. Applicable only for content captured or recorded with your device. Albums â View the default albums and the ones you have created. Tags â View the tags you have created for each item. All â View all images and video clips on your device. Share online â Post your images or video clips to the web. View images and videos Select Menu > Photos . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 98
Images and video clips can al so be sent to you from a compatible device. To be able to view a r eceived image or video clip in Photos, you must first save i t. The images and video clip files are ordered by date and time. The number of files is displaye d. To browse the files, swipe up or down. To open a file, select the file . To view the toolbar, tap the image. To zoom in the imag e, use the zoom slider. The zooming ratio is not stored permanently. To edit an image or a vide o clip, select the file and Options > Edit . To view the details of an image, select Options > Details . To print your images on a compati ble printer, select Options > Print . View and edit file details Select Menu > Photos . To view and edit the properties of an image or a video clip, select the file, Options > Details , and from the following: Name â View the thumbnail image of the file and the current file name. To edit the file name, select the file name field. Description â View a free-form description of the file. To add a description, select the field. Tag â V i e w t h e c u r r e n t l y u s e d t a g s . T o a d d m o r e t a g s t o t h e current file, select New tag . Album â View in which albums the current file is located. Location â View GPS location information, if available. Resolution â View the size of the image in pixels. Duration â View the length of the video clip. Licence â View the DRM rights of the current file. The available options ma y vary. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 99
Organise images and video clips Select Menu > P hotos . You can organise files as follows: To view items in the Tags view, add tags to the items. To view items by months, select Months . To create an album to store items, select Albums > Options > New al bum . To add an image or a video clip to an album, go to the item, and select Option s > Add to album . To delete an image or video clip, go to the item, and select Options > Delet e . Photos toolbar From the active toolbar, se lect the desired option. The available options vary dependin g on the view you are in and whether you have selected an image or a video clip. When viewing an image or a video clip in full screen mode, tap the item to show the toolbar and the zoom slider. Select an image or a video clip and from the following: Send the image or video clip . Mark the image or video clip. Upload the imag e or video clip t o a compatible o nline album (only available if you h ave set up an account for a compatible online album). Delete the image or video clip. Rename the image or video clip. View images as a slideshow. Create a new album. Albums Select Menu > Photos and Albums . With albums, you can conveniently ma nage your images and video clips. To create a new album, select . To add an image or a video clip to an album, select the item and Options > Add to album . A list of albums opens. Select the album to which you want to add the image or video clip. The item you added to the album is still vi sible in Photos. To remove an image or a video cl ip from an album, select the album and the item, and select Options > Remove from album . Tags Select Menu > Photos . Use tags to categoris e media items in Photos. Tag browser shows the currently used tags and the number of items associated with each tag. To assign a tag to an image, select the image and Options > Add tag . To create a tag, select New tag . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 100
To see the tags you have created, select Tags . The s ize of the tag name corresponds to the number of items the tag is assigned to. To view all the images as sociated with a ta g, select the tag from the list. To view the list in alphabetical order, select Option s > Name . To view the list in most fr equently used order, select Options > Populari ty . To remove an image from a tag, select the t ag and the ima ge, and select Option s > Remove from tag . Slide show Select Menu > P hotos . To view your images as a sl ide show, select an image and Options > Sl ide show > Play . The slide show starts from the selected file. To view only a selection of images as a slide show, select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark to mark the images. To start the slide show, select Options > Slide show > Play . To resume a paus ed slide show, select Continue . To end the slide show, select Back . Before starting the slide sh ow, to adjust the slide show settings, select Options > Slide show > Settings and from the following: Image order â Display images from older to newer or vice versa. Song â Select a music file from the list. Transition speed â Adjust the tempo of the slide show. To adjust the volume during the slide show, use the volume keys. TV-out mode To view the captured images and recorded video clips on a compatible TV, us e a Nokia Video Connectivit y Cable. Before viewing the images and video clips on a TV, you may need to configure the TV-out settings and aspect ratio. To view images and video clip s on a TV, do the following: 1 Connect a Nokia Video Connecti v ity Cable to the video input of a compatible TV. 2 Connect the other end of the Nokia V ideo Connectivity Cable to the Nokia AV Connector of your device. 3 You may need to select the cable mode. 4 Select Menu > Photos , and browse for the file you want to view. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 101
All audio, including active ca lls, stereo video clip audio, keypad tones, and ringing tone is routed to the TV when the Nokia Video Connectivity Ca ble is connected to the device. You can use the device microphone normally. For content other than video cl ips, the TV screen displays what is displayed on the screen of your device. Video clips are only displayed on the TV screen, not on the device screen. You can view im ages as a slid e show on the TV. All items in an album or marked imag es ar e displayed on the TV in full screen mode while the selected music plays. The quality of the TV image ma y vary due to differing screen resolutions. You cannot us e the TV as the camera viewfinder in TV-out mode. Wireless radio signals, such as incoming calls, may cause interference in the TV image. Edit images Image editor To edit an image, in Photos, scroll to the image, and select Options > Edit . To add effects to your images, select Options > Add effect . You can crop and rotate the im age; adjust the brightness, colour, contrast, and resolution; and add effects, text, clip art, or a frame to the image. Crop image To crop an image, select Optio ns > Add effect and ( Crop ). To crop the image manually, select Manual . A cross appears in the upper left and lower ri ght corner of the image. To adjust the crop borders, drag the crosses from the corners. To set the crop area, select Set . When the crop area is set, you can drag to move the crop area without ch anging the si ze or aspect ratio. When yo u are sati sfied w ith the cro p area, select Crop . If you select a predefined aspe ct ratio, the selected aspect ratio is locked when you adjust the crop borders. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 102
Reduce red-e ye To red uce re d-eye in an image, select Options > Add effect and ( Red-eye re duction ). Drag the cross onto the eye, and se lect Options > Set . Drag to resize and move the loop to outline the eye, an d select Options > Reduce red-eye effect . When you have finished editing the image, select Done . To save the changes a nd return to the previous view, select Back . Edit video clip s The video editor supports 3GP an d MP4 video file formats, and AAC, AMR, MP3, and WAV audio file formats. It does not necessarily support a ll features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. To edit video clips in Photos, scroll to a video clip, select Options > Edi t , and from the following: Merge â Add an image or a vide o clip to the beginning or the end of the selected video clip. Change sound â Add a new sound clip, and replace the original sound in the video clip. Add text â Add text to the beginning or the end of the v ideo clip. Cut â T r i m t h e v i d e o a n d m a r k t h e s e c t i o n s y o u w a n t t o k e e p in the video clip. To take a snapshot of a video cl ip, in the cut video view, select Options > Take snapshot . Image print You can pr int images from your device us ing a printer compatible with PictBridge. Yo u can only print images that are in the JPEG file format. To print images in Photos, came ra, or image viewer, mark the images, and select Options > Print . Connect to printer In the Print submenu, se lect whether you want to print the image using Bluetooth connecti vity or using a compatible USB data cable. If you want to print using a USB da ta cable, first conn ect your device to a compatible printer using the USB da ta cable, and select Image transfer as the USB connection mode. Print previe w After you select the printer, th e selected images are displayed using predefined layouts. To change the layout, scroll le ft or right to browse through the available layouts for the se lected printer. If the images do not fit on a single page, scroll up or down to display the additional pages. To select the paper size, select Paper size . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 103
To select the print quali ty, select Print quality . Share onlin e You can share im ages and vide o clips in compatible online albums, weblogs, or in othe r compatible online sharing services on the web. You can up load content, save unfinished posts as drafts and continue la ter, and view the content of the albums. The supported content types may vary depending on the service provider. To share images and videos online, y ou must have an acc ount with an online image shar ing service. You can usually subscribe to such a service on the web page of your service provider. Contact your service provider for more information. Using this service may involv e the transmission of large amounts of data throu gh your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about dat a transmission charges. The recommended connection method is WLAN. To upload a file from Photos to an online service, select Menu > Pho tos , the desired file and Opt ions > Send > Upload or Share on Ovi . For more information on th e application and compatible service providers, see the No kia product support pages or your local Nokia website. Music Warning: Continuous exposure to hi gh volume may damage y our hearing. Listen to music at a moderate level, and do n ot hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use. Play a song or a podcast Select Menu > Music > Music library . To play a song or a podcast: 1 Select categories to navigate to the song or podcasts you want to hear. 2 To play an item, select the item from the list. To pause playback, tap ; to resume, tap . To fast-forward or rewind, tap and hold or . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 104
To go to the next item, ta p . To return to the beginning of the item, tap . To skip to the previous item, tap again within 2 seconds after a song or podcast has started. To turn random pl ay ( ) on or off, select Opt ions > Shuffle play . To repeat the curren t item ( ), all items ( ), or to turn repeat off, select Options > Repeat . If you play podcasts, shuffle and repeat are automatically turned off. To modify the tone of the music playback, select Options > Equaliser . To modify the balance and ster eo image or to enhance the bass, select Options > Settings . To return to the home screen and leave the player playing in the background, press the end key. To close the player, select Options > Exit . Playlis ts Select Menu > Music > Music library and Playlists . To view details of the playlist, select Options > Playlis t details . Create a playlist 1 Select Options > New p laylist . 2 Enter a name for the playlist, and select OK . 3 To add song s now, select Yes ; or to add the songs later, select No . 4 If you select Yes , select artists to find the songs you wan t to add to the playlist. Select Add to a dd items. To show the song list unde r an artist title, select Expand . To hide the song list, select Collapse . 5 When you have made your selections, select Done . The playlist is saved to the mass memory of your device. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 105
To add more songs later, when viewing the playlist, select Options > Add songs . To add songs, albums, a rtists, genres , and composers to a playlist from the different view s of the music menu, sele ct an item and Optio ns > Add to playlist > Saved playlist or New playlist . To remove a song from a playlist, select Options > Remove . This does not delete the song from the d evice; it only removes it from the playlist. To reorder songs in a playlis t, select the song you want to move, and Optio ns > Reorder playlis t . To grab a song an d drop it to a new posi tion, select the song in the desired position and Drop . To finish reordering the playlist, select Done . Podcasts Select Menu > Music > Music li brary and Podcasts . The podcast menu displays the podcasts av ailable in the device. Podcast episodes have three states: never played, partially played, and completely played. If an episode is partially played, it plays from the last playback pos ition the next time it is played. If an episode has never been played or completely played, it plays from the beginning. Transfer music from a compu ter You can use the followi ng methods to tran sfer music: ⢠To install Nokia Music to man age and organise you r music files, download the PC software from www.music.noki a.com/download, and follow the instructions. ⢠To view your device on a computer as a mass memory device where you can transfer any data files, make the connection with a comp atible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivity. If you are using a US B data cable, select Mass storage as the connection mode. ⢠To synchronise music with Wi ndows Media Player, connect a compatible USB data cable, and select Media transfer as the connection mode. To change the default USB connection mode, select Menu > Settings and Co nnectivity > USB > USB connection mode . Ovi Music With Ovi Music (network se rvice), you can search, browse, purchase, and download music to your device. The Ovi Music service will eventu ally replace the Music store. Select Menu > Music > Music store . To download music, you firs t n eed to register for the service. Downloading music may involv e additional costs and the transmission of large amounts of data (network service). For é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 106
information about data transm ission charges, contact your network service provider. To access Ovi Music, you must h ave a valid internet access point in the device. You may be asked to select the access point to use when connecting to Ovi Music. Select the acce ss point Select Default access point . The availability and appe arance of Ovi Music settings may vary. The set tings ma y also be predefined and you may not be able to modify them. When browsing Ovi Music, you may be able to modify the settings. Modify Ovi Music set tings Select Options > Settings . Ovi Music is not available for all countries or regions. FM transmitter About the FM tra nsmitter The availability of the FM tran smitter may vary by country. At the time of wr iting, the FM transmitter ma y be used in the following European countries: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, German y, Iceland, Ireland, Lithuania , Liecht enstein, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Spain, Switzerland, Sw eden, Turkey, and United Ki ngdom. For the latest information, and the list of non-European co untries, see www.nokia.com/ fmtransmitter. With the FM transmitter, you can play songs that are stored in your device through any compat ible FM radio, such as a car radio or a home stereo system. The operating frequency of the transmitter ranges from 88.1 to 107.9 MHz. The operating distance of the FM transmitter is up to a maximum of 2 metres (6.5 feet). Obstruction s, such as walls, other electronic devices, or public radio stations may cause interference to the transmission. T he FM transmitter may cause interference to nearby FM radios operating on the same frequency. To avoid interference, always search for a free FM frequency on the receiving radio before using the FM transmitter. The FM transmitter c annot be us ed at the same time as the FM radio of your device. Play a song using FM transmitter Select Menu > Music > Music library . To play a song st ored in your device through a compat ible FM radio, do the following: 1 Select a song or a playlist to be play ed. 2 In the No w playing v iew, select Options > FM transmitter . 3 To activate the FM transmitter, select FM transmitter > On , and enter a frequenc y that is free from other transmissions. For example, if the frequency 107.8 MHz is free in your area and you tune your FM radio to it, you must also tune the FM transmitter t o 107.8 MHz. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 107
4 Tune the receiving radio to the same frequency, and select Options > Exit . To adjust the volume, use the volume fu nction in the receiving device. When the transmitter is active and transmitting, is displayed in th e home screen. If the transmit ter is active, bu t not transm itting a nything, is displayed and a periodic tone sounds. If the transmitter does not transmit anythin g for several minutes, the transmitter is automatically deactivated. FM transmitter settings Select Menu > Se ttings > Connectivity > FM transmitte r . To activate the FM transmitter, select FM transmitt er > On . To set a frequency manually, select Frequency and enter the desired value. To list the previously used frequencies, select Options > Last frequenc ies . Nokia Podcasting About Nokia Podcasting With the Nokia Podcasting ap plication, you can discover, subscribe to, and download podcasts over the air, and play, manage, and share au dio and video podc asts. Downloading and sharin g podcas t requires network support. Search podcasts The search service helps you to find podcasts by keyword or title. The search service uses the podcast search service URL that you defined in Podcasting > Options > Sett ings > Connection > Search service URL . To search for podcasts, select Menu > Appli cations > Podcast ing and Search , and enter the desired keywords. Tip: The search service looks for podcast titles and keywords in descriptions, not specific ep isodes. General topics, such as football or hip-hop, usually give better results than a specific team or artist. T o s u b s c r i b e t o m a r k e d c h a n n e l s a n d a d d t h e m t o y o u r l i s t o f subscribed podcasts, select Subscribe . You can also add a podcast by selecting its title. To start a new search, select Options > New search . To go the website of a podcast, tap the podcas t, and select Options > Open web pa ge (network service). To see the details of a podcast, tap the podcas t, and select Options > Description . To send a podcas t to another co mpatible device, tap th e podcast, and s elect Op tions > Send . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 108
Play and manage podcasts To display the avai lable episod es from the selected podcast, in Podcasts , select Open . Under each episode, you see the file format, the size of the file, and time of the upload. When the podcast is fully do wnloaded, to play the full episode, select it and Play . To update the selected podcast or marked podcasts, for a new episode, select Options > Update . To stop the updating, select Options > Stop updat e . To add a new podcast by entering the URL of the podcast, select Options > New podcast . If you do not have an access p oint defined or if during packet data connection you are asked to enter a user na me and password, contact your service provider. To edit the URL of the selected podcast, select Optio ns > Edit . To delete a downloaded podcas t or marked podcasts from your device, select Option s > Delete . To send the selected podcast or marked podcasts to a nother compatible device as .opml files as a multimedia message or by Bluetooth connectivity, select Optio ns > Send . To update, delete, and send a group of selected podcasts at once, select Options > Mark/Unmark , mark the desired podcasts, and select Options to choose the desired action. To open the website of the po dcast (network service), select Options > Open web pa ge . Some podcasts provide the opportunity to interact with the creators by commenting and voting. To connect to the internet to do this, select Options > View comments . Downloads After you have subscribed to a podcast, from directories, search, or by entering a we b address, you can manage, download, and play ep isodes in Podcasts . To see the podcasts you have subscribed to, select Podcast ing > Podcasts . To see individual episode titles (an episode is a particular media file of a podcast), select the podcast title. To start a download, select the episode title. To download or to continue to download selected or marked episodes, select Option s > Download . You can download multiple episodes at the same time. To play a portion of a podcast during download or after partial downloading, se lect the podcast and Options > Pla y preview . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 109
Fully downloaded podcasts ca n be found in the Podcasts folder, but are not shown unti l the library is refreshed. Directories To open directories, select Menu > A pplications > Podcasting and Director ies . Directories help you find new podcast episodes to which to subscribe. The contents of the directorie s change. Select the desired directory to update it (network service). The colour of the directory changes , when the upda te is complete. Directories can include podcas ts listed by popularity or themed folders. To open a themed folder, select the folder. A list of podcasts is displayed. To subscribe to a podcast, select the title and Subscribe . After you have subscribed to episodes of a podcast, you can download, manage, and play them in the podcasts menu. To add a new web directory or folder, select Options > New > Web directory or Folde r . Enter the title and URL of the outline processor markup language (OPML) file, and select Done . To edit the selected folder, web link, or web directory, select Options > Edi t . To import an OPML file stored on your device, select Options > Import OPML file . Select the location of the file, and import it. To send a directory folder as a multimedia me ssage or using Bluetooth connectivity, select the folder and Opti ons > Send . When you receive a message with an OPML file using Bluetooth connectivity, open the fi le to save the file into the Received folder in Directories. Open the folder to subscribe to any of the links to add to your podcas ts. Podcastin g settings To open Nokia Podcasting, select Menu > Applicat ions > Podcast ing . Before using Nokia Podcasting, define your connection and download settings. The recommended connection method is WLAN. Check with your service provider for term s and data service fees before using different connection methods. For example, a flat rate data plan can allo w large data transfers for one monthly fee. Connection settings To edit the connection settings, select Options > Settings > Connectio n and from the following: Default access point â Select the access point to define your connection to the internet. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 110
Search service URL â Define the podcast search servi ce URL to be used in searches. Download settings To edit the download settings, select Options > Setti ngs > Download and from the following: Save to â Define the location where you want to save your podcast s. Update in terval â Define how often podcasts a re updated. Next update date â Define the date of the next automatic update. Next update time â Define the time of the next automatic update. Automatic updates only occur if a specific default access point is selected and Nokia Podc asting is run ning. If Nokia Podcasting is not running, the auto matic updates are not activated. Download limit (%) â Define the percentage of memory that is reserved for podcast downloads. If limit ex ceeds â Defi ne what to do if the downloads exceed the download limit. Setting the application to retrieve podcasts automatically may involve the tran smission of large amo unts of data through your serv ice providerâÂÂs network. Contact your serv ice provider for information abou t data transmission cha rges. To restore the defau lt settings, select Options > Restore default in the settings view. FM radio Listen to the radio Select Menu > Music > Radio . The FM radio depends on an an tenna other than the wireless device antenna. A com patible headset or ac cessory needs to be attached to the device for the FM radio to function properly. When you open the application for the first time, you can choose to ha ve the local st ations tuned automatically. To listen to the next or the previous station, select or . To mute the radio, select . Select Options and from the following: Stations â View saved radio stations. Tune stations â Search for radio stations. Save â Save the radio station. Activate loudspeaker or Deactivate loudspe aker â Turn the loudspeaker on or off. Alternative frequencies â Select whether you want the radio to automatically search for a better RDS frequency for the station if the frequency level becomes low. Play in background â Return to the home screen with the radio playing in the background. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 111
Manage radio stations Select Menu > Music > Radio . To listen to saved st ations, sele ct Options > Stations , and select a station from the list. To remove or rename a station, select Options > Stations > Option s > Delete or Rename . To set the desired frequency m anually, select Options > Tune stations > Op tions > Manual tun ing . Videos You can download and stream video clips over the air from compatible internet video servic es (network service) using a packet data or WLAN connection . You can also trans fer video clips from a compatible PC to your device to view them. Downloading videos may involve the transmission of large amounts of data th rough your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for in formation a bout data transmission charg es. Your device may have predefined s ervices. Service providers may provide free content or charge a fee. Check the pricing in the service or from the service provider. Download and view video clips Select Menu > Videos & TV . Connect to video services To connect to a se rvice to install video se rvices, select Vi deo feeds > Video directory and the desired video service. To add a video feed manually, in the Video feeds view, select Options > Add feed > Add manually . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 112
View a video clip To browse the content of in stalled video services, select Video feeds . The content of some video servic es is divided into categories. To browse video clips, select a category. To search for a video clip in the service, select Video search . Search may not be available in all services. Some video clips can be streamed over the air, but others must be first downloaded to your device. To download a video clip, select the Download icon. Downloads continue in the background if you exit the application. The down loaded video clips are saved in My videos. To stream a video clip or view a downloaded one, select th e Play icon. To view the control keys duri ng playback, tap the screen. To adjust the volume, use the volume key. Schedule downloads To schedule an automatic download for video clips in a service, select Option s > Schedule downloads . New video clips are automatically downloa ded daily at the time you define. To cancel scheduled downloads, select Manual download as the download method. Video feeds Select Menu > Videos & TV . The content of the installed vide o services is distributed using RSS feeds. To view and manage your feeds , select Video feeds . Select Options and from the following: Feed subscriptions â Check your current feed subscriptions. Feed details â V iew information about a v ideo feed. Add feed â Subscribe to new feeds. Select Via Video directory to select a feed from the services in the video directory. Refresh feeds â Refresh the content of all feeds. Manage account â Manage your account options for a particular feed, if available. Move â Move video clips to a desired location. To view the video clips availabl e in a feed, select a feed from the list. My videos My videos is a storage plac e for all videos. You can list downloaded videos and video clips recorded with the device camera in separate views. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 113
To open a folder and view video clips, select the folder. When a video clip is playi ng, to us e the control keys for controlling the player, ta p the screen. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. Select Options and from the following: Resume down load â Resume a paused or failed download. Cancel download â Canc el a download. Video details â View information about a video clip . Memory status â View the amount of available an d used memory. Sort by â Sort video clips. Select the desired category. Move and copy â Move or copy video clips. Select Copy or Move and the desired location. Transfer vi deos from yo ur PC Transfer your own video clips from compatible devices using a compatible USB data cable. Only video clips which are in a format supported by yo ur device are shown. 1 To view your device on a PC as a mass memory device where you can transfer any da ta files, connect using a USB data cable. 2 Select Mass storage as the connection mode. 3 Select the video clips you wan t to copy from your PC. 4 Transfer the video clips to E:\My Videos in the mass memory of your device, or to F:\My Videos in a compatible memory card, if available. The transferred video clips appe ar in the My videos folder. Video settings Select Menu > Videos & TV . Select Options > Settings and from the following: Video service selectio n â Select the video services that you want to appear in the main view. You can also add, remove, edit, and view the details of a video serv ice. You cannot edit preinstalled video services. Connection settings â To define the network destination used for the network connection, select Network connecti on . To select the connection manually each time a network connection is opened, select Always ask . Parental control â Set an age limit to videos. The required password is the same as the de vice lock code. The factory setting for the lock code is 12345. In video-on-demand services, videos which have th e same or a higher age limit than you have set, are hidden . Preferred memory â Select where to save downloaded videos. If the selected memory becomes full, the device saves the videos in another memory. Thumbnails â Select whether t o download and view thumbnail images of video fe eds. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 114
Personalise your device You can person alise your device by chan ging the standby mode, main menu, tones, them es, or font size. Most of the personalisation option s, such as ch anging the fon t size, can be accessed through the device setti ngs. Change the look of your device Select Menu > Se ttings and Themes . You can use themes to change the look of the display, such as the background image. To change the theme tha t is used for all the applications in your device, select General . To preview a theme before activating it, go to the theme, and wa it for a few secon ds. To activate the theme, select Options > Set . indicates the active theme. To have an imag e or a slide show of changi ng images as the background in the home screen, select Wallpape r > Image or Slide show . To change the image displayed in the home screen when a call is received, select Call image . Profiles You can use profiles to set an d customise the ringing tones, message alert tones, and othe r tones for different events, environments, or caller groups . The name of the selected profile is displayed at the top of the home screen. If the General profile is in use, only the date is displayed. Select Menu > Settin gs and Profiles . Go to a profile, and select from the following: Activate â Activate the profile. Personalis e â Personalise the profile. Timed â Set th e profile to be active until a certain tim e within the next 24 hours. When the time expires, the profile changes back to the previously active non-timed profile. In the home screen, indicates a timed profile. The Offline profile cannot be timed. To create a new profile, select Op tions > Create new . 3-D tones With 3-D tones, you can enable three-dim ensional sound effects for ringing tones. Not all ringing tones support 3-D effects. Select Menu > Settin gs and Profiles . Go to a profile, and select Option s > Personalise . To enable a 3-D effect that is applied to the rin ging tone, select 3-D ringing tone effect and the desire d effect. To change the 3-D echo effect that is app lied to the ringing tone, select 3-D ringing tone echo and the desired effect. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 115
To listen to a 3-D effect before selecting it, go to the effect, and wait for a second. Modify the home sc reen To modify items, such as e-ma il notifications, in the home screen, select Options > Ed it content . To select an image or image slide show as the backgroun d image in the home screen, select Menu > Settings and Themes > Wallpaper . To change the clock shown in the home scre en, tap the clock in the home screen, and select Options > Settings > Clock type . Modify the main menu In the menu you can access th e functions in your device. To open the main menu, press the menu key. To change the menu view, select Op tions > List view or Grid view . To reorganise the main menu, select Options > Organise . For example, to move a menu icon to another folder, select the icon, Optio ns > Move to folder , and the new folder. You can also drag and drop an icon to a new location in the main menu. Applications Calendar To open the calendar, select Menu > Calendar . Calendar views To switch between month, week , and to-do note view, select Options > Change view > Day , Week , or To-do . To change the sta rting day of the week, the view that is shown when you open the calen dar, or the calendar alarm settings, select Options > Settings . To go to a certain date, select Opti ons > Go to date . Calendar toolbar From the toolbar, select from the following: Next view â Select the month view. Next view â Select the week view. Next view â Select the day view. Next view â Select the to-do view. New meeti ng â Add a new meeting reminder. New to-do note â Add a new to-do note. Create a calendar entry 1 To add a new calendar entry, tap the desired date, select Option s > New e ntry and from the following: é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 116
Meeting â Add a reminder of your meeting. Meeting request â Create and send a new meeting request. You must have a mailbox set up for sending requests. Memo â Write a general note for the day. Anniversary â Add a reminder of birthdays or special dates (entries are repeated annually). To-do note â A dd a reminder of a task that must be done by a specific date. 2 Fill in all the fields. Tap a field to enter the text. To close the text inpu t, select . To add a description to an entry, select Optio ns > Add description . 3 To save the entry, select Done . When the calendar alarm sounds, s elect Silence to mute the alarm. To stop the calendar alarm, select Stop . To set the alarm to snooze, select Snooze . To define the period after w h ich the calendar alarm sounds again when set to snooze, select Options > Settings > Alarm snooze time . Manage calendar entries To delete several events at a time, open th e month view, and select Option s > Delete entry > Before selected date or All entries . To mark a task as complet ed in the to-do view, select the task and Options > Mark as done . To send a calendar note to a compatible device, select Options > Send . If the oth er device is not compatible wit h Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), the ti me information of received calendar entries may not be displayed correctly. Clock Set time and date Select Menu > Applications > Clock . Select Options > Settings and from the following: Time â Set the t ime. Date â Set the date. Automatic time up date â Set the network to a utomatically update the time, date, and time zone information for your device (network service). Alarm clock Select Menu > Applications > Clock . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 117
To set a new alarm , select New alarm . Set the alar m time. Select Repeat to set whether and when the a larm is repeated, and select Done . To view your active and ina ctive alarms, select Alarms . When the alarm is acti ve, is displayed. When the alarm is repeated, is displayed. To remove an alarm, select Alarms, scroll to the a larm, and select Options > Delete alarm . To turn off th e alarm when the alarm expires, select Stop . To snooze the alarm, select Snooze . If your device is switched o ff when an alarm ex pires, your device switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. To define the snooze time, select Options > Settings > Alarm snooze time . To change the alarm tone, select Op tions > Settings > Clock alarm tone . World clock Select Menu > Applications > Clock . To view the cur rent time in different locations, select World clock . To add locations to the list, select Op tions > Add location . To set your current location, scroll to a location, and select Options > Set as curre nt location . The tim e in your dev ice is changed according to the sele cted location. En sure that the time is correct and matches your tim e zone. RealPlayer With RealPlayer, you can pla y video clips or stream media files over the air without saving them to the device firs t. RealPlayer does not necessarily support all file formats or all the variations of file formats. Play vid eo clips Select Menu > Applications > RealPlayer . To play a video clip, select Video clips , and a clip. To list recently played files, in the application main view, select Recently played . In the list of video clips, scroll to a clip, select Op tions and from the following: Use video clip â Assign a video to a contact or set it as a ringing tone. Mark/Unmark â Mark items in the list to send or delete multiple items at the same time. View details â View details of the selected item, such as format, resolution, and duration. Settings â Edit settings for vi deo playback and streaming. In the Video clips, Recently played and Streaming links views, the following toolbar icons may be available: é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 118
Send â Send a video clip or streaming link. Play â Play the video clip or video stream. Delete â Delete the video clip or streaming link. Remove â Remove a file from the recently played list. Stream content ov er the air In RealPlayer, you can only open an RTSP link. However, RealPlayer plays a RAM fi le if you open an HTTP link to it in a browser. Select Menu > Applications > RealPlayer . To stream content over the air (network service), select Streaming links and a link. You can also receive a s treaming link in a text mess age or mult imedia message, or open a link on a web page. Before live content begins st reaming, your device connects to the site a nd starts loading the content. Th e content is no t saved in your device. RealPlayer settings Select Menu > Applications > RealPlayer . You may receive RealPlayer settings in a special messa ge from your service provider. For more information, contact your service provider. To select the settings for the video, select Option s > Settings > Video . To select whether to use a prox y server, to change the default access point, and to set th e port range used when conn ecting, select Option s > Settings > Streaming . For the correct settings, contact your service provider. 1 To edit the advanced settings, select Options > Settings > Streaming > Network > Options > Advanced settings . 2 To select the bandw idth used for a network ty pe, select the network type and the desired value. To edit the bandwidth yourself, select User define d . Recorder You can use the recorder to record voice memos and telephone conversations. You can a lso send sound clips to your friends. Select Menu > Applications > Recorder . Record a sound clip Select . Stop recording a sound clip Select . Listen to the sound clip Select . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 119
Send a sound clip as a message Select Options > Send . Record a telephone conversation Open the recorder during a voice call, and select . Both parties hear a tone at reg ula r intervals duri ng recording. Select the recordin g quality or where to save sou nd clips Select Options > Settings . The recorder cannot be used when a data call or GPRS connection is active. Notes Write notes To write a note, select Options > New not e . Tap the note field to enter text, and select . You can save p lain text files (. txt file format) you receive to Notes. Manage notes Select Menu > Applications > Notes . Select Options and from the following: Open â Open the note. Send â Send the note to other compatible devices. Delete â Delete a note. You can also delete several notes at once. To mark each note you want t o delete, select Options > Mark/Unmark , and delete the notes. Synchronisation â Synchronise the notes with comp atible applications on a compatible device, or define the synchronisation settings. Office File manager About File manager Select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . With File manager, you can brow se, manage, and open files on your device, mass memory, memory card, or a compatible extern al drive. The available options depend on the memory you select. Find a nd orga nise files Select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . To find a file, select Option s > Find . Enter a search text that matches the file name. To move and copy files and folders, or to create new folders in the memo ry, select Options > Organi se and the desired option. To sort files, select Options > Sort by and the desired category. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 120
Edit the memory card You can format a memory card to erase the data on it, or you can protect the data on the me mory card with a password. Select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . Rename or format a memory card Select Options > Memory card opti ons and the desired option. Password protect a memory card Select Options > Memory card pass word . These options are available only if a compatible memory card is inserted in the device. Back up files on a memory card Select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . To back up files, select the fi le types you w ant to back up o n a memory card and Options > Back up now . Ensure that your memory card has enough free memory for the files that you have chosen to back up . Format mass memory Select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . When the mass memory is refo rmatted, all data in the memory is permanen tly lost. Back up data you want to keep before formatting the mass memory. You can use Nokia Ovi Suite to back up data to a co mpatible comp uter. Digital rights management (DRM) tech nologies may prevent some ba ckup data from being restored. For more information about DRM used for your content, contact your service provider. To format the mass memory, select Op tions > Format mass memory . Do not format the mass memory using PC software because it may cause degraded per formance. Formatting does not guarantee that a ll confidential data s t o r e d i n t h e d e v i c e m a s s m e m o r y i s p e r m a n e n t l y d e s t r o y e d . Standard formatting only marks the forma tted area as available space and delet es the address to find the fi les again. The recovery of formatted or ev en overwritten data may still be possible with special recov ery tools and software . Dictionary Select Menu > Applications > Office > Dictionary . To translate words from one la nguage to another, enter text in the search field. As you en ter text, suggestions of words to translate are displa yed. To translate a word , select the word from the list. All languages may not be supported. Select Options and from the following: Listen â Listen to the selected word. History â Find previously translated words from th e current session. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 121
Languages â Change the source or target language, download languages from th e internet, or remove a language from the dictionary. You cannot remove the Eng lish language from the dictionary . You can have two addition al languages installe d, besides English. Speech â Edit the voice feature settings. You can adjust t he speed and volume of the voice. Quickoffice About Quicko ffice Select Menu > Applications > Office > Quickoffice . Quickoffice consists of Quickword for viewing Microsoft Word documents, Quicksheet for viewing Microsoft Excel worksheets, Quickpoint for Microsoft PowerPoint presentations, and Quickmanag er for purchasing software. You can view Microsoft Office 2000, XP, 2003, and 2007 documents (DOC, XLS, and PPT fi le formats) with Quickoffice. If you have the editor version of Quickoffice, you can also edit files. Not all file formats or features are supported. Converter With Converter, you can convert measures from one unit to another. The converter has limited accura cy, and rounding errors may occur. Currency converter Select Menu > Applications > Office > Converter . Select Type > Currency . Before you can make currency conversions, you must sele ct a base currency and add exchange rates. The defau lt base currency is Home. The rate of the base currency is always 1. 1 Select Options > Currency rates . 2 The default name for the currency i tems is Foreign. T o rename a currency, select Options > Rename currency . 3 Add the exchange rates fo r the currencies, and select Done . 4 In the other Un it field, sele ct the currency to which you want to convert. 5 In the first A mount field, enter the value you want to convert. The other Amount field shows the converted value automa tically. To change the base currency, select Option s > Currency rates , a currency and Options > Set as base currency . When you change base curre ncy, you must enter new exchange rates because all prev iously set exchange rates are cleared. Convert meas ures Select Menu > Applications > Office > Converter . 1 In the Type field, select the measure you want to use. 2 In the first Unit field, select the unit from which you want to convert. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 122
3 In the other Unit field , sele ct the unit to wh ich you want to convert. 4 In the first Amount field, enter th e value you want to convert. The other Amount field shows the converted value automatically. Calculator Make calculations Select Menu > Applications > Office > Calculator . This calculator has limited a ccuracy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculation, en te r the first number of the calculation. To remove a numb er, select the backspace key. Select a functi on such as a dd or subtract. Enter the second number of the calculation, and select = . Save calculations To save the results of a calculation, select Options > Memory > Save . The saved result re places the previously stored result in the memory. To retrieve the results of a ca lculation from the me mory and use them in a calculation, select Options > Memory > Recall . To view the last saved result , select Optio ns > Last result . Exiting the Calculator applicat ion or switching off the device does not clear the memory. You can recall the last saved result the next time you open the Calcu lator application. Zip manag er Select Menu > Applications > Office > Zip . With Zip manager, you can creat e new archive files to store compressed ZIP formatted file s; add single or multiple compressed files or directories to an archive; set, clear, or change the archiv e password for protected archives; and change settings, su ch as the level of compression used. You can save the archived files in the device memory or on a memory card. Active notes Active notes allo ws you to crea te notes that con tain images and sound o r video clips . You can als o link a note to a contac t. The note is displayed during a call with the contact. Create and edit no tes Select Menu > Applications > Office > Active notes . To create a note, start w riting. To edit a note, select the note and Options > Editing options . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 123
To add boldface, italics, or underlining to your text or change the font colour, press and hold the Shift key, and scroll to select the text. Then select Options > Text . Select Options and from the following: Insert object â Insert images, sound or video clips, business cards, web bookmarks, and files. Send â Send the note. Link note to call â Select Add contacts to link a note to a contact. The note is di splayed when making a ca ll to or receiving a call from the contact. Settings fo r Active notes Select Menu > Applications > Office > Acti ve notes and Options > Sett ings . To select where t o save notes, select Memory in use and the desired memory. To change the layout of activ e notes, or to view the n otes as a list, select Change view > Gri d or Li st . To see a note in the backgrou nd when making or receiving phone calls, select Show note during call > Yes . Adobe Re ader Select Menu > Applications > Office > Adobe PDF . With Adobe Reader, you can rea d PDF documents with your device; search for text in th e documents; modify settings, such as zoom level and page vi ews; and send PDF files using e-mail. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 124
Settings Some settings may be preset fo r the device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change them. Phone settings Date and time se ttings Select Menu > Se ttings and Phone > Date and time . Select from the following: Time â Enter the current time. Time zone â Select your location. Date â Enter th e date. Date format â Select the date format. Date separator â Select the symbol that separates days, months, and years. Time format â Select the time format. Time separator â Select the symbol that separates hours and minutes. Clock type â Select the cloc k type. Clock alarm tone â Select the tone for the alarm clock. Alarm snooze time â Adjust the snooze time. Workdays â Select your working days. You can then set an alarm only for working da y mornings, for example. Automatic ti me update â To update the time, date, and time zone, select On . This network service may not be available on all networks . Speech Select Menu > Settin gs > Phone > Speech . With Speech, you can set the langu age, voice, and voice properties for the message reader. To set the language for the messa ge reader, select Langua ge . To download additional languages to your device, select Options > Download languages . Tip: When you download a new la nguage, you must download at least one v oice for that language. To set the speaking voice, select Voice . The voice depends on the selected language. To set the speaking rate, select S peed . To set the speaking volume, select Volume . To view details of a voice, open the voice tab, and select the voice and Options > Voice details . T o listen to a voice, select the voice and Options > Play voi ce . To delete languages or v oices, select the item and Options > Delete . Message reader settings To change the messa ge reader settings, open the S ettings tab, and define the following: é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 125
Language detection â Activate automatic reading language detect ion. Continuous reading â Activate continuous reading of all selected messages. Speech prompts â Set the message reader to insert prompts i n messages. Audio source â Lis ten to messages through the earpiece or loudspeaker. Language settings Select Menu > Se ttings and Phone > Language . To change the device language, select Phone l anguag e . To change the writing la nguage, select Writing language . To turn predictive text input on or off, select Predictive text . Display settings Select Menu > Se ttings and Phone > Display . Select from the following: Light sensor â Adjust the light se nsor sensitivity of your device. The light sensor turns th e lights on when the li ghting of your location is dim an d off when it is bright. Font size â Select the size of text and icons on t he display. Welcome note / l ogo â Select whether you want to display a note or image when you switch on the device. Light time-out â Set how long the light s tays on when you stop using the device. Voice commands To activate enhanced voice com mands, to start applications and profiles, press and hold th e call key in the home screen. To control your device with enhanced voice commands, press and hold the call key in the home screen, and say a voice command. The voice command is the name of the application or profile displayed in the list. Select Menu > Settin gs and Phone > Voice commands . Select Options and from the following: Change command â Edit the voice commands. Playback â Listen to the synthesise d voice tag. Remove voice command â Remove a voice command that you added manually. Settings â Adjust the settings. Voice command tutorial â Open the tutorial for voice commands. Sensor settings and display rotation When you activate the sensors in your device, you can control certain functions by turning the device. Select Menu > Settin gs and Phone > Sensor sett ings . Select from the following: é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 126
Sensors â Activate the sensors. Turning control â Select Silencing calls and Snoozing alarms to mute calls and snooze alarms by turning your device so that the disp lay faces down. Select Auto-rotate display to rotate the display content aut omatically when you turn the device on its left side or back to a vertical position. Some applications and features m ay not support rotating the display content. Slide settin gs Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Sl ide settings . To set the device to lock the keypad when you close the s lide, select Lock keys wit h slide close . Accessory settings Select Menu > Se ttings and Phone > Accessories . Some accessory connectors indi cate which type of accessory is connected to the device. Select an accessory and from the following: Default profile â Set the profile that you want activated each time you connect a certai n compatible accessory to your device. Automatic an swer â Select whether you want the device to answer an incomi ng call automatically after 5 seconds. If the ringing type is set to Beep once or Si lent , automa tic answer is disabled. Lights â Set whether lights rema in on after the time-out. The available settings depend on the type of accessory. TV-out settings To change the settings for a TV-out connection, select TV- Out and from the following: Default profile â Set the profi le that you w ant activated each time you connect a Nokia Video Connectivity Cable to your device. TV aspect ratio â Select the aspect ratio of the TV: Normal or Widescre en for widescreen TVs. TV system â Select th e analogue video signal syst em that is compatible with your TV. Flicker filter â To improve image quality on the screen of your TV, select On . The flicker filter may not diminish image flicker on all TV screens. Application se ttings Select Menu > Settin gs and Phone > Application sett. . In application settings, you can edit the sett ings of some of the applications in your device. To edit the settin gs, you can also select O ptions > Sett ings in each application. Device updates With Device updates, you can co nnect to a server a nd receive configuration settings for your device, create new server profiles, view existing software version and device information, or view and manage existing server profiles. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 127
Select Menu > Se ttings and Phone > Phone mg mt. > Device updates . If software updates over the air are supported by your network, you may a lso be able to request up dates through the device. You may receive server profiles and different configuration settings from your service providers and company information manage ment department. These configuration settings may include connection and other settings used by different applications in your device. Receive configuration settings 1 Select Options > Server prof iles . 2 Go to a profile, and select Op tions > Start configuration . Create a server profile Select Options > Server pr ofiles > Options > New server profile . Delete a server profile Select Options > Delet e . Security settin gs Phone and SIM Select Menu > Se ttings and Phone > Phone mg mt. > Security settin gs > Phone and SIM card . Select from the following: PIN code reques t â When active, the code is requested each time the device is switched on. De activating the PIN code request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. PIN code , PIN2 code , and Lock code â You can change the PIN code, PIN2 code, and lock code. These codes can only include numbers from 0 to 9. Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency number. If you fo rget the PIN or PIN2 code, contact your service provider. If you forget the lock code, contact a Nokia Care point or your service provider. Phone autolock p eriod â To avoid unauthorised use, you can set a time-out after which the device automatically locks. A locked device cannot be used until the correct lock code is entered. To turn off the autolock period, select None . Lock if SIM card changed â You can set the device to ask for the lock code when an unkn own SIM card is inserted into your device. The device mai ntains a list of SIM cards tha t are recognised as the ownerâÂÂs cards. Remote phone locking â Enable or disable remote lock. Closed user group â You c an specify a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you (network service). Confirm SIM ser vices â You can se t the device to display confirmation me ssages when you are using a SIM card service (network service). Certificate management Select Menu > Settin gs and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Security settings > Certificate management . Digital certificates should be used if you wan t to connect to an online bank or another site or remote server for actions é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 128
that involve transferring co nfidential information. They should also be used if you want to reduce the risk of viruses or other malicious software an d be sure of th e authenticity of software when downloadin g and installing software. Select from the following: Authority cert ificates â View and edit authority certificates. Trusted site ce rtificates â View and edit trusted site certificates. Personal certificates â View and edit personal certificates. Phone certificates â View and edit device certificates. Digital certificates do not guar antee safety; they are used to verify the origin of software. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connecti ons and software insta llation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; the certificate manager must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increased security to be available. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid y et" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, chec k that the current date and time i n your device are correct. View certificate details â check authenticity You can only be s ure of the co rrect identity of a server when the signature and the validity pe riod of a server certificate have been checked. You are notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the corr ect security certificate in your device. To check the details of a certificate, select Options > Certificate details . The validity of the certificate is checked, and one of the following notes may be displayed: Certificate not trusted â You have not set a ny application to use the certificate. Expired certificate â The certificate validity period has ended. Certificate not va lid yet â The certificate validity period has not y et begun. Certificate corrupted â The certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issuer. Change the tru st settings Before changing any certificat e sett ings, you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belong s to the listed owner. To change the settings for an authority certificate, select Options > Trust settings . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications th at can use the selected certificate is shown. For example: Symbian installation : Yes â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. Internet : Yes â The certificate is able to certify servers. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 129
App. installation : Yes â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Java⢠application. To change the value, s elect Opt ions > Change trust setting . Security module Select Menu > Se ttings and Phone > Phone mg mt. > Security settin gs > Security module . To view or edit a security module (if available), select it from the list. To view detailed information abou t a security module, select Options > Securi ty details . Restore origina l settings Select Menu > Se ttings and Phone > Phone mg mt. > Factory settings . You can reset some of the settings to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. After resetting, the device may take a long er time to power on. Documents and fi les are unaffected. Protected content To manage digital righ ts licences, select Menu > Settings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Security se ttings > Protected content . Digital rights management Content owners may use different types of digital rights management (DRM) technologies to protect their intellectual property, including copyrights. Th is device uses various types of DRM software to access DRM-protected cont ent. With this device you can access content protected with WMDRM 10, OMA DRM 1.0, and OMA DRM 2.0. If certain DRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask tha t such DRM software's ability to access new D RM-protected content be revoked. Revocation may also prevent renewal of such DRM- protected content already in yo ur device. Revocation of such DRM software does not affect the use of content protected with other types of DRM or the use of non-DRM-protected content. Digital rights mana gement (DRM) p rotected content comes with an associated licence that defines your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM-protec ted content, to back up both the activation keys an d the content, use the backup feature of Nokia Ovi Suite. If your device has WMDRM-p rotected content, both the licence and the content will be lost if the device memory is formatted. You may also lose the licence and the content if the files on your device get corrupted. Losing the licence or the content may limit your ability to use the same content on your device again. For more information, co ntact your serv ice provider. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 130
Some licence may be connected to a s pecific SIM card, and the protected content can be access ed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. Notification lights Select Menu > Se ttings and Phone > Notification li ghts . To turn the standby breathing light on or off, select Standby br. light . When the standby breathing lig ht is turned on, the menu key lights up periodically. To turn the no tification light on or off, select Notifi cation light . When the notification light is turned on, the menu key ligh ts up for a period you define to notify of missed events , such as missed calls or unrea d messages. Application manager About Applicati on manager Select Menu > Settings and Application mgr. . With Application mana ger, you can see the software packages installed in your de vice. You can view details of installed applications, remo ve applications, and define installation settings. You can install the followi ng types of applicati ons and software: ⢠JME applications based on Ja va⢠technology with .jad or .jar file extensions ⢠Other applications and software suitable for the Symbian operating system with .sis or .sisx file extensions ⢠Widgets with the .wgz file extension Only install software that is compatible with your device. Install applications You can transfer installation files to your device from a compatible computer, download them during browsin g, or receive them in a multimed ia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using other co nnectivity methods, such as Bluetooth connectivity. You can use N okia Application I nstaller in N okia Ovi Suite to install an application to your device. Icons in Application manage r indicate the following: SIS or SISX applicati on Java application widgets application installed in the memory card application installe d in the mass memory Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such a s applications that are Symbian Signed or hav e passed the Java Verified⢠testing. Before installation, note the following: é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 131
⢠To view the application type , version number, and the supplier or manufacturer of the application, select Options > View details . To view the security certificate details of the application, select Details: > Certificates: > View details . Control the use of digital certificate s in Certificate management. ⢠If you install a file tha t contains an update or repair to an existing application, you ca n only restore the original application if you ha ve the original inst allation file or a full backup copy of the removed software package. To restore the original applicat ion, remove the application, and install the ap plication again from the original installation file or the backup copy. The JAR file is required for in stalling Ja va applicat ions. If it is missing, the device may as k you to download it. I f there is no access point de fined for the application, you are asked to select one. To install an applicat ion, do the following: 1 To locate an insta llation file, select Menu > Settings and Application mgr. . Alternatively, search installation files using File manager, or select Messaging > In box , and open a message that contains a n installation file. 2 In Applicat ion manager, select Options > Install . In other applications, select the in stallation file to start the installation. During installation , the device shows information about the progress of the insta llation. If you install an application withou t a digital signature or certification, the device displays a warning. Continue installation only if you are sure of the or igin and contents of the application. To start a n installed applic ation , locate the application in the menu, and select the application. If the appli cation does not have a default folder defined, it is installed in the Installed apps. folder in the main menu. To see which software packages are installed or removed and when, select Opt ions > View log . Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one application wi th antivirus functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functi oning. After you install applications to a compatible memory card, installation files (.si s, .sisx) remain in the device memory. The files may use large amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To mainta in s ufficient memory, use Nokia Ovi Suite to back up installation files to a compatible PC, then use the file manager to remove the installation files from the device memory. If the .sis file is a message at tachment, delete the message from the Messaging inbox. Remove applications Select Menu > Settin gs and Application mgr. . To remove a software package, select Installed apps. > Options > Unins tall . Select Yes to confirm. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 132
If you remove software, you can only reinstall it if you have the original software package or a full backup of the removed software package. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to open documents created with that software. If another software packag e depends on the software package that you removed, the other software packag e may stop working. Refer to the do cumentation of the installed software package for details. Application manager settings Select Menu > Se ttings and Application mgr. . Select Installatio n settings and from the following: Software ins tallation â Select whether Symbian soft ware that has no verified digita l signature can be installed. Online certificate check â S elect to check the online certificates before inst alling an application. Default web address â Set the default web address used when checking onli ne certificates. Calling se ttings Call settings Select Menu > Se ttings . Select Calling > Call and from the following: S e n d m y c a l l e r I D â S e l e c t Yes t o s h o w y o u r p h o n e n u m b e r to the person you are calling. To use the setting agreed upon with your service provider, select Set by networ k ) (network service). Send my internet call ID â S e l e c t Yes to show yo ur internet call ID to the person you are calling. Call waiting â Activate your device to notify you of incoming calls while you are i n a call (network service), or check whether the function is activated. Internet call waiting â Activate your device to notify you of a new incoming internet call while you are in a call. Internet call ale rt â Select On to set your device to alert for incoming internet calls. If you select Off , you receive only a notification if you missed a call. Reject call with message â Activate rejecting a call with a text message to inform the caller wh y you could not answer the call. Message text â Write the standard text message that is sent when you reject a call. Own video in recvd. call â Selec t to allow or deny video sending during a video call from your device. Image in video call â If video is not sent during a video call, you can select a still im age to be displayed instead. Automatic redial â Set your device to make a maximum of 10 attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful call attempt. To stop automat ic redialling, press the end key. Show call duration â Set the length of a call to be displayed during the call. Summary after call â Set the length of a call to be displayed after the call. Speed dialling â Activate speed dialling. Anykey answ er â Activate an ykey answer. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 133
Line in use â This setting (network service) is shown only if the SIM card supports two su bs criber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phon e line you want to use for making calls and sending text messages. Ca lls on both lines can be answered irrespective of the selected line. If you select Line 2 and have not subscribed to this network service, you are not able to make calls. When line 2 is selected, is show n in the home screen. Line change â Select to prevent line selection (network service), if supported by your SI M card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Call divert Select Menu > Se ttings and Calling > Call divert . Call divert allows you to divert incoming calls to your voice mailbox or another phone number. For details, contact your service provider. 1 Select the type of calls to divert and a diverting option. For example, to divert all voice calls, select Voice calls > All voice calls . 2 To activate call divert, select Activate . 3 To divert calls to your voice mailbox, select To voice mailbox . 4 To divert calls to anot her phone number, select To other number , and enter the number, or select Find to retrieve a number saved in t he contacts list. Several diverting opti ons can be active at the same time. When all calls are diverted, is displayed in the home screen. Call barring Call barring (network service) a llows you to restrict the calls that you make or receive with the device. For example, you can restrict all outgoing intern ational calls or incoming calls when you are abroad . To change the settings, you need the barring password from your service provider. Select Menu > Settin gs and Calling > Call barring . When security features that re strict calls are in use (s uch as call barring, closed user group, and fixed dialling), calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at the sa me time. Voice call barring Select the desired barring option and Activate , Deactivate , or Check status . Call barring affects a ll calls, including data calls. Intern et call b arring To select whether anonymous calls are allowed from the internet, select Anonymous call barrin g . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 134
Troubleshooti ng To view frequently asked ques tions about your device, see the product support pages a t www.nokia.com/support . Q: What is my pas sword for the loc k, PIN, or PUK codes ? A: The default lock code is 12345. If you forget the lock code, contact your device dealer. If you forget a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network service provider. For information about passwords, contac t your a ccess point provider, for example, a commerc ial internet service p rovider (ISP) or network service provider. Q: How do I close an applic at ion that is not responding? A: Select Options > Sh ow open apps. , and go to the application using the men u key. Press and hold the menu key to open the application, and s elect Optio ns > Exit . Q: Why do images l ook smudgy? A: Ensure that the camera len s protection windows are clean. Q: Why do missing, d iscoloured, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I switch on my d evice? A: This is a characteristic of this type of display. Some displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fau lt. Q: Why can't my No kia device establ ish a GPS connecti on? A: Establishing a GPS co nnection may t ake from a couple of seconds to several minutes. Establishing a GPS connection in a vehicle may take longer. If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better signal. If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. Ensure that your hand does not cover the GPS antenna of your device. If th e weather cond itions are bad, the signal strength may be affecte d. Some vehicles have tinted (athermic) windows, whi ch may block the satellite signals. Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs device while using Bluetooth connect ivity? A: Check that both devices are compatible , have activated Bluetooth connectivity, and are not in hidden m ode. Check also that the distance between the two devices is not over 10 metres (33 feet) and that th ere are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 135
Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a Bluetooth connection? A: If another device is connecte d to your device, you can close the connection from the other device or deactivate Bluetooth connectivity in your device. Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Bluetooth > Bluetooth > Off . Q: Why can't I see a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point even though I know I'm within it s range? A: The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You ca n only access networks that use a hidden SSID if you know t he correct SSID, and hav e created a WLAN internet access point fo r the network on your Nokia device. Q: How do I turn the wireless LAN (WLAN) off on my Nokia device? A: The WLAN on your Nokia device is deactivated when you are not connected or trying to conn ect to another access point, or not scanni ng for available networks . To further reduce battery cons umptio n, you can spec ify that your Nokia device does not scan, or s cans less often, for available networks in the background. The WLAN is deactivated in between background scans. To change the background scan settings, do the following: 1 Select Menu > Se ttings and Connectivity > WLAN . 2 To increase the background sc an time interval, adjust the time in Scan for networks. To stop background scans, select Show WLAN availa bility > Never . 3 To save your changes, se lect Back . When Show WLAN availab ility is set to Never , the WLAN availability icon is not displayed in the home screen. However, you can still manually scan for available WLAN networks, an d connect to WLAN networks as usual. Q: What do I do if the memory is full? A: Delete items from the memory. If Not enough memory to perform operat ion. Delete some data first. or Memo ry low. Delete som e data from phone memory. is displayed when you are deleting several items a t the same time, delete items one by one, beginning with the smallest ite ms. Q: Why canâÂÂt I sele ct a contact for my m essage? A: The contact card does not have a phone number, address, or e-mail address. Select Menu > Contacts and the relevant contact, and edit the contact card. Q: How can I end the data co nnection wh en the device starts a data connection again and again? A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia message ce ntre. To stop the device from making a data connection, select Menu > Messaging and Options > Sett ings > Multimedia message > Multimedia retrieval . Select Ma nual to hav e the multimed ia messag ing é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 136
centre save messages to be retrieved later, or Off to ignore all incoming multimedia messages. I f you select Manual , you receive a notification when yo u have a new message in the multimedia message centre. If you select Off , the device does not make any network connections related to multimedia messaging. To set the device to use a pa cket data connection only if you start an applicati on or action that needs it, s elect Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Admin. settings > Packet data > Packet data conne ction > When need ed . If this does not help, switch th e device off and then on again. Q: Can I use my Nokia devi ce as a fax modem with a compatible PC? A: You cannot use your device as a fax modem. However, with call diverting (network service) , you can divert incom ing fax calls to a fax number. Q: How do I calibra te the screen ? A: The screen is calibrated at th e factory. If it is necessary to recalibrate the screen, select Menu > Settings and Phone > Touch input > Touch screen calibratio n . Follow the instruct ions. Green tips Save energy You do not need to charge your battery so often if you do the following (if available for your device): ⢠Close applications and data connections, for example, your Bluetooth connection, when not in use. ⢠Decrease the brightness of the screen. ⢠Set your device to enter power saver mode after the minimum period of inactivity, if available in your device. ⢠Deactivate unnecessary so unds, su ch as key tones. Recycle All materials o f this device c a n be recovered as materials an d energy. For information on how to recycle your old Nokia products, go to www.nokia .com/werecycle, or using a mobile device, nokia.mobi/werecycle. Recycle packaging and user guides at your local recycling scheme. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 137
The crossed-out wheeled-bin symbol on your product, battery, literature, or packaging reminds you that all electrical and electronic products, batteries, and accumulators must be taken to sepa rate collection at the en d of their working life. This requirement applies in the European Union. Do not di spose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. Fo r more information on the environmental attributes of y our device, see www.nokia.com/ecodeclaration. Product and safety information Acces sori es Warning: Use only batter ies, chargers, and accessories approved by Nokia for use with this particular mod el. The use of any ot her types may invalida te any approval or warranty, and may be danger ous. In particular, use of unapproved chargers or batteries may present a risk of fir e, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. For availability of approved accessories, p lease check with your deale r. When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory , grasp and pull the p lug, not the cord. Battery and charger info rmation Battery and charger info rmation Your device is powered b y a rechargeable ba ttery. The ba ttery intended for use wit h this device is BP-4L . Noki a may m ake addi tional battery models availa ble for this dev ice. Th is device is in tended for use wh en supplied with power from the f ollowing char gers: AC-10. The exact charger model number may vary depending on the type of plug. The plug variant is identified by one of the follo wing: E, EB, X, AR, U, A, C, K, o r UB. The battery can be charged and discharged hund red s of times, but it will eventually wear out. When the tal k and standby times a re noticeably shorter than normal, re place the battery. Use on ly Nokia approved bat teries, and recharge your b attery only with Nokia approve d charger s desig nated for this de vice. If a battery is being used for the first t ime or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged period , it may be necessary to connect the charger, then disco nnect and reconnect it to begin ch arging the battery. If the battery is compl etely discharged , it may take several minutes befor e the charging indicator appears on the di splay or before any calls can be made. Safe removal. Alw ays switch the d evice of f and disco nnect the charger befor e removing the battery. Proper charging. Unplug the charger from the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave a fully charged battery connected to a charger, since o vercharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully char ged battery will lose its cha rge over time. Avoid extreme temper atures. Always try to keep the battery between 15 ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). Extr eme temperatures r educe the capacity and l ifetime of the batt ery. A device with a hot or cold bat tery may not work t emporarily. Battery per formance is parti cularly limited in tem peratures well below fre ezing. Do not short-circuit . Accidental short-cir cuiting can occur when a metallic obje ct such as a coin, clip, or pe n causes direct connection of the positive ( ) and negative (-) terminals of the batt ery. (These look like metal stri ps on the batte ry.) This might happen, for example, when yo u carry a spare battery in your pocket or pur se. Short-circ uiting the terminals may damage the batter y or the connecting object. Disposal. Do no t dispose of b atteries in a fire as they ma y explode. Di spose of batt eries according to local regulat ions. Please recycle when possib le. Do not dispose as household waste. Leak. Do not dismantle, cut, o pen, crush, be nd, puncture, or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a battery leak, prevent batte ry liquid con tact with sk in or eyes. If this happens, flush the affected are as immediately with water, or see k medical help. Damage. Do not mod ify, remanufacture, attempt to insert foreign obje cts into the battery, or immerse or e xpose it to water or othe r liquids. B atteries may ex plode if damaged. Correct use. U se the battery only for its in tended purpose. Improper b attery use may result in a fire, explosion, or other hazard. If the device or batte ry is dropped, especially on a hard sur face, and you bel ieve the batter y has been damaged, take it to a se rvice centre for inspection before continuing to use it. Never us e any charger or batter y that is damaged. Keep your batt ery out of the r e ach of small chi ldren. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 138
Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia bat teries for your sa fety. To check that you are gett ing an original Noki a battery , purch ase it from a No kia auth orised servic e centre or dealer, and inspect the ho logram label using the follow ing steps: Authenticate hologram 1 W hen you look at the hologram on t he label, you should see the Nokia conne cting hands symbol from o ne angle and the Nokia Origina l Enhancements logo when looking from another ang le. 2 When you a ngle the hologram left, right, down and up, you should see 1, 2, 3 and 4 dots on ea ch side respectively. Successful completion o f the steps is not a total ass urance of the authenti city of the battery. If you cannot confirm authenticity or if you have any reason to belie ve that your Nokia battery wi th the hologram on the label is no t an authentic Noki a battery, you should refrain fro m using it, and take it to the nearest Nokia authorised service centre or dealer for assi stance. To find out more about original No kia batteries, see www.noki a.com/battery. Taking car e of your device Your devi ce is a prod uct of sup erior des ign and craft smanship and should be tr eated with care. The following suggestions will he lp you protect your warranty coverage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Precipit ation, humid ity, and all types o f liquids o r moisture can contain minerals that will corr ode elec tronic circuits. If yo ur device does ge t wet, remove t he battery, and allow the de vi ce to dry compl etely before re placing it. ⢠D o no t u se o r s to r e t he d ev ic e in d us ty , dirty areas. Its moving parts and ele ctronic compone nts can be da maged. ⢠Do not store the device in high or cold temperature. H igh temperatures can short en the life of elect ronic devices, damage ba tteries, and war p or melt ce rtain plastics. When the device warms to its normal te mperature from a cold temperature, moisture ca n form inside the de vice and damage electronic circui t boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the device other t han as instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knoc k, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine mech anics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solv ents, or strong d etergents to clea n the device. Only use a soft, clean, dr y cloth to clean the surface of the device. ⢠Do not paint t he device . Paint can c log the mov ing parts a nd prevent proper operation. ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna . Unauthorised antennas, modifications, or atta chments could damage t he device and may vio late regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Backup all data you want to keep, such as contacts and cal endar notes. ⢠To reset the device from time t o time for optim um p erformance, power off the device and remove the batte ry. These suggestions apply eq ually to your device, batt ery, charger, or any accesso ry. Recycle Always return yo ur used electro nic products , batteries , and packaging mater i als to dedicated collection points. This way you help prevent u ncontrolled waste d isposal and promote the recycl ing of materials. Check pro duct environmental information a nd how to recycle your Nokia products at www.nokia.com/wer ecycle, or n okia.mobi/werecycl e. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 139
Additional safety information Small children Your devi ce and its acce ssorie s are not toys. The y may co ntain s mall par ts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Operating environment This device meets RF expo sure guidelines in the nor mal use position at the ear or at le ast 1.5 centimetres (5/8 inch) away from the body. Any carry case, belt clip, or holder for body-worn operation shou ld not contain metal and sho uld position the device t he above- stated dista nce from your body. To send data files or messages requires a quality connecti on to the network. Data files or messages may b e delayed until such a connect ion is available. Follow the separation distance instructions until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magne tic. Metallic mate rials may be at tracted to t he device. Do not place credit cards or other magneti c storage media near t he device, because information stored on them may be eras ed. Medical devices Operation of radio transmitt ing equipment, including wi reless phones, may in terfere with the funct ion of inadequa tely protecte d medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine whether they are adeq uately shielded from external RF energy. Switch off your de vi ce when regulations posted instruct you to do so. Hospital s or health care facili ties may use equipmen t sensitive to externa l RF energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacturers of medical devices re commend a minimum separation of 15.3 centi metres (6 inches) between a wireless device an d an implant ed medi cal devic e, such as a pacemaker o r implanted cardiover ter defibr illator, to avoid poten tial interfe rence wit h the medical device. Person s who have such devices should: ⢠Always keep the wireless device more t han 15.3 centimetres (6 inches) from the medical device. ⢠Not carry the wir eless device in a breast pock et. ⢠Hold the wireless devic e to the ear op posite the me dical device. ⢠Turn the wireless device off if there is any reaso n to suspe ct that i nterfe rence is taking place. ⢠Follow the manufacturer directions for the implanted medical dev ice. If you have any questi ons about using your w ireless device with an implanted medical device, consult your health care provider. Hearing aids Some digi tal wir eless dev ices ma y inter fere with s ome heari ng aids. Hearing aids Warning: For hearing aid compatib ility, you must turn off the Bluetooth connectivity. Your mobile device model complies with FC C rules governing hearing aid compati bility. These rules require an M3 microphone or higher value. The M-value, s hown on the de vice box , refers to lower radio frequency (RF) emis sions. A higher M-value generally indicates that a device mod el has a lower RF e missions level, whi ch may improve the likelihood that the device will op erate with certain hearing aids. Some hearin g aids are more immune than others to interference. Please consult yo ur hearing health profes sional to determine the M-ra ting of your hearing aid and whether your heari ng aid will work with this device. More information on accessibility can b e found at www.nokia accessib ility.com. This device has been tested and ra ted for use with hearing aids for som e of the wireless technologies that it uses. H owever, there may be some newer wir eless technologies used in this device tha t have not be en tested yet for use with hearing aids. It is impor tant to try the different featur es of this device thoro ughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid or cochlear impl ant, to determ ine whether you hear any interfering noise. Consult your service pr ovider about its retu rn and exchange policies and f o r information on hearing aid compatibility. Vehicles RF signals may affect impro perly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicle s such as electronic fuel inje ction, elec tronic an tilock bra king, elect ronic speed control, and air bag systems. For more information, check with t he manufacturer of your vehicle or its equipment. Only qualified personnel sh ould service the device or insta ll the device in a vehi cle. Faulty install ation or service may be dan gerous and may invalidate your warranty. Che ck regularly that all wirel ess device equipment in your vehicle is mount ed and operating é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 140
properly. Do not store or carry flammab le liquids, gases, or explosive materi als in the same compartment as the device, its parts , or accessories. Remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place your device or accessor ies in the air bag deployment a rea. Switch off your d evice before boarding an ai rcraft. The use of wirele ss teledevices in an aircraft may be dangero us to the operation of the aircraf t and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere. Obey all posted instructions. S parks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or death. Switch off the device at refue lling points such as near gas pumps at service stat ions. Observe restrictio ns in fuel depots, stor age, and distribution a reas; chemical plants ; or where bla sting operation s are in progress. Areas w ith a potentially explosive atmos p here are often, but not alwa ys, clearly marked. They include a reas where you would be advis ed to turn off your vehicle engine, below deck on boats, chemical transfer o r storage facili ties and where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. You should check with the manufacturer s of vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) to determine if this device can be safely used in their vicinity. Emergency calls Important: This device operates using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-progra mmed functions. If your d evice supports voice calls over the internet (internet calls), activate both the interne t calls and the cellular p hone. The device will attempt to make emergency calls ov er both the cellular networks and thr ough your internet c all provider if both are activated. Connectio ns in all c onditions cannot be guaranteed. You sho uld never rely solel y on any wireless d evice for essential communications like medi cal emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1 If the de vice is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. De pending on your device, you may also need to comp lete the followi ng: ⢠Ins ert a SIM card if your devi ce uses one . ⢠Remove ce rtain call restrictions yo u have activated in your device. ⢠Change your profile from offline profile mod e to an active profile. ⢠If the screen and keys a re locked, sl ide the lock sw itch on the si de of the device to unlock them. 2 Press the en d key as m any tim es as ne eded to c lear th e displa y and read y the devi ce for calls. 3 Open the di aller by selecting the dialle r icon ( ). 4 Enter the official emergency number for your prese nt location. Emergency numbers vary by locati on. 5P r e s s t h e c a l l k e y . When making an eme rgency call, gi ve all the necessary information as accurately as possible . Your w ireless d evice m ay be the only me ans of comm unicati on at the s cene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. Certification information (SAR) This mobile device meets guidelines for exposure to ra dio waves. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is des igned not to exceed the limits for exposu re to radio wa ves rec ommended by interna tional gu idelines . These guidelines were developed by the indepe ndent sc ientific organis ation IC NIRP and include safety margins designed to assure the prote c tion of all pers ons, regardless of age and health. The exposure guidel ines for mobile devices employ a unit of measurement known as the S p e c if i c A b s o r p t i o n R a t e o r S A R . T h e S A R l i m i t s t a t e d i n t h e I C N I R P g u i d e l i n e s i s 2 . 0 w a t ts / kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of t issue. Tests for SAR ar e conducted using standard operati ng positions with the d evice transmitting at its highest certified power level in all teste d frequency bands. The a ctual SAR level of an operating device can be below the maxim um value because the device is designed to use only the power requi red to reach the network. That amount changes depending on a number of factors such as how close you are t o a network base stat ion. The highest SAR value unde r the ICNIRP guidelines fo r use of the device at the ear is 0. 66 W/kg. Use of device a ccessories may result in different SAR val ues. SAR values may vary depending on natio nal reporting an d testing requirem ents and the network band. Additional SAR inform ation may be provided und er product information at www.nokia.com. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 141
Copyright and other notices é 2009 Nokia. All rights reserved. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY He r e b y, N O K IA C O R PO R A T IO N d e cl a r e s t h a t th i s R M- 5 0 5 pr o d uc t i s in c o m pl i a n ce w i t h t h e essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Direct ive 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://www.nokia.com/phones/ declaration_of_conformity/. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Nser ies, N97, Nokia Original Accessories logo, and Ovi are trademarks or register ed trademarks of Nokia Corporat ion. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corpora tion. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks o r tradenames of their respective owners. Reproduc tion, trans fer, distri bution, or storage of p art or all of the conte nts in thi s document in any form w ithout the p rior writ ten permis sion of Nok ia is prohib ited. Nokia operates a policy of continuous de velopment. Nokia reserve s the right to make changes and impro vements to any of the pr oducts des cribed in th is docume nt witho ut prior notice. Java and all Java -based marks are trademarks or registe red trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Portions of the Nokia Maps software are é1996-2010 The FreeType Proj ect. All rights reserve d. This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Vi sual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in connection with information which has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a consumer engaged in a personal a nd noncommercial activity and (ii) for use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a licensed video provider. No license is granted or shall be implied for an y other use. Additional information, including that r elated to p romotional, int ernal, and com mercial uses, may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegla.com. TO THE MAXIMUM EX TENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, UN DER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NOKIA OR ANY OF ITS LICENSORS BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCID ENTAL, CONSEQUENT IAL OR INDIRE CT DAMAGES HOWSO EVER CAUSED. The third-party applicati ons provided with your dev ice may have been created and may be owned by per sons or entitie s not affiliated with or relate d to Nokia. Nokia does not own the copyrights or i ntellectual prope rty rights to the third-party app lications. As such, Nokia does not take any re sp onsibility for end-use r su pport, functionality of the applications, or the info rmation in the applicat ions or these mater ials. Nokia does not provide any warranty for the third-par ty applications. BY USING THE APPLIC ATIONS YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE AP PLICATIONS ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRES S OR IMPLIED, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW . YOU FURTHE R ACKNOWLEDGE THAT NEITHER NOKIA NOR ITS AFFILIATES MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WA RRANTI ES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIE D, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR THAT THE APPLICATIONS WILL NOT INFRI NGE ANY THIRD-PARTY PATENTS, COPYRIGHTS, TRADEMARKS, OR OTHER RIGHTS. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED "AS IS". EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO WA RRANTIES OF ANY KI ND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED , INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHA NTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCURACY, RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT. NOKIA RESERVES THE RI GHT TO REVISE THIS DOCUMENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WIT HOUT PRIOR NOTICE. Reverse engineering of software in the device is prohibite d to the extent permitt ed by applicable law. Insofar as this user gui de contains any limitations on Nokia 's representations, warr anties, damages and l iabilities, such limitati ons shall likewise limi t any representations, warranti es, damages and liabilities of Nokia's licensors. The availa bility of particular prod ucts and applications a nd services for these pr oducts may vary by reg ion. Please check wi th your Nokia deale r for details and availability of language options. This device may contain c ommodities, technolog y or software subjec t to export laws and r egulations from the US and other countries. Diversion co ntrary to law is p rohibited. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 142
FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTIC E Your device may cause T V or radio interfere nce (for ex ample, when using a telephone in close prox imity to rece iving equipment). The FCC or I ndustry Canada can require yo u to stop using your telephone if such interfer ence cannot be el iminated. If you require assistance, contact your local service facili ty. This device complies wit h part 15 of the FCC rules. Operatio n is subject to the following tw o conditions: (1) This devic e may not cause harmful interference, and ( 2) this device must accept any interference rece ived, including interference that may cause undes ired operation. Any changes or mod ifications not expressly app roved by Nokia c ould void the user's authorit y to operate this equipment . /Issue 5 EN é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 143
Index Symbols/Number s 3-D ringing tones 115 A A-GPS (assisted GPS) 80 access codes 11 access points 66, 67 â groups 67 accessories 127 accounts 53 active notes 123 â settings 124 alarm â calendar note 116 alarm clock 117 albums, media 100 anniversary notes 116 answering calls 37 antennas 17 application manager â settings 133 application settings 127 applications 131 assisted GPS (A -GPS) 79 attachments 56, 57 audio messages 55 auto-update for time/date 117 B background image 115, 116 backing up device memory 120 barring calls 134 battery â charging 18 â inserti ng 15 â saving pow er 11 birthday notes 116 blogs 76 Bluetooth 71, 72 Bluetooth connectivity â blocking devices 72 â device visibility 71 â pairing device s 71 â security 71 â settings 70 â turning on/ off 70 bookmarks 77 browser â bookmarks 77 â browsing pages 75, 76 â cache memory 77 â searching content 76 â security 77 â settings 78 â toolbar 75 C cable connection 73 cache memory 77 calculator 123 calendar 116 â toolbar 116 calendar entry â deleting 117 â sending 117 call log 44 call waiting 38 calls 35 â answering 37 â conference 37 â dialled 43 â dialled numbers 30 â duration of 44 â internet calls 40 â missed 43 â options 36 â received 4 3 â redialling 133 â rejecting 3 7 â restricting See fixed dialling â settings 133 â video calls 38 camera â assigning imag es to contacts 95 â flash 95 â image mode 93 é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 144
â image quality 97 â indicators 94 â location information 94 â options 95 â recording 97 â scenes 95 â self-timer 96 â sending i mages 95 â sequence mode 96 â settings 92, 97 â video mode 96 â video quality 98 cell broadcast messages 58 certificates 128 charging the battery 18 chat services (IM) 51 clock 116, 117 â setting date 117 â setting ti me 11 7 computer connections 73 See also data connections conference calls 37 connectors 13 contacts â copying 47 â creating groups 48 â defaults 46 â editing 45 â favourites 28 â groups 48 â images in 45 â managing 45 â ringing tones 46 â saving 45 â synchronising 69 â voice tags 45 content â synchronising, sending, and retrieving 25 converter 122 copyright protection 130 currency â converter 122 D data connections 69 â cable 73 â PC connectivity 73 â synchronisation 69 date and time 117 date and time settings 125 declining calls See rejecting calls device â updating 127 dialled numbers 43 dictionary 121 dismissing calls 37 display settings 126 DRM (digital rights management) 130 duration of calls 44 E e-mail 63 â mailbox 57 â notifications 27, 28 e-mail messages 56 end all calls option 38 F factory settings â restoring 130 feeds, news 76 file management 121 file manager 120, 121 â backing up files 121 â organising files 120 fixed dialling 47 FM radio 111 FM transmitter 107 â settings 108 G general information 9 GPS â position requests 81 GPS (Global Positioning System) 79 é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 145
GPS (global positioning system) 79, 82 H headset 18 help application 9 home screen 28, 115, 116 â contacts 28 â music player 28 â notification s 27 HSDPA (high-speed downlink packet access) 32 I IAPs (internet access points) 66 icons 29 IM (ins tant mes saging) 51 images 100 â editing 102 â sharing online 104 inbox â message 56 inbox, message 56 indicators 29 installing applications 131 internet browser 75 internet calls 40 â log in 40 â making 40 â settings 40, 41 internet connection 75 See also browse r invitations â video sharing 43 J Java applicati ons 131 K keyboard 21 keypad lock 24 keys 13, 14 L landmarks 81 language sett ings 126 licences 130 location information 79, 82 lock code 11, 17 lock switch 24 locking â remotely 11 logs 44 loudspeaker 31 M Mail for Exchange 63 mailbox â e-mail 56 â video 36 â voice 36 Maps 8 4 â browsing 85 â changing views 85 â compass 84 â display elements 85, 91 â driving routes 91 â Favourites 88 â finding locations 86 â navigating 90, 91 â organising places 88 â organising routes 88 â planning routes 87 â saving places 88 â saving routes 8 8 â sending p laces 89 â sharing locations 89 â synchronising 89 â traffic information 9 1 â viewing location details 86 â voice guidance 90 â walking routes 90 mass memory â formatting 121 media â RealPlayer 118 meeting notes 116 meetings â setting up 116 memo notes é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 146
See to-do notes memory â clearing 1 2 â web cache 77 memory card 121 â backing up files 121 message reader â select ing vo ice 12 5 messages â e-mail 56 â folders for 54 â icon for incoming 56 â multimedia 56 â settings 59 â voice 36 MMS (multimedia message service) 55, 56, 59 multimedia messages 55, 56, 59 music player 28, 104, 106 â playlists 105 muting s ound 3 7 my music 104 N navigation tools 79 network settings 64 news feeds 76 Nokia account 33, 48, 53 Nokia support information 9 notes 120 notification light 131 O offline profile 32 outbox, message 54 Ovi by Nokia 32 Ovi Contacts 48, 49 â adding friends 50 â availabi lity status 49 â connection setti ngs 54 â landmarks 53 â personalisation 54 â presence 53 â profiles 49 â searching 50 â settings 52 â sharing your location 49, 53 â synchronising 52 Ovi Music 106 Ovi Store 33 â creating an accou nt 33 â details 33 â purchasing 34 â searching 33 â settings 34 â sharing with friends 34 â signing in 33 P packet data connection 44 â access point settings 68 â settings 74 page overview 76 PDF reader 124 personal certificates 128 personalisation 115 photographs See camera Photos 98 photos 100 â file details 99 â red-eye 103 â tags 100 â toolbar 100 â viewing 98 PIN code 11 pin code 17 PIN2 code 11 podcasting 108 â directories 110 â downloads 109 â playing 109 â searching 108 â settings 110 positioning information 79, 82 positioning settings 83 presence 53 presentations, multimedia 56 é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 147
profiles 26, 115 â changing profiles 30 â offline restrictions 32 â personalisation 26 proximity sensor 35 proxy se ttings 68 PUK codes 11 R radio 111 â listening 111 â stations 112 RealPlayer 118 recorder 119 recording â video clips 96 red-eye removal 103 rejecting calls 37 remote locking 11 remote mailbox 5 6 remote SIM mode 72 removing applications 132 ringing tones 26, 115 roaming 64 S scenes 95 search â settings 31 searching 30, 3 1 security â browser 77 â certificates 128 security code 11 security module 1 30 self-timer â camera 96 sensor settings 126 sent messages folder 54 service commands 59 service messages 56 settings 127 â access point name control 74 â access points 67 â active n otes 124 â applications 127 â Bluetooth connectivi ty 70 â browser 78 â call divert 134 â calls 133 â certificates 128 â date and time 125 â display 126 â e-mail notificati ons 28 â FM transmitter 108 â internet calls 40 â language 126 â message s 59 â network 64 â packet data 74 â packet data access points 68 â podcasting 110 â positioning 83 â SIP 74 â slide 127 â tv-out 127 â video 114 â video sharing 41 â WLAN 66, 69 Share online 28 shared video 41 sharing your location 52 shooting modes â camera 95 side keys 14 SIM card â inserting 15 â messages 58 SIM card security 128 SIP 7 4 slide settings 127 slide show 101 SMS (short mess age service) 55 software applications 131 software up dates 9, 10 songs 104 speakerphone 31 speech 125 speed dialling 37 support 9 é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 148
synchronisation 52, 69 T text input 21, 22 text messages â receiving and reading 56 â replying to 56 â sending 55 â settings 59 â SIM messages 58 themes 115 time and date 117 to-do no tes 116 tones 2 6, 115 â 3-D 115 toolbar 92 top keys 1 3 touch screen 19, 23, 35 transferring cont ent 24 troubleshooting 135 TV configuration 127 TV-out mode 101 U updates 1 0 â applications 9 â device 127 â device software 9, 1 0 UPIN code 11 UPUK code 11 USB cable connection 73 USB charging 18 useful information 9 V video â downloading 112 â my videos 11 3 â playing 113 â settings 114 â shared 43 â transferring video clips 114 â video feeds 113 â viewing 112 video calls 38, 39, 40 video clips 100 â editing 103 â shared 41 video settings 98 video sharing â requirements 41 â sharing live video 42 â sharing video clips 42 virtual keypad 23 voice calls See calls voice comm ands 30, 38, 126 voice control 126 voice dialling 38 voice mailbox 30 volume controls 3 1 W web browser 75 web connection 75 web logs 7 6 week settings â calendar alarm 116 wireless LAN (WLA N) 65 wireless LAN setting s 6 6 WLAN (wireless local area network) 65, 69 wrist strap 19 Z Zip manager 123 é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 149
Contents Safety 6 About your device 6 Network services 7 Shared memory 7 Mail for Exchange 8 Find help 9 Support 9 In-device help 9 Do more with your device 9 Update device software 9 Settings 10 Access codes 11 Remote lock 11 Prolong battery life 11 Free memory 12 Get started 13 Keys and parts (top) 13 Keys and parts (front) 13 Keys and parts (back) 14 Keys and parts (sides) 14 Insert the SIM card and battery 15 Memory card 16 Antenna locations 17 Switch the device on an d off 17 Charge the battery 18 Headset 18 Attach wrist strap 19 Touch screen actions 19 Write text 21 Lock the keys and touch screen 24 Nokia Switch 24 Profiles 26 Your device 27 Home screen 27 Display indicators 29 Shortcuts 30 Search 30 Volume and loudspeaker control 31 Offline profile 32 Fast downloading 32 Ovi (network service) 3 2 Make calls 35 Touch screen during calls 35 Make a voice call 35 During a call 36 Voice and video mailboxes 36 Answer or reject a call 37 Make a conference call 37 Speed dial a phone number 37 Call waiting 38 Voice dialling 38 Make a video call 38 During a video call 39 Answer or reject a video call 40 é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 2
Internet calls 40 Video sharing 41 Log 43 Contacts (phonebook) 45 Save and edit names and numbers 45 Contacts toolbar 45 Manage names and numbers 45 Default numbers and addresses 46 Contact cards 46 Set contacts as favourit es 46 Ringing tones, images, and call text for contacts 46 Copy contacts 47 SIM services 47 Contact groups 48 Ovi Contacts 48 Messaging 54 Messaging main view 54 Write and send messages 55 Messaging inbox 56 Mailbox 56 View messages on a SIM card 58 Cell broadcast messages 58 Service commands 59 Messaging settings 59 Mail for Exchange 63 Connectivity 64 Data connections and access points 64 Network settings 64 Wireless LAN 6 5 Access points 67 Active data connect ions 69 Synchronisation 69 Bluetooth connectivity 70 USB 73 PC connections 73 Administrative setting s 74 Internet 75 Browse the web 75 Browser toolbar 7 5 Navigate pages 76 Web feeds and blogs 7 6 Content search 76 Bookmarks 7 7 Empty the cache 77 End the connection 77 Connection security 77 Web settings 78 Position ing (GPS) 79 About GPS 79 Assisted GPS (A -GPS) 80 Hold your device correctly 80 Tips on creating a GPS connection 80 Position requests 81 Landmarks 81 GPS data 82 Positioning settings 83 é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 3
Ovi Maps 84 Maps overview 84 Use the compass 84 View your location and the map 85 Map view 85 Change the look of the map 85 Find a location 86 View location details 86 Plan a route 87 Save places and routes 88 View and organise places or routes 88 Send places to your friends 89 Synchronise you r Favourites 89 Share location 89 Get voice guidance 90 Walk to your destination 90 Drive to your destination 91 Navigation view 91 Get traffic and safety information 91 Camera 92 Activate t he camera 92 Image capture 92 Video recording 96 Camera settings 97 Photos 98 About Photos 98 View images and videos 98 View and edit file details 99 Organise images and video clips 100 Photos toolbar 100 Albums 100 Tags 100 Slide show 101 TV-out mode 101 Edit images 102 Edit video clips 103 Image print 103 Share online 104 Music 104 Play a song or a podcast 104 Playlists 105 Podcasts 106 Transfer music from a com puter 106 Ovi Music 106 FM transmitter 107 Nokia Podcast ing 10 8 FM radio 111 Videos 112 Download and v iew video clips 112 Video feeds 113 My videos 113 Transfer videos from your PC 114 Video settings 114 Personalise your device 115 Change the look of your device 115 Profiles 115 é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 4
3-D tones 115 Modify the home screen 116 Modify the main menu 116 Applications 116 Calendar 116 Clock 117 RealPlayer 118 Recorder 119 Notes 120 Office 120 Settings 125 Phone settings 125 Application manager 131 Calling settings 133 Troubleshoot ing 135 Green tips 137 Save energy 137 Recycle 137 Product and safety informatio n 138 Index 1 44 é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 5
Safety Read these simple guidelines . Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAF ELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be suscepti ble to interference, which coul d affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN RESTRICTED ARE AS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off in aircraft, near medical eq uipment, fuel, chemicals, or blasting areas. ROAD SAFETY COM ES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free t o operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. QUALIFIED SERVI CE Only qualified personnel ma y install or repair this product. ACCESSORIES AND BATTERIES Use only approved acce ssories and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESIST ANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for information about networks. When using the features in th is device, obey all laws and respect local customs, privacy and legitimate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright protection may prev ent some images, music, and other content from being copi ed, modified, or transferred. Your device supports several methods of connectivit y. Like computers, your devic e may be exposed to viru ses and other harmful content. Exercise caution with messages, connectivity requests, browsing , and downloads. Only i nstall and use services and other software from trustworthy sources that offer adequate se curity and protection aga inst harmful software, such as app lications that are S ymbia n Signed or have passed the Ja va Verified⢠testing. Consider é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 6 MHz MHz use on the (E)GSM 850, 900, 1800, 1900 , a n d U M T S 9 0 0 , 1900, 2100 n e t w ork s . C o n tac t y o ur s e r v ice p rov i d er for more
installing antivi rus and other secu rity software on your device and any connected computer. Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one appl ication with antivirus functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functioning. Your device may have preins talled bookmarks and links for third-party internet sites. Yo u may also access other third- party sites through your device. Third-party sites are not affiliated with Nokia, an d Nokia does not endorse or assume liability for them. If you choos e to access such sit es, you should take precautions for security or content. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device must be swi tched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. The office applications support common features of Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Microsoft Office 2000, XP, and 2003). Not all file formats can be viewed or modified. Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device. When connecting to any other de vice, read its user guide for detailed safety in structions. Do not connect incompatible products . The images in this guide may di ffer from your device display. Network services To use the device you must have service from a wireless service provider. Some features a re not available on all networks; other features may re quire that you make specific arrangements with your serv ice provider to use them. Network services involve transmission of data. Check with your service provider for details about fees in your home network and when roaming on other networks. Your service provider can explain what charges will ap ply. Some networks may have limitation s that affect how y ou can use some features of this device requ iring networ k su pport s uch as support for specific technologies like WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/ IP protocols and language- dependent charact ers. Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain features be disabled or not ac tivated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your devi ce menu. Your device may also h ave customized it ems such as menu names, menu order, and icons. Shared memory The following features in this device may s hare memory: multimedia messagin g (MMS), e-mail application, instant messaging. Use of one or more of these features may reduce the memory available for the remaining feat ures sharin g memory. Your device ma y display a message t hat the memory is full when you try to use a sh ared memory feature. In this case, delete some of the inform ation or entries stored in the shared memory features before continuing. During extended operation such as an active video call an d high speed data connection, th e device may feel warm. In é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 7
most cases, this condition is normal. If you suspect the device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorised service facility. Mail for Exchange Use of the Mail for Exchange is limited to over-the-air synchronisation of PIM info rmation between the Nokia device and the authorised Microsoft Exchange server. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 8
Find help Support When you want to learn more about how t o use your product or you are unsure how your device should funct ion, go to www.nokia.com/support , or using a mobile device, nokia.mobi/s upport. You can als o select Menu > Applications > Help in your device. If this does not resolve your issue, do one of the following: ⢠Reboot your device. Switch off the device, and remove the battery. After about a minute, replace the battery, and switch on the device. ⢠Restore the original factory settings. ⢠Update your device software. If your issue remains unsolv ed, contact Nokia for repair options. Go to www.nokia.com/repair. Before sending your device for repair, always back up the data in your device. In-device help Your device contains instru ctions to help to use the applications in your device. To open help texts from the main menu, select Menu > Applications > Help and the application for which you want to read instructions. When an application is open, to access the help text for the current view, select Options > Help . When you are reading the instru ctions, to change the size of the help text, select Options > Decrease font size or Increase font size . You may find links to related topics at the end of the h elp text. If you select an underlined word, a short explanation is displayed. Help texts use the following indicators: Link to a related h elp topic. Link to the application being discussed. When you are reading the inst ructions, to switch between help texts and the app lication that is open in the backgroun d, select Option s > Show open apps. and the desired application. Do more with your device There are various applicati ons provided by Nokia and third party software develo pers, that help you do more with your device. To find and download applications, visit the Ovi Store at store.ovi.com. These applications are explained in the guides that are available on th e product support pages at www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia website. Update de vice softwar e About devi ce software and application updates With device software updates and application updat es, you can get new featu res and enhanced function s for your device. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 9
Updating the so ftware may also improv e your device performance. It is recommended that you back up your personal data before updating your device software. Warning: If you install a software update , you cannot use the device, even to make emergency calls , until the installation is completed and the device is restar ted. Be sure to back up data before accepting insta llation of an update. Downloading s oftware updat es may inv olve the transmission of large amounts of data (network service). Make sure that the device battery has enough power, or connect the charger before starting the update. After you update your device software or applications, the instructions in the user guide ma y no longer be up to date. Update software using your device You can check if there are upda tes available for your device, and download them to your device (network ser vice). Select Menu > Settin gs > Phone > Phone mg mt. > Device updates and Options > Check for update s . Update de vice software using yo ur PC You can use the Nokia Software Upda ter PC application to update your device software. To update your device software, you need a compatible PC, a high -speed internet connection, and a compatible USB data cabl e to connect your device to the PC. To get more information and to download the Nokia Software Updat er application, go to www. nokia.com/ softwareupdate. Settings Your device norm ally has MMS, GP RS, streaming, and m obile internet settings automat ically configured, based on your network service provider info rmation. You may have settings from your service providers alre ady installed in your device, or you may receive or request the settings from the network service prov iders as a special message. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 10
You can change the general settings in your device, such as language, standby mode, display, and keypad lock settings. Access codes If you forget any of the access codes, contact your service provider. Personal identification numb er (PIN) code â This code protects your SIM card again st unauthorised use. T he PIN code (4 - 8 dig its) is usually s upplied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unblock it. UPIN code â This code may be supplied with the U SIM card. The USIM card is an enhanced version of the SIM card and is supported by 3G mobile phones. PIN2 code â This code (4 - 8 digits) is supplied with some SIM cards, and is required to access some function s in your device. Lock code (also known as se curity code) â Th e lock code helps you to protect your device aga inst unauthorised use. The preset code is 12345. You c a n create and change the code, and set the device to request the code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe pla ce sepa rate from your device. If you forget the code and your device is locked, your device will require service. Additional ch arges may ap ply, and all th e personal data in your device may be deleted. For more information, contact a Nokia Care Point or your device dealer. Personal Unblocking Key (PUK) code and PUK2 code â These codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact the network s ervice provider whose SIM card is in your device. UPUK code â This code (8 digi ts) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the code is not supplied with the USIM card, contact the ne twork serv ice provider whose USIM card is in your device. International Mobile Equipment Id entity (IMEI) number â This number (15 or 17 digits) is used to identify valid devices on the GSM network. Devices th at are, for example, stolen, can be blocke d from accessing the network. The IMEI number for your de vice can be found under the battery. Remote lock To prevent unauthorised use of your device, you can lock your device and memory card remote ly using a text message. You must define the text message, and to lock your device, send the text message to your device. T o unlock your device, you need the lock code. To enable remote locking, and to define the text message, select Menu > Settings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Security settings > Phone and SI M card > Remote phone locking > En abled . Tap t he text input fi eld to enter the text message content (5-20 characters) , select , and verify t he message. Enter the lock code. Prolong bat tery life Many features in your device increase t he demand on battery power and reduce the battery lifetime. To save battery power, note the following: é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 11
⢠Features that use Blu etooth technology, or allow ing such features to run in the ba ckground while using other features, increase the demand on battery power. Deactivate Bluetooth tech nology when you do not need it. ⢠Features th at use wireles s LA N (WLAN), or allowing su ch features to run in the ba ckground while using other features, increase the dema nd on battery power. WLAN on your Nokia device deactivates when you a re not trying to connect, not connected to an access point, or not scanning for avai lable ne tworks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can specify that your device does not scan, or scans less often, for available networks in the background. ⢠If you have set Packet data connection to When available in connection settings , and there is no packet data coverage (GPRS), the de vice periodically tries to establish a packet data co nnection. To prolong the operating time of your device, select Packet da ta connection > When needed . ⢠The Maps application downloads new map information when you scr oll to new areas on the map, whic h increases the demand on ba tte ry power. You can prevent the automatic download of new maps. ⢠If the signal strength of the cellular network varies much in your area, your device must scan for the available network repeatedly. This increases the demand on battery power . If the netwo rk mode is s et to dual mode in the net work settings, the device searches for the 3G network. You can set the device to use only the GSM network. To use only the GSM network, select Menu > Settings and Connectivi ty > Ne twork > Network mode > GSM . ⢠The backlight of the display increases the demand on battery power. In the display settings, you can change the length of the time-out period af ter which the backlight is switched off. Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Display > Light time-out . T o adjust the light sensor that observes lighting conditions a nd adjusts the display brightness, in the display settings, se lect Light sensor . ⢠Leaving applications runn ing in the background increases the demand on ba ttery power. To close the applications you are not using, if they are not responding, select Options > Sh ow open apps. , and go to the application using the menu key. Press and hold the menu key to open the application, and select Options > Exit . Free memory To view how much space is availa ble for different da ta types, select Menu > Appli cations > Office > File mgr. . Many features of the device use memory to store data. The device notifies you if the memory in different memory locations is low. To free memory, transfer data to a compatible memory card (if available) or to a compati ble computer. To remove data you n o longer need, use File m anager or open the respective ap plication. You can remove the followi ng: é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 12
⢠Messages in the folders in Messaging and retrieved e-mail messages in the mailbox ⢠Saved we b pages ⢠Contact information ⢠Calendar notes ⢠Applications shown in Appl ication manager that you do not need ⢠Installation files (.sis or .s isx) of applications you have installed. Transfer the inst a llation files to a compatible computer. ⢠Images and video clips in Phot os. Back up the files to a compatible computer. Get started Keys and parts ( top) 1 Power key 2 Nokia AV connector (3.5 mm) for compatible headsets, headphones, and TV-out connectors Keys and parts (front) 1 Proximity sensor 2 Earpiece 3 Touch screen 4 Menu key é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 13
5 Call key 6 Secondary camera lens 7 Light sensor 8 End key Do not cover the area above the touch screen, for example, with protective film or tape . Keys and parts (back) 1 Camera flash 2 Camera lens 3 Lens cover Keys and parts (sides) 1 Stereo speaker 2 Micro U SB conn ector 3 Charging indicator light 4 Lock switch 5 Volume up/Zoom in key 6 Volume down/Zoom out key 7 Capture key Note: The surface of this device does not contain nickel in the platings. The surface of this device con tains stainless steel. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 14
Insert the SIM ca rd and battery Follow the instructions carefully, to avoid damaging the back cover. Always switch the device o ff and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. 1 Remove the back cover by lifting it from the bottom end of the device. 2 If the battery is inserted, li ft the battery in the direction of the arrow to remove it. 3 Pull out the SIM card holder , and insert the SIM card. Ensure that the gold-coloured contact area on the card is facing down and that the bevelled corner on the card is facing the bevelled corner on the holder. Push the SIM card holder back in. 4 Align the contacts of the ba ttery with the corresponding connectors on the battery co mpartment, an d insert the battery in the direction of the arrow. 5 To replace the back cover, di rect the top locking catches toward their slots, and pre ss down until t he cover locks into place. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 15
Memory card Use only compatible microSD cards approved by Nokia for use with this device. Nokia uses a p proved industry standards for memory cards, but some brands may not be fully compatible with this dev ice. Incompati ble cards may damage t he card and the device and corrupt data stored on the card. Insert the memory card A memory card may be already in serted in the device. If not, do the following: 1 Remove the back cover of the device. 2 Insert a compatible memory card in the slot. Ensure that the contact area on the card is facing down and tow ards the slot. 3 Push the card in. You can hea r a click when the card locks into place. 4 Replace the back cover. K eep the device facing down when replacing the cover. Ensure that the cover i s properly closed. Remove the memory card Important: Do not remove the memory card during an operation when the card is being accessed. Doing so may damage the memo ry card and the device, and corrupt data stored on the card. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 16
1 Before you remove the card, pres s the power key, and select Remove me mory car d . All applications are closed. 2W h e n Removing memory card will close all open applications. Remove anyway? is displayed, select Yes . 3W h e n Remove memory card and press 'OK' is displayed, remove the back cover of the device. 4 Press the memory card to release it from the slot. 5 Pull out the memory card. If the device is switched on, select OK . 6 Replace the back cover. Ensu re that the cover is properly closed. Antenna location s Your device may have internal and external antennas. Avoid touching the antenna a rea unnecessarily while the antenna is transmitting or receiving. Co ntact wi th antennas affects the communication quality and may cause a higher power level during operation and may reduce the battery life. Switch the device on and of f To switch on the device: 1 Press and hold the power key. 2 If the device asks for a PIN co de or lock code, enter it, and select OK . T he preset lock code is 12345 . If y ou forget the code and your device is locked, your device will require service and additional ch arges may apply. For more é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 17
information, contact a Nokia Care point or your device dealer. To switch off th e device, press th e power key briefly, and select Switch off! . Charge the b attery Your battery has been partially charged at the fact ory. There is no need to charge the devi ce in advance. If the device indicates a low charge, do the following: Regular charging 1 Connect the charg er to a wall outlet. 2 Connect the charger to the de vice . The char ging ind icator light next to the USB connect or is lit when the battery is being charged. 3 When the device indicates a full charge, disconnect the charger from the device, th en from the wall outlet. You do not need to charge the battery for a specific length of time, and you can use the device while it is charging. If the battery is completely discharged, it may ta ke several minutes before the charging indicato r appears on the display or before any calls can be made. Tip: Disconnect the charger from the wall outlet when t he charger is not in use. A charg er that is connected to the outlet consumes power even when it is not connected to the device. USB charging You can use USB charging when a wall outlet is not available. With USB charg ing, you can al so transfer da ta while charging the device. 1 Connect a compatible USB device to your device using a compatible USB cable. Depending on the type of device t h a t i s u s e d f o r c h a r g i n g , it may take a while for charging t o start. 2 If your device is switched on, you can select from the available USB mode options on the display of the device. Note: During extended operation or charging, the device or the charger may feel warm. In most cases, thi s condition is normal. If you suspect that the devi ce or the charger are not working properly, take them to the nea rest authorised service facility. Headset You can connect a compati ble headset or compatible headphones to your device. You may need to select the cable mode. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 18
Warning: When you use the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. Do not connect products that crea te an output sig nal as this may cause damage to the device. Do not connect any voltage source to the Nokia AV Connector. When connecting any external device or any headset, other than those approved by Nokia for use with this device, to the Nokia AV Connect or, pay special attention to volu me levels. Attach wris t strap 1 Open the back cover. 2 Thread a wrist strap, and tighten i t. 3 Close the back cover. Touch screen actions Use the to uch screen with your finger or with a stylu s (if available). Important: Use only a stylus approved by Nokia for use with this device. Using any othe r stylus may invalidate any warranty applying to the device a nd may damage the touch screen. Avoid scratching the t ouch screen. Never use an actual pen or pencil or other sharp objects to write on the touch screen. Tap and double-tap To open an application or othe r element on the touch screen, you normally tap it with your finger. However, to open the following items, you must tap them twice. ⢠List items in an application, s uch as the Drafts folder in the Messaging applicati on. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 19
⢠Files in a file list, for ex am ple, an image in the Captured folder in the Photos application. Tip: When you open a list view, the first item is already highlighted. To open the hi ghlighted item, tap it once. If you tap a file or similar it em once, it is not opened, it becomes highlighted. To see th e options available for the item, select Options or, if available, select an icon from a toolbar. Select In this user documentation, to open ap plications or items by tappi ng them once or t w ice, you "select" them. Example: To select Options > Help , tap Options , and then tap Help . Drag To drag, plac e your finger on the screen, and slide it across the screen. Example: To scroll up or down on a web page, drag the page with your finger. Swipe To swipe, slide your f inger quic kly left or right on the screen. Flick To flick, place your finger on th e screen, slide it quickly across the screen, then quickly lift yo ur fing er. The conten t of the screen will continue scrolling with the speed and direction it had at the moment of release. To select an item from a scrolling list and to stop th e movement, tap the item. In your device, flicking is available in Music player. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 20
Scroll To scroll up or down in lists th at have a scroll bar, drag the slider of the scroll bar. In some list views, you can place your finger on a list item and drag up or down. Tip: To view a brief description of an icon, place your finger on the icon. Descriptions are not available for all icons. Touch screen backlight To turn the screen backlight on , unlock the screen and keys, if necessary, and press the menu key. Write text You can enter text in differe nt modes. The full keyboard works as a traditional keyboard, and the on-screen alphanumeric keypad mod e allow you to t ap characters. T he handwriting recognition modes allow you to write characters directly on the screen. To activate text input mode, tap any text input field. In the text inp ut view, to sw itch between the available text input modes, tap , and select the desired input mode. The input methods a nd languages supported by the handwriting recognition vary by region. Keyboard input Keyboard Your device has a full keyboard. To open the keyboard, push the touch screen up. In all a pplications, the screen rotates é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 21
automatically from portrait to landscape when you open the keyboard. 1S h i f t k e y . To change between u ppercase and lowercase modes, press the shift key twice. To enter a single uppercase letter in lowercase mode, or a single lowercase letter in uppercas e mode, press the shift key once, and then the desired alphabet key. 2S p a c e k e y 3S y m k e y . To insert special characters not shown on the keyboard, press the sym key once, and select the desired character from the table. 4 Function key . To insert special characters printed at the top of keys, press the function key once, and then press the desired key. To enter several special characters in a row, press the function key twice quickly. To r eturn to normal mode, press the function key once. 5 Backspace key . To erase a char acter, press the backspace key. To erase several characters, press and hold the backspace key. Insert letters not shown on the key board It is possible to inse rt variations of letters, for example, letters with accents. To insert á, press and hold the sym key, and simultaneously press the A key repeatedly , until the desired character is displayed. The or der and availability of letters depends on the selected w riting langua ge. Touch input Handwriting The input methods a nd languages supported by the handwriting recognition vary by region and may not be available for all languages. To activate handwriting mode, select > Handw riting . Write legible, upright characters on the text input area, and leave a space between each character. To teach the devi ce your handwrit ing style, select > Handwriting training . To enter letters and numbers (default mode), write words as you would normally. To select number mode, select . To enter non-Lati n characters, s elect the correspondi ng icon, if available. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 22
To enter special characters, writ e them as you would normally, or select and the desired character. To delete characters or mo ve the cursor back, swipe backwards (see Figure 1). To insert a space, swipe forwards (see Figure 2). Touch input sett ings Select Menu > Se ttings and Phone > Touch input . To configure text inpu t settings for the touch screen, select from the following: Handwriting training â Open the ha ndwriting trainin g application. Train the device to recognise your handwriting better. This option is not available in all languages. Writing language â Define which language-speci fic characters in your handwriting a re recognised and how you r on-screen keyboard is laid out. Writing speed â Adjust the spee d at which handwriting is recognised. Guiding line â Show or hide the guiding line in the writing area. The guiding line helps you write in a straight line, and it also helps the device recogn ise your writing. This option may not be available in all languages. Pen trail w idth â Change the thi ckness of the text. Writing colour â Change the colour of the text. Virtual keypad With the virtual keypad ( Alphanumeric keypad ), you can enter characters like you would with a traditional phy sical keypad with numbers on the keys. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 23
1 Close - Closes the virtual keypad ( Alphanumeric keypad ). 2 Input menu - Opens th e touch input m enu, which includes commands such as Activate predictive t ext and Writing language . 3 Text input indicator - Opens a pop-up window, in which you can activate or deactivate predictive text input modes, change the character case, and switch between letter and number modes. 4 Input mode - Opens a pop-up window, in which you can select the input mode. When you tap an item, the current input method view closes, and the selected one opens. The availability of input modes ma y vary depending on whether the automatic input mode (sensor settings) is activated or not. 5 Arrow keys - Scroll left or right. 6 Backspace 7 Numbers 8 Star - Opens a speci al characters table. 9 Shift - Changes the character cas e, activates or deactivates predictive text in put modes, and switches between letter and number modes. Lock the keys and touch screen To lock or unlock the touch screen and the keys, s lide the lock switch on the side of the device. When the touch screen and keys are locked, the touch screen is switched off and the keys are inactive. To change settings for auto matic screen and key locking, select Menu > Sett ings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Auto. keyguard . Nokia Switch Transfer co ntent You can use the Switch application to copy content such as phone numbers, addresses, cale ndar items, and images from your previous Nokia device to your device. The type of cont ent that can be transferred depends on the model of the device from which you wan t to transfer content. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 24
If that device supports synchronisation , you can also synchronise data between the devices. Your device notifies you if the other device is not compatible. If the other device cannot be sw itched on without a SIM card, you can in sert you r SIM car d in it . When your device is switched on without a SIM card, the Offline profile is automatically activated, and tr ansfer can be done. Transfer content for the first time 1 To retrieve data from the other device for the first time, on your device, select Menu > Settings > Connectivity > Data transfer > Phone switch . 2 Select the connection type you want to use to tran sfer the data. Both devices must sup port the selected connection type. 3 If you select Bluetooth con nectivity as the connection type, connect the two devices. To have your dev ice search for devices with Bluetooth connectivity, select Continue . Select the device from which you want to transfer content. You are as ked to enter a code on your device. Enter a code (1- 16 digits), and select OK . Enter the same code on the other device, and select OK . The devices are now paired. Some earlier Nokia devices may not have the Sw itch application. In this case, the Switch application is sent to the other device as a message. To ins tall the Switch application on the other de vice, open the message, and follow the instructions on the display. 4 On your device, select the content you want to transfer from the other device. When the transfe r has started, you can cancel it and continue later. Content is transferred from th e memory of the other device to the corresponding location in your device. The tra nsfer time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. Synchronise, retrieve, or send content Select Menu > Settin gs > Connectivity > Data transfer > Phone swit ch . After the first transfer, select from the following to start a new transfer, depending on the model: to synchronise content between your device and the other device, if the other device supports synchronisation. The synchronisation is two-way. If an item is deleted in one device, it i s deleted in both. You cannot restore deleted items with synchronisation. to retrieve content from the other devi ce to your device. With retrieval, content is transferred from the other device to your device. You may be asked to keep or delete the origin al content in the other device, depending on the device model. to send content from your device to your other device If you cannot send an item, depending on the type of the other device, you can add the item to the Nokia folder, to C: \Nokia or E:\Nokia in your device. When you select the folder to transfer, the items are sync hronised in the corr esponding folder in the other device, and vice versa. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 25
Use shortcuts to repeat a transfer After a data transfer, you can save a shortcut with the trans fer settings to the main view to repeat th e same transfer later. To edit the shortcut, s elect Optio ns > Shortcut settings . For example, you can create or chan ge the name of the shortcut. A transfer log is shown after ev ery transfer. To view the log of the last transfer, select a shortcut in the main view and Options > View log . Handle transfer conflicts If an item to be transferred ha s been edited in both devices, the device attempts to merg e the changes automatically . If this is not possible, there is a transfer conflict. Select Check one by one , P riority to this phone , or Pri ority to other phone to solve the conflict. Profiles Select Menu > S ettings and Profiles . You can use profiles to set an d customise the ringing tones, message alert tones, and othe r tones for different events, environments, or caller groups . The name of the selected profile is displayed at the top of the home screen. To change a profile, scroll to the profile, and select Options > Acti vate . To personalise a profile, scroll to the profile, and select Options > Personal ise . Select the setting y ou want to change. To set the profile to be active until a certain time within the next 24 hours, scroll t o the profile, select Options > Timed , and set the time. When the time expires, the profile changes back to the previously active non-timed profile. When the profile is timed, is displayed in the home screen. The Offline profile cannot be timed. To create a new profile, select Op tions > Create new . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 26
Your device Home screen About the ho me screen In the home screen, you can qui ckly access your most frequently used applications, control applications, such as the music player, view your favo urite contacts, and view at a glance if you have mis sed calls or new messages. Interactive home scre en elements To open the clock applic ation, tap the clock (1). To open calendar or change pr ofiles in the home screen, tap the date or the p rofile name (2). To view or change connectivity s ettings ( ), to see the available wireless LANs if WLAN scanning is enabled, or to view the missed events, tap the top right corner (3) . To make a phone call, select (4). To open the main menu, press the m enu key (5). To hide and show content, sw ipe the home screen with your finger. Add items to t he home screen To add an item to the home screen, select Options > Ed it content > Options > Add content , and select the item from the list. Using widgets may involve the tr ansmission of large amounts of data (network service). To move an item, select Options > Edit content , select the desired item, and drag and dr op it to a new location. Remove an item from the home screen Select Options > Edit content and the item to be removed. Select Options > Remove > Done . E-mail notificatio ns About e-m ail notifi cations E-mail notifications in the home screen help you keep track of e-mail messages in your mailbox. You can set the device to show a preview of e-mail headers or just the number of unread e-mail. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 27
Work with e-ma il in the home scr een Set up your e-mail account in the home screen Select Set up e-mail , and follow the instructions. When the set-up is complete, the e-ma il icon appears in the home screen. To open your e-mail mailbox, select the icon. To define how you want t o be notified of new e-mail messages in the home screen, select Menu > Setti ngs and Personal > Home screen > E-mail widget , and from the following: Mailbox â Select from which mailbox you want to see notifications. Show message details â To see only the number of unread messages in the home screen, select Off . To see also the sender and subject of the message, select On . The available options may vary. Music player in the home screen You can use the music player from the home s creen. To activate the music player con trols, select Opti ons > Edit content > Options > Add content > Music player . Go to Music appears in the home screen. To open the music player, tap Go to Music , and select the items you want to listen to. The music player control keys, and, if available, the title of the song, artist, and album art are displayed when a song is played. Favour ite contac ts in the hom e screen You can add several cont acts dire ctly to th e home screen, an d quickly make calls or send messages to the cont acts, view the contacts' web feeds, or access the contact information and settings. 1 To add your favourite contacts to the home screen, select Option s > Edit content > Options > Add content > Favourite contacts . A row of icons is displayed in the home screen. 2 Select any of the icons ( ) and a contact from Con tacts. Add your favourite Share online feed to your home screen By adding the Share online widget to your home screen, you can quickly access your favourite Share online feed. 1 In the home screen, select Options > Edit cont ent > Option s > Add content > Share online . 2 Select the feed you want to add. You may need to register to a service of your service provider before you are able to add a feed. The widget displays thumbnail images from a selected feed of any of your Share online ac counts. The latest images are displayed first. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 28
Display indicators General indicators The touch screen and keys are locked. The device alerts silent ly for incoming calls or messages. You have set a clock ala rm. You are using a timed profile. Call indicators Someone has tried to call you. You are using your second phone line (network service). You have set your device to divert incoming calls to another number (network service). If you have two phone lines, a number indicates the active line. Your device is ready for an internet call. You have an ongoing dat a call (network service). Messaging indicators You have unread messages. If the indicator is blinking, the SIM card memory for messages may be full. You have received new mail. You have messages waiting to be sent i n the Outbox folder. Network indicators Your device is connected to a GSM n etwork (network service). Your device is connected to a 3G n etwork (network service). You have a GPRS pack et data connection (network service). indicates that the connection is on hold and that a connecti on is being established. You have an EGPRS packet data connection (network service). indicates that the connection is on hold and that a connecti on is being established. You have a 3G packet da ta connection (network service). indicates that the connection is suspended and that a connection is being established. You have a high-speed downli nk packet access (HSDPA) connection (network service). indicates that the connec tion is suspended and that a connection is being established. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 29
A WLAN connection is available (network service). indicates that the connection is encrypted and that the connection is not encrypted. Connectivity indicators Bluetooth is active. indicates that your device is sending data. If the indicator is blinking, your device is tryi ng to connect to another device. You have connected a USB cable to your device. GPS is active. The device is synchronising. The FM transmitter is active, but it is not transmitting. indicates th at the FM transmitter is tra nsmitting. You have connected a compatible headset to the device. You have connected a co mpatible TV-out cable to the device. You have connected a compatible text phone to the device. Shortcuts To switch between open appl ications, press and hold the menu key. Leaving applications running in the background increases t he demand on battery power an d reduces the battery life. To open the browser application , in the dialler, tap and hold 0 . To change the profi le, press the power key, and select a profile. To call your voice mailbox (net work service), in the dialler, tap and hold 1 . To open a list of last dialle d numbers, in the home screen, press the call key. To use voice commands, in the home screen, press and hold the call key. When writing, to change the writing language, press and the sym key. Search About Search Select Menu > Applications > Search . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 30
Search (network service) enable s you to use various internet- based search se rvices to find , for example, websites and images. The content and availabili ty of the services may vary . Start a search Select Menu > Applications > Search . To search the contents of your mobile device, en ter search terms in the search field, or browse the content categories. While you enter the search terms, the results are organised into categories. The most recently accessed results appear at the top of the result list, if they match your search terms. To search for web pages on the internet, select Search the Internet and a search provider, and enter your sea rch terms in the search field. The search provider you selected is set as your default internet search provider. If a default search provider is al ready set, select it to s tart a search, or select Search more to use another search provider. To change the defaul t search provider, select Options > Settings > Search services . To change the cou ntry or region setting to find more search providers, selec t Options > Settings > Country or region . Search settings Select Menu > Applications > Search . To change the Sea rch application settin gs, select Optio ns > Settings and from the following: Country or region â Select the country or region you want to search from. Connection â Select the access point, and allow or deny network connections. Search services â Select whether service providers and search categories are shown. General â Enable or disable tooltips, and clear the search history. Volume and loudspeaker contro l To adjust the volume level wh en you have an active call or are listening to a sound clip, us e the volume key. The built-in loudspeaker allows you to speak and listen from a short distan ce without ha ving to hold the device to your ear. To use the loudsp eaker during a call, select Loudspeaker . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 31
To turn off the lo udspeaker, select Activate handset . Offline pr ofile The offline profile lets yo u use the device without connecting to the wireless cellular networ k. When the offline prof ile is active, you can use your device without a SIM card. Activate t he offline profi le Press the power key briefly, and select Offline . When you activate the offline profile, the connection to the cellular network is closed. All radio frequency signals to and from the device to the cellular network are prevented. If you try to send messages using the cellular network, they are placed in the Outbox folder to be sent later. Important: In the Offline profile you cannot make or receive any calls, or use other features that require cellular network coverage. Calls may still be poss ible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To make calls, you must first activat e the phone function by chan ging profiles. If the device has been locked, enter the lock code. When you have activated the offline profile, you can still use a wireless LAN, for example, to read your e-mail or browse on the intern et. You can also use Bluetooth connectivity while in the offline profile. Remember to comply with any applicable safety requirements when establishing and using wireless LAN or Bluetooth connections. Fast downloading High-speed downlink packet a ccess (HSDPA, also called 3.5G, indicated by ) is a network service in UMTS networks and provides high-speed data do wnloads. When HSDPA support in the device is activated and the device is connected to a UMTS network that suppo rts HSDPA, downloading data such as messages, e-mail, a nd browser pages th rough the cellular network may be faster. An active HSD PA connection is indicated by . You can activate or deactiv ate support for HSDPA in packet data setting s. For availability and subscription to da ta connection services, contact your service provider. HSDPA only affects the dow nload speed; sending data to t he network, such as messages an d e-mail, is not affected. Ovi (network service) Visit Ovi by Nokia With Ovi by Nokia, you can find new places and services, and stay in touch with y our friends. You can do, for example, the following: ⢠Create a mail account ⢠Plan trips and view locations on a map ⢠Download games, applicat ions, videos, and ringing tones to your device ⢠Purchase music é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 32
Some downloadable items are free of charge, others you may need to pay for. The available services may vary by country or region, and not all languages are supported. To access Nokia's Ovi services , go to www.ovi.com , and register your own Nokia account. For more information, go to www.ovi.com/support. Ovi store About Ovi S tore In Ovi Store, you can download mobile ga mes, applications, videos, im ages, themes, and ringing tones to your device. Some items are free of charge; others you need to pay for with your credit ca rd or in your phone bill. The availability of payment methods depends on your country of residence and your network service provider. Ovi Store offers content that is compatible with your mobile device and relevant to your ta stes and location. Create a Nokia account When you create a Nokia Account, you can access Ovi and all its services with a si ngle user name and password. 1 Select Create a Nokia account . 2 Enter a user name. 3 Select your country from the list . 4 Enter your date of birth. 5 Enter your e-mail address or phone number. 6 Enter a pass word, and confir m it. 7 Enter the characters displa yed in the box on the right. 8 Select Submit . Sign in to Ovi Store Sign in Select Sign in , and enter your Nokia account user name and password. Retrieve forgotten us er name or password Select Options > Retriev e . Search Ovi Store Items in Ovi Store are or ganised into categories. You can browse the categories, or search with a key word. You can also select the type of items you want to see: free or most popular items, or items recommended for you. View details of an item Select an item to see detail ed information and other users' reviews. If you have signed in to Ovi Store, you can also write your own reviews. Read more reviews from others Select More reviews . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 33
Write a review Select the link to write a revi ew, enter your review, and assign a rating to fro m 1 to 3 stars. View information abo ut the publisher Select the publisher profile link. Find related it ems Select More related . Purchase content 1 Select the item you want to purchase. 2 Select Buy . 3 Enter your Nokia accoun t user name and password. I f you do not ha ve an account , select Create a Nokia accoun t , and enter the required information. 4 Select to pay using your credit card or through your phone bill. If you already have your credit card information stored in your Nokia account, and you want to use another credit card, select Edit payment settings , and enter the required information. To save your credit card information to your Nokia account, select the Save this card to my Nokia account check box. 5 Select the e-mail address to which you wa nt to receive a receipt of your purchase. 6 Select Purchase . Share favourites w ith friends Ovi Store enables you to sen d a text message containi ng a link to items in Ovi Store. 1 Select the item you want to share. 2 Select Send to friend . 3 Enter a phone number in the international format. 4 Select Send . Report inappropri ate content Contact Nokia if you find inapp ropriate content in Ovi St ore. 1 Select the item with inappropriate content. 2 Select Report issue . 3 Select the reason from th e list, and enter additional details, if needed. 4 Select Submit . Edit the Ovi Store settings In the Ovi Store settings, you can change your account information, grant your frie nds permission to see your activities in Ovi Store, an d change your passwo rd and security question. To change the Ovi Store settings , select Optio ns > Settings and from the following: Ovi sharing â Allow you r Ovi contacts to see you r activities in Ovi Store. Account information â Change the details of your Nokia account. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 34
Change password â Change your Nokia account pa ssword. Change security question â Chan ge the security question with which you can retrieve your user name and password. Installation preferences â Sele ct how you want to install content in your device. Make calls Touch screen during calls Your device has a proximity sensor. To extend battery life and prevent accidental selections, the touch screen is disabled automatically during calls, when you place the device next to your ear. Do not cover the proximity sensor, for example, with protective film or tape. Make a voice call 1 In the home screen, select to open the dialler, and enter the phone number, in cluding the area code. To remove a number, select C . For international calls, se lect * twice for the character (which replaces the interna tional access code), and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. 2 To make the call, press the call key. 3 To end the call (or to cancel the call attempt), press the end key. Pressing the end key always en ds a call, even if another application is active. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 35
Call a contact 1 Select Menu > Co ntacts . 2 Go to the desired name. Or, enter the firs t letters or characters of the name in the sea rch field, and go to the name. 3 To call the contact, press the ca ll key. If you have saved several numbers for a contact, select the desired numbe r from the list, and p ress the call key. End a call Press the end key. During a call To mute or unmute the microphone , select or . To put the call on hold or unhold it, select or . To activate the loudspeaker, select . If you have attach ed a compatible heads et with Blue tooth connectivity, to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Activate BT handsfree . To switch back to the hands et, select . To end the call, select . To switch between the acti ve and held calls, select . Tip: Whe n you have only one active voice call, to put the call on hold, press the call key. To unhold the call, press the call key again. 1 To send DTMF to ne strings (for example, a password) , select Options > Send DTMF . 2 Enter the DTMF string, or search for it in the contacts list . 3 To enter a wait ch aracter (w) or a pa use character (p), press * repeatedly. 4 To send the to ne, select OK . You can add DTMF tone s to the phone number or DTMF field in contact details. To end an active call and repla c e it by answering the waiting call, select Options > Replace . To end all your calls, select Options > End all calls . Many of the options that you can use during a voice call are network services. Voice and video mailboxe s To call your voice or video ma ilbox (network services, video mailbox available only in UMTS networks), in the home screen, select to open the dialler, tap and hold 1 , and select Voice mailbox or Video mailbox . 1 To change the phone number of your voice or video mailbox, select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call mailbox , a mailbox, and Options > Change number . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 36
2 Enter the number (ob tained from your network ser vice provider), and select OK . Answer or reject a call To answer a call, press the ca ll key. To answer the call when the to uch screen is locked , swipe Swipe to answer from left to right. To unlock the touch screen without an swering a call, swipe Swipe to unlock from right to left, an d then answer or reject the call, or send a reject ca ll text message. The ringin g tone is muted auto matically. If you do not want to answer a ca ll, to reject the call, p ress the end key. If the call divert feature (network service) is activated, reje cting an incomi ng call also diverts the call. To mute the ringing tone of an incoming call, select Si lence . To send a reject call text mess age without actually rejecting the call, informing the caller th at you cannot answer the call, select Silence and Send m sg. , edit th e message text, and press the call key. To activate the reject call text message feature, and to write a standard messa ge, select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call > Reject call with message , and Message text . Make a conference call Your device sup ports confer ence calls between a maximum of six participants, including yourself. 1 Make a call to the first participant. 2 To make a call to another participant, select Options > New call . The first call is put on hold. 3 When the new call is answered, t o join the first participant in the conf erence call, select . To add a new person to the call, make a call to another participant, and add the new ca ll to the conference call. To have a private conversation with one of the participants, select . Go to the participant, and select . The conference call is put on hold on your devi ce. The other participants can still continue the conference call. To return to the conference call, select . To drop a participant, select , go to the participant, and select . 4 To end the active conferen ce call, press the end key. Speed dial a phon e number To activate the feature, se lect Menu > Settings and Calling > Call > Speed dialling . 1 To assign a phone number to one of the number keys, select Menu > Settin gs and Calling > Spee d dialling . 2 Scroll to the key to which you want to assign the phone number, and select Options > Assign . 1 and 2 are reserved for th e voice and video mailboxes. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 37
To call in the home screen, select to open the dialler, select the assigned key number, and press the call key. To call in the home screen when speed dialling is active, select to open the dialler, and tap and hold the assign ed key number. Call waiting You can an swer a call wh en you have anot her call in progr ess. To activate call waiting (n etwork service), select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call > Call waiting . 1 To answer the waitin g call, press the call key. The first call is put on hold. 2 To switch between th e two calls, select Options > Swap . 3 To connect a call on hold wi th an active ca ll, and to disconnect yourself from the calls, select Options > Transfer . 4 To end the active call, press the end key. 5 To end both calls, select Options > End all calls . Voice dialling Your device automatically creates a voice tag for contacts. Listen to a voice tag for a contact 1 Select a contact and Options > Voice tag details . 2 Go to a contact detail, and select Options > Play voice tag . Make a call with a voice tag Note: Us ing vo ice tag s may be diffic ult in a noi sy environment or during an emer gency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialli ng in all circumstances. When you use voice dialling, th e loudspeaker is in use. Hold the device at a shor t distance awa y when you say the voice tag. 1 To start voice dialling, in th e home screen, press and hold the call key. If a compatible headset with the headset key is attached, press and hold the headse t key to start voice dialling. 2 A short tone sounds, and Sp eak now is displayed. Say clearly the name that is saved for the contact. 3 The device plays a synthesised voice ta g for the recognised contact in the selected device language , and displays the name and numb er. To cancel the voice dialling, select Quit . If several numbers are saved fo r a name, you can say also t he name and the number type, su ch as mobile or telephone. Make a video call When you make a video call (network service), you can see a real-time, two-way video betwe en you and the recipient of the call. The live video image, or video image captured by the camera in your device is shown to the video call recipient. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 38
To be able to make a video call, you must have a USIM card and be in the coverage of a UM TS network. For availability, pricing and subscription to video call services, contact your network service provider. A video call can only be made b etween two parties. The video call can be made to a compatible mobile device or an ISDN client. Video calls cannot be ma de while another voice, video, or data call is active. Icons You are not receiving video (the recipient is not sending video or the network is not transmittin g it). You have denied video sending from your device. To send a still image instead, select Menu > Se ttings and Calling > Call > Image in vid eo call . Even if you denied video sending during a video call, the call is still charged as a video call. Check the pricing with your service provider. 1 In the hom e screen, select to open the dialler, and enter the phone number. 2 Select Options > Call > Video call . The secondary camera on the fro nt is used by default for video calls. Starting a vi deo call may take a while. If the call is not successful (for example, video calls are not supported by the network, or the receiving device is not compatible), you are asked if you want to tr y a normal call or send a message instead. The video call is active when you see two video images, and hear the so und through th e loudspeaker. The call recipient may deny video sending (indicated by ), and you only hear the voice of the caller and may see a still image or a grey screen. 3 To end the video call, press the end key. During a video call To change between showing video or hearing the voice of the caller only, select or . To mute or unmute the microphone , select or . To activate the loudspeaker, select . If you have attached a compatible headset with Bluetooth connectivity, to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Activate BT handsfree . To switch back to the handset, select . To use the camera in the back of your device to send video, select Option s > Use secondary camera . To switch back to the camera in the front of your device, select Options > Use main camera . To take a snapshot of the video you are sending, select Options > Send snapshot . Video sending is paused and the snapshot is show n to the reci pient. The sna pshot is not save d. To zoom your image in or out, select Optio ns > Zoom . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 39
To change the video quality, select Options > Adjust > Video preferen ce > Normal quality , Clearer detail or Smoother motion . Answer or reject a video call When a video call arr ives, is displayed. 1 To answer the video call, press the call key. 2 To start sending live video image, select Yes . If you do not activate the video call, you only hear the voice of the caller. A grey screen replaces the video image. To replace the grey screen with a still image captured by the camera in your device, select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call > Image in video cal l . Internet calls About interne t calls With the internet call network s ervice, you can make and receive calls over the internet . Internet call services may support calls between computer s, between mobile phones, and between a VoIP device and a traditiona l telephone. For availability and cost s, contac t your internet call service provider. To make or receive an internet call, you must be in the service area of a wireless LAN (WLAN) or have a packet data (GPRS) connection in a UMTS network, and be connected to an internet call service. Your device may offer you an in stallation widget, to install internet call services. Log into an internet call service When an internet call service ha s been installed, a tab for the service is displayed in the contacts list. To log into a service, select Menu > Contacts , the service, and Options > Log in . To add contacts as service contacts to the friends list manually or from the contac ts list, select Optio ns > New contact . Make internet calls To call a contact when you are logged into a service, tap the contact in the friends list, and select . T o m a k e a n i n t er n e t c a ll i n the home screen, select , enter the number, and select Options > Call > Interne t call . To make an internet call to an internet call address, in the home screen, selec t and Optio ns > Open ke yboard . Enter the address, and select . Internet communication settings Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > Admin. settings > Net settings . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 40
To view and edit the settings fo r a service, select the service name. To remove a service from your service list, select Options > Delete service . Internet c all service se ttings Select Menu > Contacts , open a service tab, and select Options > Sett ings . To set an internet call service as the default service, select Default service . When you press the call key to call a number, your device makes an internet call using the default service if the service is connected. Yo u can set only one service at a time as the default service. To edit the service destination, select Servi ce connectivity . Video sharing Use video sharing (net work service) to send live video or a video clip from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. The loudspeaker is active when you activate vide o sharing. If you do not w ant to use the loudspeaker for the voice call while you share video, you can also use a compatible headset. Warning: Continuous exposure to hi gh volume may damage y our hearing. Listen to music at a moderate level, and do n ot hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use. Video sharing requirement s Video sharing requires a UMTS connection. Your ability to use video sharing depends on the availa bility of the UMTS network. For more information on the service, UMTS network availability, and fees as sociated with usin g this service, contact your service provider. To use video sharing, ensure the following: ⢠Your device is set up for person-to-person connections. ⢠You have an act ive UMTS connection and are within U MTS network coverage. If you move out side the UMTS network during a video sharing session, the sharing stops while your voice call continues. ⢠Both the sender and recipien t are registered to the UMTS network. If you inv ite some one to a sharing session and the recipientâÂÂs device is not within UMTS network coverage or does not have video sharing installed or person-to-person connection s set up, the recip ient does not receive invitations. You receive an error message that indicates that the recipient ca nnot accept the invita tion. Settings To set up video sharing , you need person-to-person and UMTS connection settings. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 41
Person-to-pe rson connection set tings A person-to-person connection is also known as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) conn ection. The SIP profile settings must be configured in your device before you can use video sharing. Ask your service provid er for the SIP profile settings , and save them to your device. Your service provider may sen d you the settings or give you a list of the needed parameters. To add a SIP address to a cont act: 1 Select Menu > Co ntacts . 2 Open the contact or crea te a new contact. 3 Select Options > Edit . 4 Select Options > Add detail > Share video . 5 Enter the SIP addr ess in the format username@domainname (you can use an IP address instead of a domain name). If you do not know the SIP address for the contact, you can use the phone number of th e recipient, including the country code, to share video (i f supported by the network service provider). UMTS connection sett ings To set up your UMTS connection: ⢠Contact your service provider to establish an agreement for you to use the UMTS ne twork. ⢠Ensure that the UMT S access p oint connection settings for your device are config ured properly. For more information about the s ettings, contact your se rvice provider. Share live video or vid eo clips During an active voice call, s elect Optio ns > Share video . 1 To share live video during the call, select Live video . To share a video clip, select Video clip. A list of video clips saved in the device memory, the mass memory, or a memory card (if availa ble) op ens. Select the clip you want to share. You may need to convert the video clip into a suitable format to be able to share it. If y our device notifies you that the video clip must be converted, select OK . Your device must have a video editor for the conversion to work. 2 If the recipient has several SIP addres ses or phone numbers including the country code saved in Contacts, select the desired address or number. If the SIP address or phone number of the recipi ent is not available, enter the address or number of the recipient including the country co de, and select OK to send the invitation. Your device sends the invitation to the SIP address. Sharing begins automat ically when the recipient accep ts the invitation . Options during video sharin g or to mute or unmute the microphone or to switch the loudspeaker on and off or to pause and resume video sharin g to switch to full screen mode (available for receiver only) é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 42
3 To end the sharing se ssion, select Stop . To end the voice call, press the end key. Wh en you end the call, video sharing also en ds. To save the liv e video you shared, select Yes when pro mpted. The device notifies you of th e location of the saved video. If you access other applications while you are sharing a video clip, the sharing is paused. To return to the video sharing view and to continue sh aring, in the home screen, select Options > Continue . Accept an invitation When someone sends you a vi deo sharing invitati on, the invitation message displays th e senderâÂÂs name or SIP address. If someone sends you a sharing invitation and you are not within 3G network coverage, you will n ot know that you received an invitation. When you receive an invitation , select from the following: Yes â Accept the invitation, an d activate the sharin g session. No â Reject the invitation. Th e sender receives a message that you rejected the invitat ion. You can also press the e nd key to reject the invitation and end the voice call. To end the sharing session, select Stop . To end the voice call, press the end key. When you en d the call, video sh aring also ends. Log The log stores information ab out the communication history of the device. The device registers missed and received calls only if the network supports these functions, the device is switched on, and within the netw ork service area. Recent calls Select Menu > Applications > Log and Recent calls . To view missed, received, and dialled calls, select Missed calls , Received calls or Dialled numbers . Tip: To open the dialled numbers list in the home screen, press the call key. Tip: To open the dialled numbers list in the home screen, press the call key. On the toolbar, select from the following: Call â Call the desired contact. Create message â Send a message to the desired contact. Open Conta cts â Open the contacts list. Select Options and from the following: Save to Contacts â Save the high lighted phone number from a recent calls list to your contacts. Clear list â Clear the selected recent calls list. Delete â Clear a highlighted ev ent in the selected list. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 43
Settings â S e l e c t Log duration and the length of time that the communication information is saved in the log. If you select No log , no information is saved in the log. Call duration Select Menu > Applications > Log . To view the approximate duration of your last call, dialled and received calls, select Call duration . Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, de pending on network features, rounding off for billing, taxes, and so forth. Packet data Select Menu > Applications > Log . You may be charged for your packet data connection s by the amount of data sent and re ceived. Check the amount of data sent or received during packet data connectio ns Select Packet data > All sent data or All received dat a . Clear both sent and received information Select Packet data > Optio ns > Clear counters . You need the lock code to cl ear the information. Monitor all communication even ts Select Menu > Applications > Log . To open the general log where you can monitor all voice calls, text messages, or data an d wireless LAN connections registered by the device, select the general log tab . Subevents, such as a text message sen t in more than one part and packet data connection s, are logged as one communication event. Connecti ons to your mailbox, multimedia messaging centre , or web pages are shown as packet data connections. To view how much data was trans ferred and how long a certain packet data connection lasted, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event indicated by GPRS , and select O ptions > View . To copy a phone number from the log to the clipboard, and paste it into a text message, for example, select Op tions > Use number > Copy . To filter the log, select Options > Filter and a filter. To set the log duration, select Optio ns > Settings > Log duration . If you select No l og , all the log contents, recent calls register, and messagi ng delivery reports are permanently deleted. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 44
Contacts (pho nebook) To open Contacts, s elect Menu > Contacts . You can save and update conta c t information, such as phone numbers, home addresses, or e-mail addresses of your contacts. You can add a personal ringing ton e or a thumbnail image to a contact. Y ou can also create contact groups, w hich allow you to send text messages or e-ma il to many recipients at the same time. Save and edit names and nu mbers 1 To add a new contact to t he contacts list, tap . 2 Tap a field to enter the inform ation in the field. To close the text input, select . Fill in the fields that you want, and select Done . To edit contacts , select a contact an d Optio ns > Edit . Contacts toolbar On the contacts list toolbar, select from the following: Call â Call the desired contact. Create message â Send a message to the desired contact. New contact â Create a new contact. Manage names and numbe rs Select Menu > Contacts . Delete contacts Select a contact and Options > Delete . To delete several contacts at the same time , select Options > Mark/Unmark to mark the desired contacts, and to delete, select Optio ns > Delete . Copy contacts Select the contact, Options > Copy , and the desired location. Send a contact to another device Tap and hold a c ontact, and s elect Send busine ss card . Add contacts to favourites Tap and hold a c ontact, and s elect Add to favo urites . Listen to the voi ce tag assigned to a contact Select the contact and Options > Voice tag details > Options > Play v oice tag . Before using voice tags, note the following: ⢠Voice tags are not langua ge-dependent. They are dependent on the speaker's voice. ⢠You must say the name exactly a s you said it when you recorded it. ⢠Voice tags are sensitive to background noise. Record voice tags and use them in a quiet environment. ⢠Very short nam es are not acce pted. Us e long names, and avoid similar names for different numbers. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 45
Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emer gency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialli ng in all circumstances. Default numbers and addresses You can assign defa ult numbers or addresse s to a contact. If a contact has se veral numbers or addresse s, you can eas ily call or send a message to a cert ain number or address . The default number is also used in voice dialling. 1 In the contacts list, select a contact. 2 Select Options > Defaults . 3 Select a default to which you want to add a number or an address, and select Assign . 4 Select a number or an address you want to set as a default. 5 To exit the Defaults view and save the chan ges, tap outside the view. Contact cards Select Menu > Contacts and a contact. All available communication methods for the selected cont act are displayed in the contact cards view. Select a contact f rom the li st, the desired communication method, Options , and from the following: Edit â Edit, add, or delete the contact card f ields. Defaults â Define the numbers and addresses to use by default when you communicate with th e contact, if a contact has more th an one num b er or address defined. Voice tag details â View the voice tag details, or listen to the voice tag for the contac t. The available options and comm unication methods may va ry. Set contacts as favourites Select Menu > Contacts . Favourites are the contacts yo u have set as your fav ourite contacts. Thes e contacts ap pear at the top of the con tacts list. To set a contact as a favou rite, select a contact and Options > Add to favourites . Favourites are marked wi th a star icon. To remove a contact from favourites, select a contact and Options > Remove from favourit es . The rem oved contact is moved back to the standard contacts lis t. Ringing tones, images, an d call text f or contacts You can define a ringing tone for a contact or group, and a n image and a call text for a contac t. When the contact calls you, the device plays the selected ringing tone and shows the call text or image (if the callerâÂÂs phone number is sent with the call and your device recognises it). To define a ringing tone for a contact or a contact group, select the contact or contact group an d Options > Edit > Ringing tone , and a rin ging tone. To add more fields to a contact details view, select th e contact and Options > Edit > Options > Add detai l . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 46
To define a call t ext for a cont act, select th e contact and Options > Edi t > Options > Add detail > Call alert tex t . Tap the text field to enter the call text, an d select . To add an image for a contact saved in the device memory, select the contact, Options > Ed it > Add image , and an image from Photos. To remove the ringing tone, select Default to ne from the list of ringing tones. To view, change or remove the imag e from a contact, select the contact, Options > Image , and the desired option. Copy contacts When you open t he contacts list for the first tim e, the device asks if you want to copy names and numbers from th e SIM card to your device. To start copying, select OK . If you do not want to copy the contacts from the SIM card to your device, select Cancel . T h e d e v i c e a s k s i f y o u w a n t t o v i e w the SIM card contacts in the co ntacts directory. To view the contacts, select OK . The contact s list opens, and the names stored on your SIM card are indicated with . SIM services For availability and informati on on using SIM card services, contact your SIM card vendor. This may be the network service provider or other vendor. SIM contacts To set the names and num bers stored on the SIM card t o be shown on the contacts list, select Options > Settings > Contacts to display > SIM memory . You can add and edit SIM contacts, or call them. The numbers you save in the contacts list may not be automatically saved to your SIM card. To save n umbers to the SIM card, select a contact and Options > Copy > SIM memory . To select whether the new contacts you enter are s aved to your device or your SIM card, select Options > Settin gs > Defaul t savi ng memo ry > Phone me mory or SIM memory . Fixed dialling Select Menu > Contacts and Options > SIM n umbers > Fixed dial contacts . With the fixed dialling service, you can restrict calls from your device to certain phone numbers. Not all SIM cards support the fixed dialling service. Fo r more informat ion, contact your service provider. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 47
When security features that restrict calls are in use (such as call barring, closed user group, and fixed dialling), calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Call barrin g and call diverting cannot be active at the same time. You need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivat e fixed dialling or edit your fixed dialling con tacts. Contact your service provider for your PIN2 code. Select Options and from the following: Activate fixed dialling â A ctivate the fixed dialing. Deactivate fixed dialling â Deac tivate the fixed dialing. New SIM contact â Enter the contact name and phone number to which calls are allowed. Add from Contact s â Copy a contact from the list of cont acts to the fixed dialling list. To send text messages to the SIM cont acts while the fixed dialling service is active, you need to add th e text message centre number to the fixed dialling list. Contact groups To open the group list, open the contacts list, and tap . Create contact groups 1 To create a new group, in the group list, select Options > Ne w group . Use the default name or enter a new name. Select OK . 2 To add members to the group, select th e group and Options > Add members . 3 Mark each contact you want to add, and select OK . Manage contact groups To send a message to all group members, to set a ringing tone for a group, or to rename or delete a group, tap and hold the group, and select Create me ssage , Ringing tone , Rename , or Delete . To add a co ntact to a g roup, select the gr oup and Option s > Add members . To check which other groups a contact belongs to, select the group, scroll to the contact, an d select Option s > Belongs to groups . To remove a contact from a group, select the group, scroll to the contac t, and select Options > Remove from group . Ovi Contacts About Ov i Contacts With Ovi Contacts, you can stay connected to your friends and family, follow what they are up to, and discover new friends in the Ovi community. You ca n also back up cont acts from your device to Ovi. Additionally, you can share your location with your friends. To use Ovi Contacts, go to www.ovi.com. Start using Ovi Contact s Select Contacts , and open the Ovi tab . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 48
The Ovi Contacts service is pa rt of Ovi, and uses the same account information. If you are new to Ovi and its services, to st art using the Ovi Contacts application, you must register to Ovi by creating a Nokia account. Create a Nokia account 1 Select Ovi Chat , and when prompted, connect to the internet. 2 Enter the required information. 3 In the My profile view, ente r your profile information. Your first and last na me are mandatory deta ils. 4 Select Done . If you have already registered to Ovi using your PC or mobile device, you can start u sing Ovi Contacts wit h the same account details. Sign in to Ovi Contacts and activate the service Select Ovi Chat , and enter your user name and password. If you have not yet provided yo ur profile information for Ovi Contacts, do so, and se lect Done . Your first and last name are mandatory details. Connect to the service Select Menu > Contacts , and open the Ovi tab. Connect to Ovi Contacts Select Go onli ne and the connection method. Use a wireless LAN (WLAN) connection where available. Cancel the connection Select Options > Cancel connect ing . A packet data connection ma y generate additional data transmission charges. For pricing details, contact your network service provider. Select Go online > Options and from the following: Select â Select the item. Go online â Connect to the service if you are offline. My profile â Edit your profile information. Recommend to friend â Invite a contact to join Ovi Contacts. The invitation is sent as a text messa ge. Settings â Modify the O vi Contacts settings. The available options ma y vary. Create and e dit your profil e Edit your profile informati on Select My profile . View the profiles of your Ovi Cont acts friends Select a friend and Options > Profile . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 49
Your profile information is visibl e to your Ovi Contacts friends. Only the following profile detai ls are displayed to other Ovi Contacts users, for example, du ring a search: first name and last name. To modify your priv acy setting s, access Ovi on yo ur PC, and sign in to your N okia account. Change your profile image Select the profile image, Select existi ng image , and the new image. You can also edit or re move the current profile image or capture a new one. Change your availability By default, your availa bility is set to Available . To change your availability, select the icon. Tell your friends what yo u are doing at the mome nt Select What are you doing? , and enter text in the field. Show your friends what music you are currently listening to Select Now play ing . To do this, you must allow your now playing informat ion to be shared in the presence settings . Edit your contact information Select a field, and ent er text. In the My profile view, select Options and fr om the following: Edit â Cut, copy, or paste text. Change â Change your s tatus (when t he status field is selected). Activate â S tart broadcasting your locat ion or your now playing information to your friends (when either field is selected). Undo changes â Undo the changes you made in the profile view. Edit shared locations â Select the landmarks you want to broadcast to your friends (when the My location field is selected). Stop sharing â Stop broadcasti ng your location to your friends (when the My location field is selected). The available options ma y vary. Find and add friends Select Options > Invite friend . Search for a friend Enter the name of the friend in the Search friends field, an d select the search icon. You ca nnot search for friends based on their mobile number or e-mail address. Browse the search results Select Next results or Previous results . Start a new search Select New search . If the friends you searched for could not be found, t hey are not registered Ovi members, or they have chosen to be invisible in searches. When prompted, s end a text message to your friends to invite them to join Ovi Contacts. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 50
Send an invita tion to join Ovi Cont acts Select Select service: and the service you know your friend uses. Enter you r friendâÂÂs user name, and s elect the send icon. Select Options and from the following: Select â Select an item. Open â Open an item. Invite as friend â Send an invitation to the con tact. Show profile â View the profile of the contact. Renew invitati on â Resend an invitation to join Ovi Contacts to a pending friend. Search â Search for the contact whose name or other related keyword you entered in the Search friends field. Edit tex t â Cut, copy, or paste text. The available options may vary. Chat with your friends Start a chat with a friend Select the friend. Send a chat message Enter the text in the message field, and select the send icon. In the chat view, select Op tions and from the following: Send â Send the message . Send file â Send an image, video clip, audio file, or other file to your chat partner. Send my location â Send your location details to your chat partner (if supported by both devices). Add smiley â Insert a smiley. Profile â View the details of a friend. My profile â Select your presence status or profile image, personalise your message, or change your details. Edit text â Copy o r paste text . End chat â End the active chat. Exit â End all active chats , and close the application. The available options ma y vary. To receive location information from your friend, you must have the Maps app lication. To send and receive location information, both the Maps an d Positioning applications are needed. To receive any files, you or the recipient must accept the file. To cancel sending or receiv ing while the file is being transferred, select Cancel . View the location of your friend Select Show on map . Return to th e Ovi Con tacts ma in view without en ding the chat Select Back . Add, call, or c opy phone numbers from a chat Go to a phone number in a chat, and select Op tions and the appropriate option. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 51
Ovi Sync To sync your device with Ovi, you must ha ve a Nokia account and activate the Ovi Contacts service on your device. Sync your device with Ovi 1 If you sync your device with Ovi for the first ti me, use the Sync wizard to select what content you w ant to sync, and the sync interval. 2 Select Synchronise . If your device is in the Offline profile, connect to the internet when prompted. Select Options and from the following: Start â Sync your device with Ovi. Cancel â Cancel an ongoing sync. Synchronisation settings â Modify your sync settings. The available options may vary. Share your location Open the Contacts application an d the Ovi tab. To share your location, select Options > Settings > Presence > Share my location and from the following: Sharing allowed â Allow your friends to see your location. My shared landmarks â Select the landmarks from where your location is broadcast to your friends. Refresh inte rval â Select how often you broa dcast your current location. Add and sele ct landmar ks: To add a location to the landmarks list, select Share my location > My sha red landmarks > Options > New landmark . To add your current locat ion as a landmark , select Current position . To browse for a location on a map, select Select from map . To add a landmark manually, select Enter manually . To select the locations you wan t to share with your friends, select Share my l ocation > My shared landmarks , and select the landmarks fr om the list. Select Options to edit, mark, and unmark item s on the list. Whenever you are online with the Contacts on Ovi service, and in one of the selected loca tions, your friends can see your location. Ovi Contacts sett ings Select Options > Settings . Select from the following: Account â Access your account details, and define your visibility to others in a search. Presenc e â Show information about your location to your friends, and allow them to s ee when you are making a phone call (call status). é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 52
Personalisation â Modify the settings related to th e startup and tones of the Ovi Contacts appl ication, and automatica lly accept friend invitations. Connection â Select th e network conn ection to use, and activate roaming wa rnings. Using a packet data connection may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. For information abou t data transmission charges, contact your network service provider. Exit â End all a ctive chats, and close th e application. Nokia account settings Select Options > Settings > Account . Edit yo ur acc ount de tails Select My account . Define your visibi lity in searches Select My account > Visibility in search . You must be online to change your visibility. Presence settings Select Options > Settings > Presence . Modify pres ence settings Select from the following: Share my location â Allow your friends to see your location. Share now playin g â Allow your friends to see what music you are currently listening to on your mobile device. Share call status â Allow your friends to see your call status. Share your location Select Share my l ocation and from the following: Sharing allowed â Allow your friends to see your location in selected landmarks. My shared landmarks â Select the landmarks from where your location is broadcast to your friends. Refresh interval â Se lect how often you broadcast your current location. Add a location to the landmarks list Select Share my l ocation > My shared landmarks > Options > New landmark . Add your current location as a landmark Select Curre nt position . Browse for a location on a map Select Select f rom map . Add a landmark manually Select Enter man ually . Select locations you want to share with your friends 1 Select Share my location > My shared landmarks . 2 Select the landmarks from the list. 3 Select Options to edit, mark, and unmark items on the list. Depending on you r settings, your friends ca n see é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 53
your location when you are in one of the selected locations. Personalisation settings Select Options > Settings > Personalisation . Select from the following: Login on start-up â Sign in automatically to Ovi Contacts when you switch on your mobile device. Auto-accept frien d invit. â Ac cept friend requests automatically with out notification. Message tone â Select a tone for new messages. Friend online tone â Select the tone that sounds when a friend comes online. Icon on Home scre en â Add the Ovi Contacts shortcut icon to your device home screen. Connection settings Select Options > Settings > Connection . Modify connec tion settings Select Network connection and the desired connection. To use the default connection defined in your device connection settings, select Default connection . Set the de vice to notify y ou when your home ne twork is not available To receive a warning when your device is trying to connect to another network, se lect Roaming warning > On . Messaging Messaging main view Select Menu > Messaging (network service). To create a new message, select New message . Tip: To avoid rewriting messages that you send often, use texts in the Templates folder in My folders. You can also create and save your own templates. Messaging contains the following folders: Inbox â Received messages, except e-mail and c ell broadcast messages, are stored here. My folders â Organise your messages into folders. Mailbox â Connect to your remote mailbox to retrieve your new e-mail messages, or vi ew your previously retrieved e-mail messages offline. Drafts â Draft messages that hav e not been sent are stored he re. Sent â The last message s that have be en sent, excludin g messages sent usi ng Bluetooth connectivity, are stored here. You can change th e number of messages to save in this folder. Outbox â Messages waiting to be sent are temporarily stored in the outbox, for ex ample, when your device is outside network coverage. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 54
Del ivery reports â Y ou can request the network to send you a delivery report of the text mess ages and multimedia messages you have sent (net work service). Write and send messages Select Menu > Messaging . Important: Exercise caution wh en opening messages. Messages may contain maliciou s software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Before you can create a multim edia message or write a mail, you must have the correct co nnection settings defined. The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exceeds th is limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. Only devices that have compat ible features can receive and display multimedia m essages. The ap pearance of a message may vary depending on the receivi ng device. Check the size limit of mail messages w ith your service provider. If you attempt to send a mail message that exceeds the size limit of the mail serv er, the message is left in the Outbox folder, and the device attempt s to resend it periodically. Sending a mail requires a data connection, and continuous attempts t o resend the mail ma y incur charges from your service provider. In the Outbox folder, you can delete such a message or move it to the Drafts folder. Messag ing r equires netwo rk ser vices. Send a text or multimedia mess age Select New message . Send an audio or mail message Select Options > Create message , and the relevant option. Select recipients or groups from the contacts list Select from the toolbar. Enter the number o r mail address manually Tap the To fi eld. Enter the subject o f the mail or m ultimedia me ssage Enter it in the Subject field, . If the Subject field is not visible, select Option s > Message head er fields to change the fields that are visible. Write the me ssage Tap the message field. Add an object to a message or mail Select and the relevant type of content. The message type may change to mu ltimedia messa ge based on the inserted content. Send the mess age or mail Select , or press the call key. Your device supports text messag es beyond the limit for a single message. Longer messag es are sent as two or more messages. Your service provid er may charge accordingly. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 55
Characters with accents, ot her marks, or some language options take more space, and limit th e number of characters that can be sent in a single message. Messaging inbox Receive messa ges Select Menu > Messaging and Inbox . In the Inbox folder, indicates an unread text message, an unread mu ltimedia message, an unread audio message, a nd data received through Bluetooth connectivity. When you receive a message, and 1 new me ssage are displayed in the home screen . To open the message, select Show . To open a message in the Inbo x folder, select the message. To re ply to a received me ssage, select Op tions > Reply . Multimedia mess ages Important: Exercise caution wh en opening messages. Messages may contain maliciou s software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. You may receive a notification tha t a multimedia message is waiting in the multimedia message centre. To start a packet data connection to retrieve th e messa ge to your device, select Options > Retrieve . When you open a multimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a mes sage. is shown if sound is included, or if video is included. To play the sound or the video, select the indicator. To see the media objects that have been included in the multimedia message, select Option s > Objects . If the message includes a multimedia presentation, is displayed. To play the presen tation, select the indicator. Data, settings, and web service message s Your device can r eceive many kinds of messa ges that contain data, such as busines s cards, ringing tones , operator logos, calendar entries, and e-mail noti fications. Yo u may also receive settings from your serv ice provider in a configuration message. To save the data from the messag e, select Options and th e corresponding option. Web service messages are notifications (fo r example, news headlines) and may con tain a text mess age or a link. For availability and subscript ion, contact your service provider. Mailbox Define e-m ail settin gs Select Menu > Messaging and Mailbox . To use e-mail, you must have defined a valid internet access point (IAP) in the device an d have defined your e-mail settings corr ectly. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 56
You must have a separat e e-mail account. Follow the instructions given by your remote mailbox and internet service provider (ISP). If you select Messag ing > Mailbox and have not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. To start creating the e-mail settings with the mailbox guide, select Start . When you create a new mailbox, the n ame you give to the mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailbox es. Open the mai lbox Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. When you open the ma ilbox, the device asks if you want to connect to the mailbox. Connect to your mailbox and re trieve new e-mail headers or messages Select Yes . When you view messages online, you are continuously connected to a remote mail box using a data connection. View previo usly retriev ed e-mail messages offline Select No . Create a new e-mail mess age Select Options > Create message > E-mail . Close the da ta connection to the remote mailbox Select Options > Disconnect . Retrieve e- mail mess ages Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. If you are offline, select Options > Connect to open a connection to the remote ma ilbox. Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Messages may contain ma licious software or othe rwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1 When you have an open connection to a remote mai lbox, select Opti ons > Retrieve e-mai l > New to retrieve all new messages, Selected to retrieve only selected messages, or All to retrieve all messages from the mailbox. To stop retrieving messages, sele ct Cancel . 2 To close the connection an d view the e-mail messages offline, select Options > Disconnect . 3 To open an e-mail message, select the message. If the e- mail message has not been retrieved and you are offline, you are asked if you want to retrieve this message from the mailbox. To view e-mail attachments, open the message, and select the attachment field indicated by . If the attachment has not been retrieved to the device, select Options > Retrieve . To retrieve e-mail messag es automatically , select Options > E-mail settings > Automatic re trieval . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 57
Setting the device to retrieve e-mai l automatically may involve the transmission of la rge amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transmission cha rges. Delete e-m ail messages Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To delete the con tents of an e-mail mess age from the device while still retaining it in the remote mailbox, select Options > Delet e > Phone only . The device mirrors the e-mail headers in the remote mailbox. Although you delete the messag e content, the e-mail header stays in your device. If you want to remove the header as well, you must be co nnected to th e s erver when deleting the message from your device and the remote ma ilbox. It there is no connection to the server , the header is deleted when you make a connection from your device to the remote mailbox again to upda te the status. To delete an e-mail from th e device and the remote mailbox, select Options > Delete > Phone and serv er . To cancel deleting an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted from the device an d server during the next connection ( ), select Options > Restore . Disconnect from the mailbox When you are online, to end the data connection to the remote mailbox, select Opt ions > Disconnect . View messages on a SIM card Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > SIM messages . Before you can view SIM messag es, you must copy them to a folder in your device. 1 Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 2 Select Options > Copy . A list of folders opens. 3 To start copying, select a folder. To view the messages, open the folder. Cell broadcast messages Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > Operator msgs. . Cell broadcast (network service) allows you to receive messages on various topics, su ch as weather or traffic conditions, from your service provider. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, co ntact your service provider. This service may not be available for all regions. Cell broadcast messages cann ot be received in UMTS networks. A packet da ta co nnection may prevent cell broadcast reception. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 58
Service commands Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Service commands . With service comman ds (network service) you can enter and send service requests (also known as USSD commands), such as activation comman ds for netw ork services, to your servi ce provider. This service may not be available for all regions. Messaging settings The settings may be preconfigured in your device, or you may receive them in a messa ge. To enter settings man ually, fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or an asterisk. Some or all message centres or access points may be preset for your device by your service provide r, and you m ay not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Text message settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Text message . Select from the following: Message centres â View a list of all text message centres that have been defined. Message centre in use â Select which message centre to use to deliver text messages. Character encoding â To use character conversion to another encoding system when available, select Reduced support . Receive report â Select whether the network sends delivery reports on your me ssages (network service). Message validi ty â Select how long the message centre resends your message if the first at tempt fails (network service). If the m essage cannot be sent within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre. Message sent as â To learn if your message centre is able to convert text messages into t hese other formats, contact your service provider. Preferred connection â Select the connecti on to use. Reply via same centre â Select whether you want the reply message to be sent using the sa me text message centre number (network service). Multimedia me ssage setti ngs Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > Settings > Multimedia message . Select from the following: Image size â Define the size of the image in a multimed ia message. MMS creation mod e â If you select Guided , the device informs you if you try to send a message that may n ot be supported by the recipient. If you select Restricted , the device prevents you from sending me ssages that may not be supported. To inclu de content in your m essages without notifications, select Free . Access point in use â Select which access point is used as the preferred connection. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 59
Multimedia retri eval â Select how you want to re ceive messages, if available. To receive messages automatically in your home network, select Auto in home net w. . Outsi de your home network, you receive a notification that there is a message to retrieve in the mult imedia message centre. If you select Always automatic , your de vice automatically makes an active packet da ta connec tion to retrieve the message both in and outside your home network. Select Manual to retrieve multimedia message s from the message ce ntre manually, or Off to prevent receipt of any mu ltimedia messages. Automatic retriev al may not be supported in a ll regions. Allow anonymous msgs. â Reject messages from anonymous senders. Receive adve rts â Receive multimedia message advertisements (n etwork service). Receive reports â Display the st atus of sent messa ges in the log (network service). Deny rep ort sendin g â Prevent your device from sending delivery reports of received messages. Message validity â Select for how long the message centre resends your messa ge if the first attemp t fails (ne twork service). If the message canno t be sent within this time period, the message is delete d from the message centre. The device requires network su pport to indicate that a sent message has be en received or read. Depending on the network and other circumstan ces, this information may not always be reliable. E-mail settings Manage mailboxes Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > Settings > E- mail . To select which mailbox you want to use to send and receive e-mail, select Mailbox in use and a mailbox. To remove a mailbox and its messages from your device, select Mailboxes , tap the mailbox to be removed if it is not already highlight ed, and select Options > Delete . To create a new mailbox, select Mailboxes > Options > New mailbox . The name you give to the new mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Mess aging main view. You can ha ve up to six mailboxes. Select Mailboxes and a mailbo x to change the con nection settings , user sett ings, re tr ieval settings, and automatic retrieval settings. Connection settings Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > Settings > E- mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and Connection settings . To edit the settings for the e-mail you receive, select Incoming e-mail , and f rom the following: User name â Enter your user name given to you by your service provider. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 60
Password â Enter your password. If you leave this field blank, you are prompted for the password when you try to connect to your remote mailbox. Incoming mail server â E n t e r t h e I P a d dr es s o r ho s t n a m e of the mail server that receives your e-mail. Access point in use â Select an internet access point (IAP). Mailbox name â Enter a name for the mailbox. Mailbox type â Defines the e-mail protocol that your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4. This settin g cannot be changed. Security â Select the security op tion used to secure the connection to the remote mailbox. Port â Define a port for the connection. APOP secure login (for POP3 only) â Use with the POP 3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to the remote e-mail server while connecting to the mailbox. To edit the settings for th e e-mail you send, select Outgoing e-mail and from the following: My e-mail address â Enter the e-mail address given to you by your service provider. Outgoing mail se rver â E n te r th e IP a dd r es s o r ho s t n a me of the mail server that send s your e-mail. Yo u may only be able to use the outgoing server of your service provider. For more information, contact your service provider. The settings for user n ame, password, a ccess point, security, and port are similar to the ones in incoming e-mail. User settings Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > Settings > E- mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and User settings . Select from the following: My name â Enter your own name. Your name replaces yo ur e-mail address in the recipien tâÂÂs device if the recipientâÂÂs device supports this function. Send message â Define how e-mail is sent from your device. Select Immediately for the device to connect to the mailbox when you select Send message . If you select During next conn. , e-mail is sent when th e co nnection to the remote mailbox is available. S e n d c o p y t o s e l f â Select whether you want to send a copy of the e-mail to your own mailbox . Include signature â Select whether yo u wa nt to attach a signature to your e-mails. New e-mail alerts â Select whether you want to receive the new e-mail indication s (a tone, a note, and a mail indicator) when new e-mail is received. E-mail deletion â Select whether you want to delete e- mails from phone only, from phon e and server, or to be asked each time separately. Reply-to address â Define an e-mail address to which replies to e-mails sent from the mailbox in question are delivered. Retrieval se ttings Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > Settings > E- mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and Retrieval settings . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 61
Select from the following: E-mail retrie val â Define which parts of the e-mail are retrieved: Headers only , Size limit (POP3), or Msgs. & attachments (POP3). Retrieval amount â Define how many new e-mail messages are retrieved to the mai lbox. IMAP4 folder path ( for IMAP4 only) â Define the folder path for folders to be subscribed. Folder subscriptions (for IMAP4 only) â Subscribe to other folders in the remote mailbox, and retrieve content from those folders. Automatic retri eval settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > E- mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and Auto matic retrieval . Select from the following: E-mail notif ications â To automatically retrieve the headers to your device when you receive new e-mail in your remote mailbox, select Auto -update or Only in home netw. E-mail retrieval â To automa tically retrieve the headers of new e-mail from your remote mailbox at defined times, select Enabled or Only in home netw. Define when and how often the e-mails are retrieved. E-mail notif ications and E-mail retrieval cannot be active at the same time. Setting the device to retrieve e-mai l automatically may involve the transmission of la rge amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transmission charge s. Web service mess age settings Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > Settings > Service message . Select whether you want to re ceive service messages. To set the device to automatically activate the browser and start a network connection to retrieve content when you receive a service message , select Download messages > Automatically . Cell broadcast se ttings Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > Settings > Operator message . Check the available topics and related topic n umbers with your service provider. Select from the following: Reception â Select whether you want to receive cell broadcast messages. Langua ge â Select the langu ages in which you want to receive messages: All , Selected , or Other . Topic detection â Select whether the device automatically searches for new topic numbers, and saves the ne w numbers without a name to the topic list. Other settings Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > Settings > Other . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 62
Select from the following: Save sent messages â Select whether you want to save copies of the text, multimedia, or e-mail messages th at you send to the Sent folder. Number of saved msgs. â Define how many sent messages are saved to the sent folder at a time . When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. Memory in use â Select the memory where you want to save your mess ages. Show messages i n groups â Define whether you want to group the messages in I nbox, Sent, Drafts and My folders . Show e-mai ls in grou ps â Define whether you want to group your e -mail messages. Mail for Exchange With Mail for Exchange, you ca n receive your work e-mail to your devi ce. You can r ead and re ply to your e-mails, view and edit compatible attachments , view calendar information, receive and reply to meeting requests, schedule meetings, and view, add, and ed it contact inform ation. Mail for Exchange Use of the Mail for Exchange is limited to over-the-air synchronisation of PIM info rmation between the Nokia device and the authorised Microsoft Exchange server. Mail for Exchange can be set up only if your company has Microsoft Exchange Server. In additi on, your company's IT administrator must have activa ted Mail for Exchange for your account. Before starting to set up Mail for Exchange, ensure that you have the following: ⢠A corporate e-mail ID ⢠Your office network user na me ⢠Your office network password ⢠Your network domain name (contact your compan y's IT department) ⢠Your Mail for Exchange server name (contact your company's IT department) Depending on your company's Mail for Exchange server configuration, you may need to enter other information in addition to those listed. If you do not know the correct information, c ontact your comp any's IT d epartment . With Mail for Excha nge, the use of th e lock code may be m a n d a t o r y . T h e d e f a u l t l o c k c o d e o f y o u r d e v i c e i s 1 2 3 4 5 , b u t your company's IT administrator may ha ve set a different one for you to use. You can access and modify the Mail for Exchan ge profile and settings in the Messaging setti ngs. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 63
Connectivity Your device offers several opt ions to connect to the internet or to another compatible device or PC. Data connections and access points Your device supports packet data connections (network service), such as GPRS in the GSM network. W hen you use your device in GSM and UMTS networ ks, multiple data connections can be active at the same time, and a ccess points can share a data connection. In the UMTS network, data connections remain active during voice calls. You can also use a WLAN data co nnection. O nly one connection in one wireless LAN can be active at a time, but several applications can use t h e same internet access point. To establish a data connection , an access point is required. You can define differen t kinds of access points, such as the following: ⢠MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages ⢠Internet access point (IAP) to send and receive e-mail and connect to the internet Check the type of access poin t you need with your service provider for the service you want to access. For availability and subscription to packet data connection services, contact your service provider. Network settin gs Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > Network . Your dev ice can aut o matica lly switch between GSM and UMTS networks. GSM networks are indicated with . UMTS networks are indicated with . An active high-speed downli nk packet access (HSDPA) connection (network serv ice) is indicated with . Select from the following: Network mode â S e l e c t w h i c h n e t w o r k t o u s e . I f y o u s e l e c t Dual mode , the device uses the GSM or UM TS network automatically, according to the network param eters and the roaming agreements betwe en the wirele ss service providers. For details and roaming costs, contact your network service provider. This option is shown only if supp orted by the wireless service provider. A roaming agreement is an ag reement between two or more service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use the services of other service providers. Operator selection â Select Au tomatic to set the device to search for and select one of th e available networks, or Manual to manually select the ne twork from a list. If the connection to the manually se lected network is lost, the device sounds an error tone and asks you to reselect a network. The selected network must have a roaming agreement with your home network. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 64
Cell info display â Set the device to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on microcellular network (MCN) technology and to activate cell info reception. Wireless LAN Your device can detect and connect to wireless local area networks (WLAN). Using a WL AN, you can co nnect your devic e to the internet and compatib le devices that have WLAN support. About WLA N To use a wireless local area netw ork (WLAN) connect ion, it must be available in the loca tion, and your device must be connected to the WLAN. Some W LANs are protected, and you need an access key from the se rvice provider to connect to them. Using WLAN may be restricted in some countries. For example, in France, you ar e only allowed to use WLAN indoors. For more information, contact your local authorities. Features that use WLAN, or that are allowed to run in th e background while using ot her features, increase the demand on battery power and redu ce the battery life. Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increase the security of your wireless LAN connection. Using encrypt ion reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your data. WLAN connections To use a wireless LAN (WLAN) connection, you must create an internet access poin t (IAP) for WLAN. Use the acc ess point for applications that need to connect to the internet. A WLAN connection is establis hed when you create a data connection using a WLAN inte rnet access point. The active WLAN connection ends when you end the data connection. You can use WLAN du ring a voice call or wh en packet data is active. You can only be connected to one WLAN access point device at a time, but several applications can use the same internet access point. When the device is in the offline profile, you can still use WLAN (if available). Remember to comp ly with any applicable safety requirements when establ ishing and using a WLAN connection. Tip: To check the unique media access control (MAC) addr ess that identifies your device, open th e dialler and enter *#62209526# . WLAN wiza rd Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > WLAN . The WLAN wizard helps you to connect to a w ireless LAN (WLAN) and mana ge your WLAN connections. If the search finds WLAN s, to cr eate an internet access point (IAP) for a connecti on and start the web browser using this IAP, select the connection and Start web browsing . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 65
If you select a secured WLAN, you are asked to enter the relevant password. T o connect to a hidden network, you must enter the correct network name (service set identifier, SSID ). If you already have th e web browser running usi ng the currently active WLAN connection, to return to the web browser, select Continue web browsing . To end the active connection , select the connection and Disconnect WLAN . WLAN internet access points Select Menu > Se ttings and Connectivity > WLAN > Options . Select from the following: Filter WLAN net works â Filter out wireless LANs (WLANs) from the list of found networ ks. The selected networks are not displayed the next time the applica tion searches for WLANs. Details â View the details of a network shown in the list. If you select an active connection, the connection details are displayed. Operating modes There are two operating modes in WLAN: infrastructure and ad hoc. The infrastructure operating mode allows two kinds of communication: wireless devices are connected to each other through a WLAN acces s poin t device, or wireless devices are connected to a wired LAN through a W LAN access point device. In the ad hoc operating mode, devices can send and receive data directly wi th each other. Wireless LAN setti ngs Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > WLAN > Options > Settings . Select from the following: Show WLAN availabilit y â Select whether is displayed when a wireless LAN (WLA N) is available. Tip: To access the WLAN Wizard application and view the available options, select the WLAN icon, and in the pop-up window, select the hig hlighted text next to the WLAN icon. Scan for networks â If you set Show WLAN availability to Yes , you can select how often the device searches for available WLANs an d up dates the indicator. Internet connectivity test â Select whether you wan t the device to test the internet capability of the select ed WLAN automatically, to ask for permis sion every time, or to never perform the connectivity test. If you select Run automa tically or allow the test to be performed when the device asks for it, and the co nnectivity test is performed successfully, the access point is saved to the internet destinations. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 66
To view advanced settin gs, select Optio ns > Adv anced settings . Changing the advanced settings for the WLAN is not recommended. Access points Create a new access point Select Menu > Se ttings and Connectivity > Destinations . You may recei ve access point setti ngs in a message from a service provider. Some or all access points may be preset for your devi ce by your s ervice pro vider, and y ou may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. When you open one of the access point groups ( , , , ), you can see the access point types: indicates a protected access point indicates a packet data access point indicates a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point Tip: You can create internet access points in a WLAN with the WLAN wiza rd. To create a new acc ess point, select Access point . The device asks to check for available connecti ons. After the search, connections that are already ava ilable are shown an d can be shared by a new access poi nt. If you skip this step, you are asked to select a connection method and to define the settings needed. To edit the settings of an acce ss point , open one of the access point groups, and select an access point. Follow the instructions from your service provider. Connection name â Enter a name for the connection. Data bearer â Select the data con nection type. Depending on the data connect ion you select, only certain setting fields are available. Fi ll in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red *. Other fields can be left empty, unless your service provider has instructed otherwise. To use a data connect ion, your service provider must support this feature, and if necessary, activate it for your SIM card. Create access point gro ups Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > Destinations . Some applications allow you to use access point groups for network connections. To avoid selecting a single access point every time the device makes a network connection, yo u can create a group that contains various access points to connect to that net work and define the order in which the access points are used. For example, you can add wireless LAN (WLAN) and packet data access points to an intern et access point group, and use the group for browsing the web. If you give WLAN the h ighest priority, the device connects to the internet throug h WLAN, if available, and through a packet dat a connection if not. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 67
To create a new access point group, select Options > Manage > New d estination . To add access points to an access point group, select the group and Optio ns > New access point . To copy an existing access point from anot her group, select the group, tap the relevant access point if it is not already hig hlighted, and select Options > Organi se > Copy to other dest . . To change the priority of an access point within t he group, select Options > Organi se > Change priority . Packet data access points Select Menu > Se ttings and Connectivity > Destinations > Access point , and follow the instructions on the screen. To edit a packet data access p o int, open one of the access point groups, an d select an access point marked with . Follow the instructions from your service provider. Select from the following: Access point name â You obtain the access point name from your service provider. User name â The user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by your service provider. Prompt password â If you must enter the password every time you log in to a server, or if you do n ot want to save your password in the device, select Yes . Password â A password may be needed to make a data connection and is usually provid ed by your service provider. Authentication â Select Secure to always send your password encrypted or Normal to send your password encrypted when possible. Homepage â Depending on the access point you are setting up, enter the web address or the address of the multimedia message centre. Use access point â Select After confirmatio n if you want the device to ask for confirmation before the conn ection using this access point is created, or Automatically if you want the device to connect to the destinati on using this access point automati cally. Select Options > Advanced settings and from the following: Network type â Select the internet protocol type to transfer data to and from your device . The other sett ings depend on the selected network type. Phone IP address (for IPv4 only) â Enter the IP address of your device. DNS addresses â Enter the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers, if required by your service provider. To obtain these addresses, co ntact your internet service provider. Proxy serv er address â Enter the address of the proxy server. Proxy p ort numb er â Enter the port number of the proxy server. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 68
WLAN internet access points Select Menu > Se ttings and Connectivity > Destinations > Access point , and follow the instructions. To edit a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point, open one of the access point groups, and select an access point marked with . Follow the instructions from your WLAN service provider. Select from the following: WLAN network name â Select Enter manually or Search for networks . If you select an existing netw ork, WLAN network mode and WLAN security mode are determined by the settings of its access point device. Network status â Define wh ether the network n ame is displayed. WLAN network mode â S el ec t Ad-hoc to create an ad hoc network and to allow devices to send a nd receive data directly; a WLAN access point de vice is not needed. In an ad hoc network, all devices must use the same W LAN network name. WLAN security mode â Select the encryption used: WEP , 802.1x , or WPA/WPA 2 (802.1x and WPA/W PA2 are not available for ad hoc networks). If you select Open net work , no encryption is used. The WEP, 802.1x and WPA functions can be used only if the network supports them. Homepage â Enter the web address of the st arting page. Use access point â Set the device to create a connection using this access point automatically or after confirmation . The available options ma y vary. Active data conn ections Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > Connection mgr. . In the active data connection s view, you can see open data connections: data calls packet data connections wireless LAN (WLAN) connections To end a connection, select Options > Disconne ct . To end all open connections, select Options > Disconn ect all . To view the details of a connection, select Option s > Details . Synchronisation With the Sync application, you can synchronise your notes, messages, contacts, and othe r information with a remote server. Select Menu > Settin gs > Connectivity > Data transfer > Sync . You may receive synchronisation settings as a configu ration message from your service provider. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 69
A synchronisation profile contai ns the nece ssary settings for synchronisation. When you open the appli cation, the defau lt or previously us ed synchron isation profile is displayed. Include or exclude content typ es Select a content type. Synchronise data Select Options > Synchronise . Create a new synchronisatio n profile Select Options > New sync profile . Manage synchronisation profiles Select Options and the desired option. Bluetooth connectivity About Bluetooth connectivity With Bluetooth connectivity , you can make a wireless connection to other compatib le devices, such as mobile phones, computers, headsets, and car kits. You can use the conn ection to se nd images, video clips, music and sound clips, and notes, transfer files from your compatible PC, and prin t images with a compatible printer. Since devices wit h Blue tooth wireless technology communicate using radio wa ves, they do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. However, they must be within 10 metres (33 feet) of each other, al though the connection may be subject to interference from obstructions such as w alls or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 2.0 EDR supporting the following profiles: Dial-Up Networking (DUN), Object Push Profile (OPP), File Transfer Profile (FTP), Hands Free Profile (HFP), Headset Profile (HSP), Basic Imaging Profile (BIP), Remote SIM A ccess Profile (SimAP), Devi ce Identification Profile (DI), Ph onebook Access Profile (PBAP), Generic Audio/Video Distribution Profile (GAVDP), Audio/ Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP), Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP). To ensure interoperability between other devices supporting Bluet ooth technology, use Nokia approved accessories for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other devices to determine their compatibility with this device. Features using Bluetooth technology increa se the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. When the device is locked, on ly connections to authorised devices are possible. Settings Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > Bluetooth . When you open the application for the first time, you are asked to define a name for your device. You can change the name later. Select from the following: Bluetooth â Turn Bluetooth connectivity on or off. My phone's visibility â To allow your device to be found by other devices with Blu etooth wireless technology, select Shown to all . To set a time period after whi ch the visibility é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 70
is set from shown to hidden, select Set visibility period . To hide your device from other devices, select Hidden . My phone's name â Edit the name shown to other devices with Bluetooth wireles s technology. Remote SIM mode â Enable or disable another device, such as a compatible car kit accessory , to use the SIM card in your device to connect to the netw ork. Security tips Select Menu > Se ttings and Connectivity > Bluet ooth . When you are no t using Bluet ooth connectivity, to control who can find your device and connect to it, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visi bility > Hidden . Do not pair with or accept connection requests from an unknown device. This helps to protect your device from harmful content. Send data using Bluetooth connectivity You can have several B luetooth connections active at a time. For example, if you are connected to a compatible headset, you can also transfer files to another comp atible device. 1 Open the application where th e item you want to send is stored. 2 Go to an item, and select Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . Devices with Bluetooth wireless technology that a re within range are displayed. Device icons are as follows: computer phone audio or video device other device To interrupt the search, select Cancel . 3 Select the device with which you want to connect. 4 If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds, and you are asked t o enter a passcode. The same pass code must be entered in both devices. When the connection is established, Sending data is displayed. Tip: When sear ching for devices, some device s may show only the unique address (devic e address). To find the unique address of your device, in the home screen, enter *#282 0# . Pair de vices Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > Bluetooth . To pair with compatible devices and view your paired devices, open the Paired device s tab. Before pairing , create your o wn pass code (1 to 16 digi ts), an d agree with the owner of the other device to use the same code. Devices that do not have a user interface have a factory- set passcode. The passcode is used only once. 1 To pair with a device, select Opti ons > New paired device . Devices that are within ran ge are displayed. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 71
2 Select the device, and enter the passcode. The same passcode must be entered on the other device, as well. 3 Some audio accessories connect a utomatically to your device after pairing. Otherwise, to connect to an accessory, select Op tions > Connect to audio device . Paired devices are indicated by in the device search. To set a device as authorised or unauthorised, select from the following: Set as authorised â Connections between your device and the authorised device can be made without your knowledge. You will not b e asked for au thorisation or acceptance separately. Use this status only for y o u r o w n de v i c es , s u c h a s your compatible headset or PC, or devices th at belong to someone you trust. indicates authorised devices in the paired devices view. Set as unauthorised â Connection requests from this device must be accepted separately every time. To cancel a pairing with a device, select Option s > Dele te . To cancel all pairings, select Options > Delete all . Receive data using Blu etooth connectivity When you receive data using Bluet ooth connectivity, a ton e sounds, and the device asks y ou if you want to accept the message. If you accept, is displayed, and you ca n find an informative message about the da ta in the Inbox folder in Messaging. The recei ved data is automatically saved to t he device memory. Messages received using Bluetooth connectivity are indi cated with . Block devices Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > Bluetooth . To block a device from establ ishing a Bluetooth connection to your device, open the Pair ed devices tab. Tap a device you want to block, if it is no t already highlighted, and select Options > Block . To unblock a device, open the Blocked device s tab, tap a device, if it is not already highlighted, and select Option s > Delete . To unblock all blocked devices, select Options > Delete all . If you reject a pairing reques t from another dev ice, you are asked if you want to block all future connection requests from this device. If you accept the query, the remote dev ice is added to the list of blocked devices. Remote SIM mod e Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > Bluetooth . Before the remote SIM mode can be activated, the two devices must be paired and th e pairing initiated from the other device. When pairing, us e a 16-digit passcode, and set the other device as authoris ed. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 72
To use the remote SIM mode with a compatible ca r kit accessory, activate Bluetooth connectivity, and enable the use of the remote SIM mode with you r device. Activate the remote SIM mode from the other device. When the remote SIM mode is on in your device, Remote SIM mode is displayed in the home sc reen. The connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator area, and yo u cannot use SIM card services or features requiring cellular network coverage. When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only use a compatible conn ected accessory, s uch as a car kit, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not make any calls while in this mode , except to the emergency numbers programmed into your device. To make calls from your device, you must lea ve the remot e SIM mode. If the device is locked, enter the lock code to unlock it. To leave the remote SIM mode, press the power key, and select Exit remote SIM mode . USB Select Menu > Se ttings and Connectivity > USB . To have the device ask the pu rpose of the connection each time a compatible data ca ble is connected, select Ask on connecti on > Yes . If the Ask on connection option is turned off or you want to change the mode du ring an active connection, select USB connecti on mode and from the following: PC Suite â Use Nokia PC applications such as Nokia Ovi Suite, and Nokia Software Updater. Mass storage â Transfer d ata between your device and a compatible PC. Image transfer â Print images with a compatible print er. Media transfer â Synchronise music with Nokia Music or Windows Media Player. PC connections You can use your m obile device with a variety of compatible PC connectivity and data co mmunicati ons applications. With Nokia Ovi Suite you can, for example, transfer files and images between your device an d a compatible computer. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 73
To use Ovi Suite with USB connection mode, select PC Su ite mode . For more information about Ov i Suite, see the support area at www.ovi.com. Administrative settings Select Menu > Se ttings and Connectivity > Admin. settings . To set the online time for the da ta call connection, select Data call . The data call settings affect all access points that use a GSM data call. Packet data se ttings Select Menu > Se ttings and Connectivity > Admin. settings > Packet data . The packet data settings affect all access points using a packet data connection. Select from the following: Packet data connection â If you select When available and you are in a n etwork that sup ports packet data, th e device registers to the packet data n etwork. Starting an active packet data connection (for exam ple, to send and receive e-mail) is quicker than if the device establishes a packet data connection when n eeded. If there is no packet data coverage, the device pe riodically tries to establish a packet data connection. If you select When needed , t he device uses a packet data co nnection only if you start an application or act ion that needs it. Access point â The access point name is needed to use your device as a packet dat a modem to a compatible comp uter. High speed packet access â Enable or disable the use of HSDPA (network service) in UMTS networks. SIP setti ngs Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > Admin. settings > SIP settings . Session Initiation Protocol (S IP) settings are needed for certain network services using SIP. You may receive the settings in a special text mess age from your service provider. You can view, delete, or create these setting profiles in SIP settings. Access point name control Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > Admin. settings > APN control . With the access point name co ntrol service, you can restrict packet data connections and a llow your device to use only certain packet data access points. This setting is only availa ble if your SIM card supports the access point control service. T o t u r n t h e c o n t r o l s e r v i c e o n o r o f f , o r t o c h a n g e t h e a l l o w e d access points, select Options and the corresponding option. To change the options, you need your PIN2 code. Contact your service provider for the code. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 74
Internet With the Web browser, you can view hypertext markup language (HTML) we b pages on the internet as originally designed. You can also browse web pages tha t are designed specifically for mobile devices, and use extensible hypertext markup language (XHTML ), or the wireless markup lan guage (WML). To browse the web, you need to have an internet access point configured in your device. Using the web browser requires network support or WLAN available. Browse the web Select Menu > Web . To browse the web, select Go to web address from the toolbar, and enter a web address. By default, the browser is in full screen mode. To exit full screen mode, select the arrow icon in the bottom right corner. Some web pages may contai n material, such a s graphics or video clips, th at requires a large amount of m emory to view. If your device runs out of memory while loading such a web page, insert a memory card. Ot herwise, the video clips are not displayed. To browse web pages with g raphics disabled, to save memory and increase the page loading speed, select Options > Sett ings > Page > Load content > Text only . To refresh the content of the web page, select Options > Web page options > Reload . To save the current web pa ge as a bookmark, select Options > Web page optio ns > Save as bookmark . To view snapshots of the web pages you have visited during the current browsing session, select Back (available if History list is activated in the browse r settings and the current web page is not the first web page you visit). To prevent or allow the automatic opening of multiple windows, select Options > Web page options > Block pop-ups or Allow pop-ups . To zoom in on a web page, double-tap the display. Tip: To sen d the browser to the background without exiting the application or connection , press the end key once. Browser toolbar The browser toolbar he lps you select freque ntly used functions of the browser. To open the toolbar when brow sing, select the arrow in the bottom right corner. From the toolbar, select from the following: Expand toolbar â Expand the toolbar to access more toolbar functions. Go to web address â Enter a web address. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 75
Show zoom â Zoom in or out on the web page. To use the expanded toolbar, select Expand toolbar and from the following: Go to feed s â View your current feed subscriptions. Send URL â Send the web addr ess of the current page to another device. Switch win. â Switch between open browser windows. Subsc. feeds â View a list of available web feeds on the current web page, and subscribe to a web feed. Settings â Edit the settings. Save bkmrk. â Save the current web page as a bookmark. Reload â Refresh the web page. Overview â View an over view of the current web page. Homepage â Go to the homepage (if defined in settings). Bookmarks â Open the bookmark s view. Find keywd. â Searc h on the current web page. Navigate pages When you are browsing a web page th at contains a large amount of information, you ca n use Page overview to vi ew what kind of information the web page contains. To see an overview of the curr ent web page, open the toolbar, and select > . Web feeds and blogs Select Menu > Web . Web feeds are XML files on web pages that are used to share, f o r e x a m p l e , t h e l a t e s t n e w s h e a d l i n e s o r b l o g s . I t i s c o m m o n to find web feeds on web, blog, and wiki pages. The browser application automa tically detects if a web page contains web feeds. If web feeds are available, to subscribe to a web feed, select Options > Subscribe to w eb feeds . To update a web feed, in the Web feeds view, select a feed and Options > Web feed options > Refresh . To define whether the web f eeds are updated au tomatically, in the Web feeds view, select Options > Edit > Edit . Th is option is not available if one or more feeds are marked. Content search Select Menu > Web . To search for text within the current web page, select Options > Find key word . To go to the next match, from the toolbar, select Find next . To go to the previous match, from the toolbar, select Find previous . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 76
Bookmarks Select Menu > Web . Select Options > Go to > Bookmarks . You can select web addresses from a list or from a co llection of bookmarks in the Recently visited pages folder. The toolbar helps you select freq uently used functions of the browser. From the toolbar, sele ct from the following: Add bookmark â Add a new bookmark. Go to web address â Enter a new web add ress. Delete â Delete a bookmark. To go to a new web page, select Options > Go to > New web page . To send and add bookmarks, or to set a bookmark as the homepage, select Optio ns > Bookm ark options . To edit, move, or delete bookmarks, select Options > Bookmark manager . Empty the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the device. A cache is a memory location tha t is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information requ iring passwords, empty the cache after each use. To empty the cache, select Option s > Cl ear privacy data > Cache . End the connection To end the connection and close the browser, select Options > Exit . To delete the information the network server collects about your visits to various web pa ges, select Options > Clear privacy data > Cookies . Connection security If the security indicator ( ) is displayed duri ng a connect ion, the data transmi ssion between the device and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indi cate that the data transmission between the gateway and th e co ntent server (w here the data is stored) is secure. The service provider secures the data transmission between the gateway a nd the content server. Security certificates may be re quired for some services, such as banking services. You are noti fied if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 77
Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connecti ons and software insta llation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; the certificate manager must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increased security to be available. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid y et" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, chec k that the current date and time i n your device are correct. Before changing any cert ificate settings, you must make sure that you really trust the own er of the certificate an d that the certificate really belong s to th e listed owner. Web settings Select Menu > Web and Options > Settings and from the following: General settings Access point â Change the default access point. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider. You may not be able to change , create, edit, or remove them. Homepage â Define the homepage. History list â If you select On , while browsing, to see a list of the pages you have visi ted during the current sessi on, select Back . Web address suffix â Enter a web address suffix that the device uses by default when you enter a web address in the Go to field (for example, .com or .org). Security warnings â Hide or show security notificat ions. Java/ECMA script â Enable or disable the use of scripts. Java/ECMA script errors â Select whether you want to receive script notifications. Open while download ing â Select whether you want to be able to open a file while it is being downloaded. Page setti ngs Load content â Select whether yo u want to load images and other objects while browsing. If you select Text only , to load images or objects later during browsing, select Options > Tools > L oad images . Default encoding â If text characters are not shown correctly, you can select an ot her encoding according to the language for the current page. Block pop-ups â Allow or block automatic opening of different pop-ups while browsing. Automatic reload â Select whether you want the web pages to be refreshed automatically while browsing. Font size â Define the font size that is used for web pages. Privacy s ettings Recently visited page s â Enable or disable au tomatic bookmark collecting. If you want to continue saving the addresses of the visited web pages into the Recently visi ted pages folder, but hide the folder from the bookmarks view, select Hide folder . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 78
Form data saving â Select whether you want the password data or data you enter on different forms on a web page to be saved and used the next time you open the page. Cookies â Enable or disable the receiving and send ing of cookies. Web feed settings Acc. point for auto-upda te â Select the desired access point for updating. This opt ion is only available when Automatic u pdates is active. Update when roaming â Select whether you want the web feeds to be updated automatically when roaming. Positioning (GPS) You can use applica tions such as GPS data to find out your location, or measure distan ces and coordinates. These applications require a GPS connection. About GPS The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States , which is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenanc e. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adju stments to GPS sa tellites made by the United States government a nd is subject to change with the United States Departme nt of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satelli t e geometry. Availabili ty and quality of GPS signals ma y be affected by your location, buildings, natural obstacles, and weather condit ions. GPS signals may not be available inside buildings or underground and may be impaired by materials such as concrete an d metal. GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you should never rely solely on location data fr om the GPS receiver and cellular rad io networks for positioning or navigation. The trip meter ha s limited accu racy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. The coordinates in the GP S are expressed using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. The availability of the coordinates may vary by region. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 79
Assisted GP S (A-GP S) Your device also supports assiste d GPS (A-GPS). A-GPS requires network support. Assisted GPS (A-GPS) is used to ret rieve assistance data over a packet data connection, whic h assists in calculating th e coordinates of your current lo cation when your device is receiving signals from satellites. When you activat e A-GPS, your device receives useful satellite information from an assistan ce data server over the cellular network. With the help of assisted data, your device can obtain the GPS position faster. Your device is preconfigured to use the Nokia A-GPS service, if no service provider-specific A-GPS settings are av ailable. The assistance dat a is retrieved from the No kia A-GPS service server only when needed. To disable the A-GPS service, select Menu > Applications > Location and Options > Positioni ng settings > Position ing meth ods > Assisted G PS > Disable . You must h ave an intern et acce ss point defined in the device to retrieve assistance data from the Nokia A-GPS service over a packet data connection. The access point for A-GPS can be defined in positioning settings. A wireless LAN (WLAN) access point cannot be used for this service. Only a packet data internet access point can be used. Your device asks you to select the intern et access poi nt when GPS is used for the first time. Hold your device correctly When using the GPS receiver, ensure you do not cover the antenna with your hand. Establishing a GPS connection may take from a couple of seconds to several minutes. Establishing a GPS connection in a vehicle may take longer. The GPS receiver draws its po wer from the device battery. Using the GPS receiver may drain the battery faster. Tips on creating a GP S connection Check satellit e signal status To check how ma ny satellites your dev ice has found, and whether your device is receiv ing satellite signals, select Menu > Applications > Location and GPS data > Options > Satellite status . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 80
If your device has found satelli tes, a bar for each satellite is shown in the satellite info vi ew. The longer the bar, the stronger the satellite signal. When your device has received enough data from the satellite sig nal to calculate your location, the bar colour changes. To view the positions of found sate llites, select Chg. vi ew . Initially your device must rece ive signals from at least fou r satellites to be able to calculate your location. When the initial calculation has been made, it may be possible to continue calculating your location with three sat ellites. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. If no satellite signal can be found, consider the following: ⢠If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better signal. ⢠If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. ⢠Ensure that yo ur hand does not cover th e GPS antenna of your device. ⢠If the weather conditions ar e bad, the signal strength may be affected. ⢠Some vehicles have tinted (a thermic) windows, wh ich may block the s atellite signals. Position requests You may receive a request from a network service to receive your position information. Service providers may offer information about local topics, such as weather or traffic conditions, based on the location of your device. When you receive a position request, the service that is making the request is displayed. Select Accept to allow your position information to be sent or Reject to deny the request. Landmarks Select Menu > Applications > Location and Lan dmarks . With Landma rks, you can sav e the position information of specific locations in your device. You can sort the saved locations into different categories, such as business, and add other information to them, s uch as addresses. You can use your saved landmarks in compatib le applications, su ch as GPS data. GPS coordinates are expressed using the internationa l WGS-84 coordinate sy stem. Select Options and from the following: New landmark â Create a new landmark. To make a positioning request for your current location, select Current position . To enter the position information manually, select Enter manually . Edit â Edit or add information to a saved landmark (for example, a street address) . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 81
Add to category â Add a landmark to a category in Landmarks. Select each catego ry to which yo u want to add the landmark. Send â Send one or several landmarks to a compatible device. Your received landma rks are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You can sort your landmarks into preset categories, and create new categories. To ed it and create new landmark categories, open the cate gories tab, and select Options > Edit categori es . GPS data GPS data is designed to prov ide route guidance information to a selected destination, position information about your current location, a nd traveling information, such as the approximate distance to the destination and app roximate duration of travel. Select Menu > Applications > Location and GPS data . Route guidance Select Menu > Applications > Location and GPS data > Navigation . Start the route guidan ce outdoors . If started indoors, the GPS receiver may not receive the necessary information from the satellites. Route guidance is designed to show the straig htest route and the shortest distance to the des tination, measured in a straight line. Any obstacles on the route, such as buildings and natural obstacles, are ignored. D ifferences in altitude are not taken into account when ca lculating the distan ce. Route guidance is active only when you move. To set your trip destination, select Options > Set destination and a landmark as the destination, or enter the latitude and longitude coordinates. To clear the destination set for your trip, select Stop navigation . Retrieve positio n information You can view the position information of your current location and an estimate of the accuracy of the location. Select Menu > Applications > Location and GP S data > Positio n . Save yo ur curre nt locati on as a land mark Select Options > Save position . Landmarks can be used in other compatible applications and transferred between compatible devices. Trip mete r Select Menu > Applications > Location and GP S data > Trip distance . The trip meter ha s limited accu racy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 82
To turn trip distance calc ulation on or off, select Options > Start or Stop . The calculated values remain on the display. Use this feature outdoors to receive a better GPS s ignal. To set the trip distance and time and avera ge and maximum speeds to zero, and to start a new calculati on, select Options > Reset . To set the odometer and total time to zero, select Restart . Positioning se ttings Select Menu > Applications > Location and Positioni ng . Position ing meth ods Select from the following: Integrated GPS â Use the integrated GPS receiver of your device. Assisted GPS â Use Assisted GPS (A-GPS) to receive assistance data from a n assistance data se rver. Bluetooth GPS â Use a compatible external GPS receiver with Bluetooth connectivi ty. Network based â Use information from the cellular network (network service). Position ing server To define an access point and p ositioning server for network- assisted positioni ng methods, such as assisted GPS or network-based positioning, select Posi tioning server . The positioning server may be preset by your service provider, and you may not be able t o edit the settings. Notation settings To select which measurement system you want to use for speeds and di stances, select Measurement system > Metric or Imp erial . To define in which format the coordinate information is displayed in your device, select Coordinat e format and the desired format. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 83
Ovi Maps Maps overvi ew Select Menu > Maps . Welcome to Maps. Maps shows you w hat is nearby, helps you plan your route, and guides you where you want to go. ⢠Find cities, street s, and services. ⢠Find your way with tu rn-by-turn directions. ⢠Synchronise your favourite locations and routes b etween your mobile device and the Ovi Maps internet service. ⢠Check weather forecasts and other local information, if available. Note: Downloading content such as ma ps, satellite imag es, voice files, guides or traffic information may involve transmission of large amounts of data (network service). Some services may not be available in all countries, and may be provided only in selected languages. The services may be network dependent . For more informat ion, contact y our network service provider. Almost all digital ca rtography is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the ca rtography that you download for use in this device. Content such as satellite images, g uides, weather and traffic information and related servic es are generated by third parties independent of Nokia. The content m ay be inaccurate and incomplete to some extent and is subj ect to availability. Never rely solely on the afor ementioned content and related services. Use the compass If your device has a compass, when activated, bot h the arrow of the compass and the map rotate a utomatically in the direction to which the top of your device is pointing. Select Menu > Maps and My position . Activate the compa ss Select . Deactivate the compass Select again. The map is oriented north . The compass is active when ther e is a green outline. If the compass needs calibration, the ou tline of the compas s is red or yellow. To calibrate the compass, rotate the device around all axes in a contin uous movement. The compass has limited accuracy. Electromagnetic fields, metal objects, or other exte rnal circumst ances may also affect the accura cy of the compass. The compass should always be properly calibrated. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 84
View your location and the map See your current location on the map, and brow se maps of different cities and countries. Select Menu > Maps and My pos ition . When the GPS connec tion is active, marks your current or last known location on the map . If the icon's colours are faint, no GPS signal is av ailable. If only cell ID based positioning is available, a red halo around the positioning icon indicates the general area you might be in. The accuracy of the estimate increases in densely populated area s. Move on the map Drag the map with your fin ger. By default, the map is orient ed north. View your current or last known location Select . Zoom in or out Select or - . If you browse to an area not covere d by maps that are stored on your device and you ha ve an active da ta connection, new maps are automatically downloade d. Map coverage varies by country and region. Map view 1 Selected location 2 Indicator a rea 3 Point of interest (for exam ple, a railway station or a museum) 4 Information area Change the look of the map View the map in different modes, to easily identify where you are. Select Menu > Maps and My position . Select and from the following: é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 85
Map view â In the standard map view , details such as location names or motorway numbers, are easy to read. Satellite vie w â For a detailed view , use satellite images. Terrain view â View at a glance the ground type, for example, when you are travelling off-road. 3D â For a more realistic view, change the perspective of the map. Landmarks â Display prominent bu ildings and attracti ons on the map. Night mode â Dim the colours of the map. When travelling at night, the map is easier to read in this mode. Find a location Maps helps you find specific locations and types of business you are looking for. Select Menu > Maps and Find places . 1 Enter search terms, such as a st reet address or postcode. To clear the search field, select . 2 Select . 3 Select an item from the list of proposed matches. The location is displayed on the map. To view the other locations of the search result list on the map, select one of the arrows beside the information area ( ). Return to the list of propos ed matches Select List . Search for different types of nearby places Select Browse categories and a category, such as shopping, accommodation, or transport. If no search resu lts are found, ensure th e spelling of your search terms is correct. Problems with your internet connection may also affect re sults when searching online. To avoid data tran sfer costs, you can also get search results without an active internet connecti on, if you have maps of the searched area stored on your device. To ensure your device does not use the inte rnet connection, in the main menu, select > Internet > Conne ction > Offline . View location details View more information about a specific location or place, such as a hotel or restaurant, if available. Select Menu > Maps and My position . View the details of a place Select a place, its informa tion area ( ), and Show details . Rate a place Select a place, its informa tion area ( ), Show deta ils , and the star rating. For example, to rate a place a s being 3 out of 5 stars, select the third star. To rat e a place, you need an a ctive internet connection. When you find a place that does not ex ist or contains inappropriate information or in correct details, such as the é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 86
wrong contact information or location, it is recommended that you report it to Nokia. Report incorrect information Select a place and its information area ( ), and select Show details > Report this Place and the a ppropriate opti on. To report a place, you need an active internet connection. The available options may vary. Plan a route Plan your journey, and create yo ur route and v iew it on the map before setting off. Select Menu > Maps and My pos ition . Create a route 1 Tap the location of your star ting point. To search for an address or place, select Search . 2 Tap the location's information area ( ). 3 Select Add to route . 4 To add another route point, select Add new route point and the appropriate option. Change the order of the route points 1 Select a route point. 2 Select Move . 3 Tap the place where you want to move the route point to. Edit the location of a route point Tap the route point, and select Edit and t he appropriate option. View the route on the map Select Show route . Navigate to the de stination Select Show route > Option s > Start driving or Start walking . Change the sett ings for a route The route settings affect the navigation guidance and the way the route is di splayed on the map. 1 In the route planner view, open the Settings tab. To get to the route planner view from the navigation view, select Options > Route points or Route point list . 2 Set the transportation mode to Drive or Walk . If you select Walk , one-way streets are regarded as normal streets, and walkways and ro utes through, for example, parks and shoppi ng centres, can be used. 3 Select the desired option. Select the walking mode Open the Settings tab, and select Walk > Preferred route > St reets or Straight line . Straight line is useful on off-road terrain as it indi cates the walking direction. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 87
Use the faster or sho rter driving route Open the Settings tab, and select Drive > Route selection > Faster route or Shorter route . Use the opt imised dri ving route Open the Settings tab, and select Drive > Route selection > Optimised . The optimised driving route combines the advantages of both the s horter and the faster routes. You can also ch oose to allow or avoid using, for example, motorways, toll roads, or ferries. Save places and routes Save addresses , places of interest, and routes, so they can be quickly used later. Select Menu > Maps . Save a place 1 Select My position . 2 Tap the location. To search for a n address or place, select Search . 3 Tap the location's information area ( ). 4 Select Save place . Save a route 1 Select My position . 2 Tap the location. To search for a n address or place, select Search . 3 Tap the location's information area ( ). 4 To add another route point, select Add to route . 5 Select Add new ro ute point and the appropriate option. 6 Select Show route > Option s > Save route . View your saved places and routes Select Favourite s > Place s or Rout es . View and organise places or routes Use your Favourites to quickly access the places and routes you have saved. Group the places and routes in to a collection, for example, when planning a trip. Select Menu > Maps and Favourites . View a saved place on the map 1 Select Places . 2 Go to the place. 3 Select Map . To return to the list of saved places, select List . Create a collect ion Select Create new colle ction , and enter a collection name. Add a saved place to a collection 1 Select Places and the place. 2 Select Organise coll ections . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 88
3 Select New collection or an existing collection. If you need to delete places or routes, or add a route to a collection, go to the Ovi Maps internet service at www.ovi.com. Send places to your frien ds When you want to share place information with your friends, send these details directly to their devices. Select Menu > Maps and My pos ition Send a place to yo ur friend's compatible de vice Select a location, tap the lo cation's information area ( ), and select Send . Synchronise your Favourites Plan a trip on your computer at the Ovi Maps website, synchronise the saved places , routes, and collections with your mobile device, and access the plan on the go. To synchronise places, routes , or collections between your mobile device and the Ovi Maps internet service, you need a Nokia account. I f you do not have one, in the ma in view, select Accounts > N okia account > Create new account . Synchronise saved places, route s, and collections Select Favourites > Synchronise with Ovi . If you do not have a Nokia account, you are p rompted to create one. Set the d evice to synchroni se Favourites autom atically Select and Synchronisation > Synchronisation > At start-up and shut-d. . The device starts the synchronisation when you open or close the Maps application. Synchronising requires an acti ve internet connection, an d may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service providerâÂÂs network. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transmission charge s. To use the Ovi Maps internet service, go to www.ovi.com. Share locati on Publish your current location to Fa cebook, together with t ext and a picture. Your Facebook friends ca n see your location on a map. Select Menu > Maps and Share location . To share yo ur location, you need a Nokia account and a Facebook account. 1 Sign in to your Nokia a ccount, or, if you do no t yet have one, select Create new account . 2 Sign in to your Facebook account. 3 Select your current location. 4 Enter your stat us update. 5 To attach a picture to your post, select Add a photo . 6 Select Share location . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 89
Manage your Facebook a ccount In the main view, select Accounts > Share location settings > Facebook . Sharing your location and vi ewing the location of others requires an internet connec tion. This may involve the transmission of large amounts of data and related data traffic costs. The Facebook terms of use appl y to sharing your location on Facebook. Familiarise yourself with the Facebook terms of use and the privacy practices. Before sharing your location to others, always consider carefully with whom you are sharing it. Check the privacy settings of the social networking service you are using as you might share your location with a large group of people. Get voice guidance Voice guidance, if available fo r your langua ge, helps you fin d your way to a destination, leaving y ou free to enjoy the journey. Select Menu > Maps and Drive or Walk . When you use drive or walk navi gation for the firs t time, you are asked to select the langua ge of the voice guidance, and download the appropriate files. If you select a langua ge that includes street names, also the street names are said aloud. Voice guidance may not be available for your language. Change the voic e guidance languag e In the main view, select > Navigation > Drive guidance or Walk guidance and the appropriate option. Repeat the voi ce guidance for car navig ation In the navigation view, select Options > Repeat . Adjust the vo lume of the vo ice guidance for car navigation In the navigation view, select Options > Volume . Walk to your dest ination When you need directions to follow a route on foot, Maps guides you over squares, and through parks, pedestrian zones, and even shopping centres. Select Menu > Maps and Walk . Walk to a destination Select Set de stination and the appropriate option. Walk to your home Select Walk home . When you select Driv e home or Walk home for the first time, you are prompted to define your home location . To later change the home location, do the following: 1 In the main view, select . 2 Select Navigation > Home Location > Redefine . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 90
3 Select the approp riate option. Tip: To walk without a set destination, select Map . Y our location is displayed on the centre of the map as you move. Drive to your destinat ion When you need turn-by-turn directions while driving, Maps helps you get to your destination. Select Menu > Maps and Drive . Drive to a destination Select Set destination and the appropriate op tion. Drive to your home Select Drive home . When yo u selec t Drive home or Walk home for the first time, you are prompted to define your home location. To later change the home locati on, do the following: 1I n t h e m a i n v i e w , s e l e c t . 2 Select Navigation > Home Location > Redefine . 3 Select the approp riate option. Tip: To drive without a set destination, select Map . Your location is displayed on the centre of the map as you move. Change views during navigation Swipe the screen to select 2D view , 3D view , Arrow view , or Route over view . Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Yo ur first consideration while driving should be road safety. Navigation view 1 Route 2 Your location and direction 3 Compass 4 Information bar (speed, distance, time) Get traffic and safety information Enhance your driving experience with real-time information about traffic events, lane a ssistance, and speed limit warnings, if available for your country or region. Select Menu > Maps and Drive . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 91
View traffic ev ents on the map During drive navi gation, select Options > Traffic info . The events are displayed as triangles and lines. Update traffic information Select Options > Traffic info > Update traffic info . When planning a route, you can set the device to avoid tra ffic events, such as tra ffic jams or roadworks. Avoid traffi c events In the main view, select and Navigation > Re route due to traffic . The location of speed cameras may be shown on your route during navigation, if this feature is enabled. Some jurisdictions prohibit or regu late the use of speed camera location data. Nokia is not respon sible for the accuracy, or the consequences of using speed camera location data. Camera Your device supports an image capture resolution of 2592x1944 pixels (5 mega pixels ). The image resolution i n this guide may appear different. To ensure good quality ph otos, wipe the camera lens carefully with a cleaning cloth. Activate th e camera To activate the camera, open th e lens cover. If the camera is active in the backgro und, and the lens cover is open, press the capture key to activa te the camera. Image capture Customise th e active tool bar The active toolbar provides you wit h shortcuts to different items and settings before capturing an image or recording a video clip. The capture and reco rding settings return to the default settings after you close the camera. Select Menu > Applications > Camera . To add or remove a toolbar item, select > Customise toolbar and from the following: or â Switch between video and image mode. â Select the scene. or â Show or hide the viewfinder grid (images only). é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 92
â Activate the self-timer (ima ges only). â Activate seq uence mode (images only). â Open Photos . â Select a colour effect. â Adjust the white balance. Select the current lighting conditions. This allows the camera to reproduce colours more accurately. â Adjust the exposure compensation (images only). If yo u are shooting a dark subject against a very light background, such as snow, adjust the exposure to 1 or 2 to compensate for the background brightne ss. For light subjects against a d ark background, use -1 or -2. â Adjust light sens itivity (images only). Increase the light sensitivity in low light conditions to avoid too dark images and blurry images. Increasing the light sensitivity may also increase the image noise. â Adjust contrast (imag es only). Adjust the difference between the lightest and dar kest parts of the image. â Adjust sharpnes s (images only) . The screen display changes to match th e settings you define. Saving the captured image may ta ke longer if you change the zoom, lighting, or colour settings. The capture settings are shooting-mode sp ecific. Switching between the modes does not reset the defined s ettings. If you select a new scene, the capture settings are replaced by the selected scene. You ca n change the capture settings after selecting a scene if needed. Capture images When capturing an imag e, note the following: ⢠Use both hands to keep the camera still. ⢠The quality of a digitally zoomed imag e is lower than that of a non-zoomed image. ⢠The camera goes into battery saving mode if there are no actions for about a minu te. To continue ca pturing images, select Continue . ⢠Keep a safe distance when us ing the flash. Do no t use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. To capture an image with the main camera, do the following: 1 To switch from video mode to image mode, if necessary, select > . 2 To capture an image, press the capture key. Do not move the device before the image is saved and th e final image displayed. Capture images with secondary camera To capture an image, select . Do not move the device before the image is saved an d the final image displayed. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 93
To zoom in or out when capturing an image, use the zoom slider. To leave the camera open in the background and use other applications, press the menu ke y. To return to the camera, press and hold the capture key. On-screen controls and indicators for stil l image capture The still image viewfinder displays the following: 1 Capture mode indicator 2 Zoom slider. To turn the zoom slider on and off, tap the screen. 3 Capture icon. Tap to capture an image. 4 Flash mode. Tap to change setting s. 5 Capture settings. Tap t o change settings. 6 Battery charg e level indicator 7 Image resolution indicator 8 Image counter (the estimated number of images yo u can capture using the current image quality setting and available memory) 9 Memory in use. Depend ing on the s etup of you r device, there are the following op tions: device memory ( ). 10 GPS signal indicator Location information You can automati cally add capt ure location information to the file details of the captured material. For example, in the Photos app lication, you can then view the location where an image was captured. Select Menu > Applications > Camera . Add location information to all captured mate rial Select Options > Settings > Show GPS info > On . The location information is availa ble only for images captured with the main camera. It may take several minutes to obtain the coordinates of your location. The availabi lity and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, buil dings, natural obstacles, and weather conditions. If you share a file that includes location information, also the location information is shared, and your location may be vis ible to thir d parties viewing the file. The device requires network services to acquire location information. Location information indicators: é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 94
â Location information unavailable. GPS stays active in the background for several minu tes. If a satellite connection is made and the indicator changes to within that time, all the images captured and vide o clips recorded during that time are tagged based on the received GPS positioning information. â Location information is available. Location information is added to the file details. Files with location inform ation are indicated with in the Photos application. After capturing an image After you capture an ima ge, sele ct from the following options (available only if you have selected Options > Settings > Show captured image > Yes ): â Send the image in a mu ltimedia or e-mail message, or through connection me thods such as Bluetooth connectivity. â Upload the image to a compati ble online album. Delete â Delete the image. To use the image as wallpaper in the home screen, select Options > Use image > Set as wallpaper . To set the image as a default call image to be used for every call situation, select Option s > Use image > Set as call image . To assign the image to a co ntact, Options > Use image > Assign to contact . To return to the viewfinder to capture a new im age, press the capture key. Flash and video light Keep a safe distance when us ing the flash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close rang e. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. The camera of your device has a dual LED flash for low light conditions. To select the desired flash mo de, tap the current flash mode indicator, which is one of the following: Automatic , Reduce red , On , and Off . Avoid touching the flash LEDs when the back cover has been removed. The LEDs may get hot after prolong ed usage. Video light To increase light levels when recording video in low light, select . Scenes A scene helps you to find the ri ght colour and lighting settings for the current environment. Th e settings of each scene have been set according to a ce rtain style or environment. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 95
The default scene in image and video modes is indicated with ( Automatic ). To change the scene, select > Scene mod e and a scene. To create your own scene suitable for a certain environment, select User defined and Edit . In the user defined scene, you can adjust differen t lighting and colour settings . To copy the settings of another scene, select Base d on scene mode and the desired scene. To save the changes and return to the scenes list, select Back . To activate your own scene, select User defined > Select Capture images in a sequence Select Menu > Applications > Camera . Sequence mode is available only in the main camera. To start capturing images in a quick sequence, select > Sequence . To c lose the settings window, select . Press and hold the capture key. The devi ce captures images until you select Stop or until the memory runs out. The captured images are displayed in a grid. To view an image, select the image. To return to the sequence mode viewfinder, press the capture key. You can also use sequence mode with the self-timer. To deactivate sequence mode, select > Single shot . You in the image â self-timer Use the self-timer to delay the capture so that you can include yourself in the image. To set the self-timer delay, select > , and the delay needed before the image is captured. To activate the self-timer, select Activate . The stopwa tch icon on the screen blinks and the remaining time is displayed when the timer is ru nning. The camera captures the image after the selected delay elapses. To switch off the self-timer, select > > . Tip: Select 2 seconds to keep your hand steady when capturing an image. Video recording Record a video clip 1 To switch from image mode to video mode, if necessary, select > . 2 To start recording, press the capture key, or select . A red record icon is displayed. 3 To pause recording, select Pause . To resume, select Continue . If you pause recording and do not press any key within one minute, the recordi n g stops. To zoom in or out, use the zoom keys. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 96
4 To stop recording, press th e capture key. The video clip is automati cally saved in Photos . Video recording on-screen controls and indicators The video viewfinder displays the following: 1 Capture mode indicator 2 Audio mute on indicator 3 Capture icon. Select to record video clips. 4 Video light indicator 5 Recording settings. Se lect to change setti ngs. 6 Battery charg e level indicator 7 Video quality indi cator. To change this se tting, select Options > Settings > Video quality . 8 Video clip file type 9 Available recording time. When you are recording, the current video length indicator also shows the elapsed and remaining time. 10 The location to which the video clip is saved 11 GPS signal indicator After re cording a video cli p After you record a video clip , select from the following options (available only if you have selected Options > Settings > Show last ca ptured video > Yes ): Play â Play the video clip you just recorded. â Upload the image to a compatible online albu m. Delete â Delete the video clip. To return to the viewfinder to record a new video clip, press the capture key. Camera settings Still image camera settings To change the main sett in gs, in image mode, select Options > Settings and from the following: Image quality â Set the resolution . The higher the image resolution, the more memo ry the image consumes. Show captured image â View the image after it is captured, or continue im age capturing immediately. Default image name â Define the default name for captured images. Capture tone â Set the tone that sounds when you capture an image. Memory in use â Select where to store your images. Show GPS info â To add GPS location coordinates to each image file, select On . Receiving a GPS signal may ta ke time, or the signal may not be available. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 97
Auto-rotate images â Select whether you want images that are captured wh en the device is held upright to be rotated when you open them in Photos. Restore camera se ttings â Res tore the camera settings to the default values. Video settings To change the main set tings, in video mode, select Options > Sett ings and from the following: Video quality â Se t the quality of the video clip. Se lect Sharing , if you want to send the video clip using a multimedia message. The cl ip is recorded with QCIF resolution, in the 3GPP file fo rmat, and the size is limited to 600 kB (approximately one minute) . You may not be able to send video clips saved in the MPEG4 file fo rmat in a multimedia message. Show GPS info â To add GPS loc ation coordinates to each file, select On . Receiving the GPS signal may take time, or the signal may not be available. Audio recordi ng â Record sound. Show last captured video â View the first frame of the recorded video clip after the recording stops. To view the entire video clip, select Play . Default video name â Enter the default name for recorded video clips. Memory in use â Select where to store your video clips. Restore camera se ttings â Res tore the camera settings to the default values. Photos About Pho tos With Photos, you can view im ages and video clips you have captured and recorded, downlo aded from the web, received in a multimedia or e-mail mess age, saved on a memory card, or copied to your device memory from a memory card or other sources. Select Menu > Photos and from the following: Captured â View all the images and video clips you have captured and recorded. Months â View images and video clips categorised by the month they were captured or recorded. Applicable only for content captured or recorded with your device. Albums â View the default albums and the ones you have created. Tags â View the tags you have created for each item. All â View all images and video clips on your device. Share online â Post your images or video clips to the web. View images and videos Select Menu > Photos . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 98
Images and video clips can al so be sent to you from a compatible device. To be able to view a r eceived image or video clip in Photos, you must first save i t. The images and video clip files are ordered by date and time. The number of files is displaye d. To browse the files, swipe up or down. To open a file, select the file . To view the toolbar, tap the image. To zoom in the imag e, use the zoom slider. The zooming ratio is not stored permanently. To edit an image or a vide o clip, select the file and Options > Edit . To view the details of an image, select Options > Details . To print your images on a compati ble printer, select Options > Print . View and edit file details Select Menu > Photos . To view and edit the properties of an image or a video clip, select the file, Options > Details , and from the following: Name â View the thumbnail image of the file and the current file name. To edit the file name, select the file name field. Description â View a free-form description of the file. To add a description, select the field. Tag â V i e w t h e c u r r e n t l y u s e d t a g s . T o a d d m o r e t a g s t o t h e current file, select New tag . Album â View in which albums the current file is located. Location â View GPS location information, if available. Resolution â View the size of the image in pixels. Duration â View the length of the video clip. Licence â View the DRM rights of the current file. The available options ma y vary. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 99
Organise images and video clips Select Menu > P hotos . You can organise files as follows: To view items in the Tags view, add tags to the items. To view items by months, select Months . To create an album to store items, select Albums > Options > New al bum . To add an image or a video clip to an album, go to the item, and select Option s > Add to album . To delete an image or video clip, go to the item, and select Options > Delet e . Photos toolbar From the active toolbar, se lect the desired option. The available options vary dependin g on the view you are in and whether you have selected an image or a video clip. When viewing an image or a video clip in full screen mode, tap the item to show the toolbar and the zoom slider. Select an image or a video clip and from the following: Send the image or video clip . Mark the image or video clip. Upload the imag e or video clip t o a compatible o nline album (only available if you h ave set up an account for a compatible online album). Delete the image or video clip. Rename the image or video clip. View images as a slideshow. Create a new album. Albums Select Menu > Photos and Albums . With albums, you can conveniently ma nage your images and video clips. To create a new album, select . To add an image or a video clip to an album, select the item and Options > Add to album . A list of albums opens. Select the album to which you want to add the image or video clip. The item you added to the album is still vi sible in Photos. To remove an image or a video cl ip from an album, select the album and the item, and select Options > Remove from album . Tags Select Menu > Photos . Use tags to categoris e media items in Photos. Tag browser shows the currently used tags and the number of items associated with each tag. To assign a tag to an image, select the image and Options > Add tag . To create a tag, select New tag . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 100
To see the tags you have created, select Tags . The s ize of the tag name corresponds to the number of items the tag is assigned to. To view all the images as sociated with a ta g, select the tag from the list. To view the list in alphabetical order, select Option s > Name . To view the list in most fr equently used order, select Options > Populari ty . To remove an image from a tag, select the t ag and the ima ge, and select Option s > Remove from tag . Slide show Select Menu > P hotos . To view your images as a sl ide show, select an image and Options > Sl ide show > Play . The slide show starts from the selected file. To view only a selection of images as a slide show, select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark to mark the images. To start the slide show, select Options > Slide show > Play . To resume a paus ed slide show, select Continue . To end the slide show, select Back . Before starting the slide sh ow, to adjust the slide show settings, select Options > Slide show > Settings and from the following: Image order â Display images from older to newer or vice versa. Song â Select a music file from the list. Transition speed â Adjust the tempo of the slide show. To adjust the volume during the slide show, use the volume keys. TV-out mode To view the captured images and recorded video clips on a compatible TV, us e a Nokia Video Connectivit y Cable. Before viewing the images and video clips on a TV, you may need to configure the TV-out settings and aspect ratio. To view images and video clip s on a TV, do the following: 1 Connect a Nokia Video Connecti v ity Cable to the video input of a compatible TV. 2 Connect the other end of the Nokia V ideo Connectivity Cable to the Nokia AV Connector of your device. 3 You may need to select the cable mode. 4 Select Menu > Photos , and browse for the file you want to view. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 101
All audio, including active ca lls, stereo video clip audio, keypad tones, and ringing tone is routed to the TV when the Nokia Video Connectivity Ca ble is connected to the device. You can use the device microphone normally. For content other than video cl ips, the TV screen displays what is displayed on the screen of your device. Video clips are only displayed on the TV screen, not on the device screen. You can view im ages as a slid e show on the TV. All items in an album or marked imag es ar e displayed on the TV in full screen mode while the selected music plays. The quality of the TV image ma y vary due to differing screen resolutions. You cannot us e the TV as the camera viewfinder in TV-out mode. Wireless radio signals, such as incoming calls, may cause interference in the TV image. Edit images Image editor To edit an image, in Photos, scroll to the image, and select Options > Edit . To add effects to your images, select Options > Add effect . You can crop and rotate the im age; adjust the brightness, colour, contrast, and resolution; and add effects, text, clip art, or a frame to the image. Crop image To crop an image, select Optio ns > Add effect and ( Crop ). To crop the image manually, select Manual . A cross appears in the upper left and lower ri ght corner of the image. To adjust the crop borders, drag the crosses from the corners. To set the crop area, select Set . When the crop area is set, you can drag to move the crop area without ch anging the si ze or aspect ratio. When yo u are sati sfied w ith the cro p area, select Crop . If you select a predefined aspe ct ratio, the selected aspect ratio is locked when you adjust the crop borders. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 102
Reduce red-e ye To red uce re d-eye in an image, select Options > Add effect and ( Red-eye re duction ). Drag the cross onto the eye, and se lect Options > Set . Drag to resize and move the loop to outline the eye, an d select Options > Reduce red-eye effect . When you have finished editing the image, select Done . To save the changes a nd return to the previous view, select Back . Edit video clip s The video editor supports 3GP an d MP4 video file formats, and AAC, AMR, MP3, and WAV audio file formats. It does not necessarily support a ll features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. To edit video clips in Photos, scroll to a video clip, select Options > Edi t , and from the following: Merge â Add an image or a vide o clip to the beginning or the end of the selected video clip. Change sound â Add a new sound clip, and replace the original sound in the video clip. Add text â Add text to the beginning or the end of the v ideo clip. Cut â T r i m t h e v i d e o a n d m a r k t h e s e c t i o n s y o u w a n t t o k e e p in the video clip. To take a snapshot of a video cl ip, in the cut video view, select Options > Take snapshot . Image print You can pr int images from your device us ing a printer compatible with PictBridge. Yo u can only print images that are in the JPEG file format. To print images in Photos, came ra, or image viewer, mark the images, and select Options > Print . Connect to printer In the Print submenu, se lect whether you want to print the image using Bluetooth connecti vity or using a compatible USB data cable. If you want to print using a USB da ta cable, first conn ect your device to a compatible printer using the USB da ta cable, and select Image transfer as the USB connection mode. Print previe w After you select the printer, th e selected images are displayed using predefined layouts. To change the layout, scroll le ft or right to browse through the available layouts for the se lected printer. If the images do not fit on a single page, scroll up or down to display the additional pages. To select the paper size, select Paper size . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 103
To select the print quali ty, select Print quality . Share onlin e You can share im ages and vide o clips in compatible online albums, weblogs, or in othe r compatible online sharing services on the web. You can up load content, save unfinished posts as drafts and continue la ter, and view the content of the albums. The supported content types may vary depending on the service provider. To share images and videos online, y ou must have an acc ount with an online image shar ing service. You can usually subscribe to such a service on the web page of your service provider. Contact your service provider for more information. Using this service may involv e the transmission of large amounts of data throu gh your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about dat a transmission charges. The recommended connection method is WLAN. To upload a file from Photos to an online service, select Menu > Pho tos , the desired file and Opt ions > Send > Upload or Share on Ovi . For more information on th e application and compatible service providers, see the No kia product support pages or your local Nokia website. Music Warning: Continuous exposure to hi gh volume may damage y our hearing. Listen to music at a moderate level, and do n ot hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use. Play a song or a podcast Select Menu > Music > Music library . To play a song or a podcast: 1 Select categories to navigate to the song or podcasts you want to hear. 2 To play an item, select the item from the list. To pause playback, tap ; to resume, tap . To fast-forward or rewind, tap and hold or . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 104
To go to the next item, ta p . To return to the beginning of the item, tap . To skip to the previous item, tap again within 2 seconds after a song or podcast has started. To turn random pl ay ( ) on or off, select Opt ions > Shuffle play . To repeat the curren t item ( ), all items ( ), or to turn repeat off, select Options > Repeat . If you play podcasts, shuffle and repeat are automatically turned off. To modify the tone of the music playback, select Options > Equaliser . To modify the balance and ster eo image or to enhance the bass, select Options > Settings . To return to the home screen and leave the player playing in the background, press the end key. To close the player, select Options > Exit . Playlis ts Select Menu > Music > Music library and Playlists . To view details of the playlist, select Options > Playlis t details . Create a playlist 1 Select Options > New p laylist . 2 Enter a name for the playlist, and select OK . 3 To add song s now, select Yes ; or to add the songs later, select No . 4 If you select Yes , select artists to find the songs you wan t to add to the playlist. Select Add to a dd items. To show the song list unde r an artist title, select Expand . To hide the song list, select Collapse . 5 When you have made your selections, select Done . The playlist is saved to the mass memory of your device. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 105
To add more songs later, when viewing the playlist, select Options > Add songs . To add songs, albums, a rtists, genres , and composers to a playlist from the different view s of the music menu, sele ct an item and Optio ns > Add to playlist > Saved playlist or New playlist . To remove a song from a playlist, select Options > Remove . This does not delete the song from the d evice; it only removes it from the playlist. To reorder songs in a playlis t, select the song you want to move, and Optio ns > Reorder playlis t . To grab a song an d drop it to a new posi tion, select the song in the desired position and Drop . To finish reordering the playlist, select Done . Podcasts Select Menu > Music > Music li brary and Podcasts . The podcast menu displays the podcasts av ailable in the device. Podcast episodes have three states: never played, partially played, and completely played. If an episode is partially played, it plays from the last playback pos ition the next time it is played. If an episode has never been played or completely played, it plays from the beginning. Transfer music from a compu ter You can use the followi ng methods to tran sfer music: ⢠To install Nokia Music to man age and organise you r music files, download the PC software from www.music.noki a.com/download, and follow the instructions. ⢠To view your device on a computer as a mass memory device where you can transfer any data files, make the connection with a comp atible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivity. If you are using a US B data cable, select Mass storage as the connection mode. ⢠To synchronise music with Wi ndows Media Player, connect a compatible USB data cable, and select Media transfer as the connection mode. To change the default USB connection mode, select Menu > Settings and Co nnectivity > USB > USB connection mode . Ovi Music With Ovi Music (network se rvice), you can search, browse, purchase, and download music to your device. The Ovi Music service will eventu ally replace the Music store. Select Menu > Music > Music store . To download music, you firs t n eed to register for the service. Downloading music may involv e additional costs and the transmission of large amounts of data (network service). For é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 106
information about data transm ission charges, contact your network service provider. To access Ovi Music, you must h ave a valid internet access point in the device. You may be asked to select the access point to use when connecting to Ovi Music. Select the acce ss point Select Default access point . The availability and appe arance of Ovi Music settings may vary. The set tings ma y also be predefined and you may not be able to modify them. When browsing Ovi Music, you may be able to modify the settings. Modify Ovi Music set tings Select Options > Settings . Ovi Music is not available for all countries or regions. FM transmitter About the FM tra nsmitter The availability of the FM tran smitter may vary by country. At the time of wr iting, the FM transmitter ma y be used in the following European countries: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, German y, Iceland, Ireland, Lithuania , Liecht enstein, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Spain, Switzerland, Sw eden, Turkey, and United Ki ngdom. For the latest information, and the list of non-European co untries, see www.nokia.com/ fmtransmitter. With the FM transmitter, you can play songs that are stored in your device through any compat ible FM radio, such as a car radio or a home stereo system. The operating frequency of the transmitter ranges from 88.1 to 107.9 MHz. The operating distance of the FM transmitter is up to a maximum of 2 metres (6.5 feet). Obstruction s, such as walls, other electronic devices, or public radio stations may cause interference to the transmission. T he FM transmitter may cause interference to nearby FM radios operating on the same frequency. To avoid interference, always search for a free FM frequency on the receiving radio before using the FM transmitter. The FM transmitter c annot be us ed at the same time as the FM radio of your device. Play a song using FM transmitter Select Menu > Music > Music library . To play a song st ored in your device through a compat ible FM radio, do the following: 1 Select a song or a playlist to be play ed. 2 In the No w playing v iew, select Options > FM transmitter . 3 To activate the FM transmitter, select FM transmitter > On , and enter a frequenc y that is free from other transmissions. For example, if the frequency 107.8 MHz is free in your area and you tune your FM radio to it, you must also tune the FM transmitter t o 107.8 MHz. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 107
4 Tune the receiving radio to the same frequency, and select Options > Exit . To adjust the volume, use the volume fu nction in the receiving device. When the transmitter is active and transmitting, is displayed in th e home screen. If the transmit ter is active, bu t not transm itting a nything, is displayed and a periodic tone sounds. If the transmitter does not transmit anythin g for several minutes, the transmitter is automatically deactivated. FM transmitter settings Select Menu > Se ttings > Connectivity > FM transmitte r . To activate the FM transmitter, select FM transmitt er > On . To set a frequency manually, select Frequency and enter the desired value. To list the previously used frequencies, select Options > Last frequenc ies . Nokia Podcasting About Nokia Podcasting With the Nokia Podcasting ap plication, you can discover, subscribe to, and download podcasts over the air, and play, manage, and share au dio and video podc asts. Downloading and sharin g podcas t requires network support. Search podcasts The search service helps you to find podcasts by keyword or title. The search service uses the podcast search service URL that you defined in Podcasting > Options > Sett ings > Connection > Search service URL . To search for podcasts, select Menu > Appli cations > Podcast ing and Search , and enter the desired keywords. Tip: The search service looks for podcast titles and keywords in descriptions, not specific ep isodes. General topics, such as football or hip-hop, usually give better results than a specific team or artist. T o s u b s c r i b e t o m a r k e d c h a n n e l s a n d a d d t h e m t o y o u r l i s t o f subscribed podcasts, select Subscribe . You can also add a podcast by selecting its title. To start a new search, select Options > New search . To go the website of a podcast, tap the podcas t, and select Options > Open web pa ge (network service). To see the details of a podcast, tap the podcas t, and select Options > Description . To send a podcas t to another co mpatible device, tap th e podcast, and s elect Op tions > Send . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 108
Play and manage podcasts To display the avai lable episod es from the selected podcast, in Podcasts , select Open . Under each episode, you see the file format, the size of the file, and time of the upload. When the podcast is fully do wnloaded, to play the full episode, select it and Play . To update the selected podcast or marked podcasts, for a new episode, select Options > Update . To stop the updating, select Options > Stop updat e . To add a new podcast by entering the URL of the podcast, select Options > New podcast . If you do not have an access p oint defined or if during packet data connection you are asked to enter a user na me and password, contact your service provider. To edit the URL of the selected podcast, select Optio ns > Edit . To delete a downloaded podcas t or marked podcasts from your device, select Option s > Delete . To send the selected podcast or marked podcasts to a nother compatible device as .opml files as a multimedia message or by Bluetooth connectivity, select Optio ns > Send . To update, delete, and send a group of selected podcasts at once, select Options > Mark/Unmark , mark the desired podcasts, and select Options to choose the desired action. To open the website of the po dcast (network service), select Options > Open web pa ge . Some podcasts provide the opportunity to interact with the creators by commenting and voting. To connect to the internet to do this, select Options > View comments . Downloads After you have subscribed to a podcast, from directories, search, or by entering a we b address, you can manage, download, and play ep isodes in Podcasts . To see the podcasts you have subscribed to, select Podcast ing > Podcasts . To see individual episode titles (an episode is a particular media file of a podcast), select the podcast title. To start a download, select the episode title. To download or to continue to download selected or marked episodes, select Option s > Download . You can download multiple episodes at the same time. To play a portion of a podcast during download or after partial downloading, se lect the podcast and Options > Pla y preview . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 109
Fully downloaded podcasts ca n be found in the Podcasts folder, but are not shown unti l the library is refreshed. Directories To open directories, select Menu > A pplications > Podcasting and Director ies . Directories help you find new podcast episodes to which to subscribe. The contents of the directorie s change. Select the desired directory to update it (network service). The colour of the directory changes , when the upda te is complete. Directories can include podcas ts listed by popularity or themed folders. To open a themed folder, select the folder. A list of podcasts is displayed. To subscribe to a podcast, select the title and Subscribe . After you have subscribed to episodes of a podcast, you can download, manage, and play them in the podcasts menu. To add a new web directory or folder, select Options > New > Web directory or Folde r . Enter the title and URL of the outline processor markup language (OPML) file, and select Done . To edit the selected folder, web link, or web directory, select Options > Edi t . To import an OPML file stored on your device, select Options > Import OPML file . Select the location of the file, and import it. To send a directory folder as a multimedia me ssage or using Bluetooth connectivity, select the folder and Opti ons > Send . When you receive a message with an OPML file using Bluetooth connectivity, open the fi le to save the file into the Received folder in Directories. Open the folder to subscribe to any of the links to add to your podcas ts. Podcastin g settings To open Nokia Podcasting, select Menu > Applicat ions > Podcast ing . Before using Nokia Podcasting, define your connection and download settings. The recommended connection method is WLAN. Check with your service provider for term s and data service fees before using different connection methods. For example, a flat rate data plan can allo w large data transfers for one monthly fee. Connection settings To edit the connection settings, select Options > Settings > Connectio n and from the following: Default access point â Select the access point to define your connection to the internet. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 110
Search service URL â Define the podcast search servi ce URL to be used in searches. Download settings To edit the download settings, select Options > Setti ngs > Download and from the following: Save to â Define the location where you want to save your podcast s. Update in terval â Define how often podcasts a re updated. Next update date â Define the date of the next automatic update. Next update time â Define the time of the next automatic update. Automatic updates only occur if a specific default access point is selected and Nokia Podc asting is run ning. If Nokia Podcasting is not running, the auto matic updates are not activated. Download limit (%) â Define the percentage of memory that is reserved for podcast downloads. If limit ex ceeds â Defi ne what to do if the downloads exceed the download limit. Setting the application to retrieve podcasts automatically may involve the tran smission of large amo unts of data through your serv ice providerâÂÂs network. Contact your serv ice provider for information abou t data transmission cha rges. To restore the defau lt settings, select Options > Restore default in the settings view. FM radio Listen to the radio Select Menu > Music > Radio . The FM radio depends on an an tenna other than the wireless device antenna. A com patible headset or ac cessory needs to be attached to the device for the FM radio to function properly. When you open the application for the first time, you can choose to ha ve the local st ations tuned automatically. To listen to the next or the previous station, select or . To mute the radio, select . Select Options and from the following: Stations â View saved radio stations. Tune stations â Search for radio stations. Save â Save the radio station. Activate loudspeaker or Deactivate loudspe aker â Turn the loudspeaker on or off. Alternative frequencies â Select whether you want the radio to automatically search for a better RDS frequency for the station if the frequency level becomes low. Play in background â Return to the home screen with the radio playing in the background. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 111
Manage radio stations Select Menu > Music > Radio . To listen to saved st ations, sele ct Options > Stations , and select a station from the list. To remove or rename a station, select Options > Stations > Option s > Delete or Rename . To set the desired frequency m anually, select Options > Tune stations > Op tions > Manual tun ing . Videos You can download and stream video clips over the air from compatible internet video servic es (network service) using a packet data or WLAN connection . You can also trans fer video clips from a compatible PC to your device to view them. Downloading videos may involve the transmission of large amounts of data th rough your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for in formation a bout data transmission charg es. Your device may have predefined s ervices. Service providers may provide free content or charge a fee. Check the pricing in the service or from the service provider. Download and view video clips Select Menu > Videos & TV . Connect to video services To connect to a se rvice to install video se rvices, select Vi deo feeds > Video directory and the desired video service. To add a video feed manually, in the Video feeds view, select Options > Add feed > Add manually . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 112
View a video clip To browse the content of in stalled video services, select Video feeds . The content of some video servic es is divided into categories. To browse video clips, select a category. To search for a video clip in the service, select Video search . Search may not be available in all services. Some video clips can be streamed over the air, but others must be first downloaded to your device. To download a video clip, select the Download icon. Downloads continue in the background if you exit the application. The down loaded video clips are saved in My videos. To stream a video clip or view a downloaded one, select th e Play icon. To view the control keys duri ng playback, tap the screen. To adjust the volume, use the volume key. Schedule downloads To schedule an automatic download for video clips in a service, select Option s > Schedule downloads . New video clips are automatically downloa ded daily at the time you define. To cancel scheduled downloads, select Manual download as the download method. Video feeds Select Menu > Videos & TV . The content of the installed vide o services is distributed using RSS feeds. To view and manage your feeds , select Video feeds . Select Options and from the following: Feed subscriptions â Check your current feed subscriptions. Feed details â V iew information about a v ideo feed. Add feed â Subscribe to new feeds. Select Via Video directory to select a feed from the services in the video directory. Refresh feeds â Refresh the content of all feeds. Manage account â Manage your account options for a particular feed, if available. Move â Move video clips to a desired location. To view the video clips availabl e in a feed, select a feed from the list. My videos My videos is a storage plac e for all videos. You can list downloaded videos and video clips recorded with the device camera in separate views. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 113
To open a folder and view video clips, select the folder. When a video clip is playi ng, to us e the control keys for controlling the player, ta p the screen. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. Select Options and from the following: Resume down load â Resume a paused or failed download. Cancel download â Canc el a download. Video details â View information about a video clip . Memory status â View the amount of available an d used memory. Sort by â Sort video clips. Select the desired category. Move and copy â Move or copy video clips. Select Copy or Move and the desired location. Transfer vi deos from yo ur PC Transfer your own video clips from compatible devices using a compatible USB data cable. Only video clips which are in a format supported by yo ur device are shown. 1 To view your device on a PC as a mass memory device where you can transfer any da ta files, connect using a USB data cable. 2 Select Mass storage as the connection mode. 3 Select the video clips you wan t to copy from your PC. 4 Transfer the video clips to E:\My Videos in the mass memory of your device, or to F:\My Videos in a compatible memory card, if available. The transferred video clips appe ar in the My videos folder. Video settings Select Menu > Videos & TV . Select Options > Settings and from the following: Video service selectio n â Select the video services that you want to appear in the main view. You can also add, remove, edit, and view the details of a video serv ice. You cannot edit preinstalled video services. Connection settings â To define the network destination used for the network connection, select Network connecti on . To select the connection manually each time a network connection is opened, select Always ask . Parental control â Set an age limit to videos. The required password is the same as the de vice lock code. The factory setting for the lock code is 12345. In video-on-demand services, videos which have th e same or a higher age limit than you have set, are hidden . Preferred memory â Select where to save downloaded videos. If the selected memory becomes full, the device saves the videos in another memory. Thumbnails â Select whether t o download and view thumbnail images of video fe eds. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 114
Personalise your device You can person alise your device by chan ging the standby mode, main menu, tones, them es, or font size. Most of the personalisation option s, such as ch anging the fon t size, can be accessed through the device setti ngs. Change the look of your device Select Menu > Se ttings and Themes . You can use themes to change the look of the display, such as the background image. To change the theme tha t is used for all the applications in your device, select General . To preview a theme before activating it, go to the theme, and wa it for a few secon ds. To activate the theme, select Options > Set . indicates the active theme. To have an imag e or a slide show of changi ng images as the background in the home screen, select Wallpape r > Image or Slide show . To change the image displayed in the home screen when a call is received, select Call image . Profiles You can use profiles to set an d customise the ringing tones, message alert tones, and othe r tones for different events, environments, or caller groups . The name of the selected profile is displayed at the top of the home screen. If the General profile is in use, only the date is displayed. Select Menu > Settin gs and Profiles . Go to a profile, and select from the following: Activate â Activate the profile. Personalis e â Personalise the profile. Timed â Set th e profile to be active until a certain tim e within the next 24 hours. When the time expires, the profile changes back to the previously active non-timed profile. In the home screen, indicates a timed profile. The Offline profile cannot be timed. To create a new profile, select Op tions > Create new . 3-D tones With 3-D tones, you can enable three-dim ensional sound effects for ringing tones. Not all ringing tones support 3-D effects. Select Menu > Settin gs and Profiles . Go to a profile, and select Option s > Personalise . To enable a 3-D effect that is applied to the rin ging tone, select 3-D ringing tone effect and the desire d effect. To change the 3-D echo effect that is app lied to the ringing tone, select 3-D ringing tone echo and the desired effect. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 115
To listen to a 3-D effect before selecting it, go to the effect, and wait for a second. Modify the home sc reen To modify items, such as e-ma il notifications, in the home screen, select Options > Ed it content . To select an image or image slide show as the backgroun d image in the home screen, select Menu > Settings and Themes > Wallpaper . To change the clock shown in the home scre en, tap the clock in the home screen, and select Options > Settings > Clock type . Modify the main menu In the menu you can access th e functions in your device. To open the main menu, press the menu key. To change the menu view, select Op tions > List view or Grid view . To reorganise the main menu, select Options > Organise . For example, to move a menu icon to another folder, select the icon, Optio ns > Move to folder , and the new folder. You can also drag and drop an icon to a new location in the main menu. Applications Calendar To open the calendar, select Menu > Calendar . Calendar views To switch between month, week , and to-do note view, select Options > Change view > Day , Week , or To-do . To change the sta rting day of the week, the view that is shown when you open the calen dar, or the calendar alarm settings, select Options > Settings . To go to a certain date, select Opti ons > Go to date . Calendar toolbar From the toolbar, select from the following: Next view â Select the month view. Next view â Select the week view. Next view â Select the day view. Next view â Select the to-do view. New meeti ng â Add a new meeting reminder. New to-do note â Add a new to-do note. Create a calendar entry 1 To add a new calendar entry, tap the desired date, select Option s > New e ntry and from the following: é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 116
Meeting â Add a reminder of your meeting. Meeting request â Create and send a new meeting request. You must have a mailbox set up for sending requests. Memo â Write a general note for the day. Anniversary â Add a reminder of birthdays or special dates (entries are repeated annually). To-do note â A dd a reminder of a task that must be done by a specific date. 2 Fill in all the fields. Tap a field to enter the text. To close the text inpu t, select . To add a description to an entry, select Optio ns > Add description . 3 To save the entry, select Done . When the calendar alarm sounds, s elect Silence to mute the alarm. To stop the calendar alarm, select Stop . To set the alarm to snooze, select Snooze . To define the period after w h ich the calendar alarm sounds again when set to snooze, select Options > Settings > Alarm snooze time . Manage calendar entries To delete several events at a time, open th e month view, and select Option s > Delete entry > Before selected date or All entries . To mark a task as complet ed in the to-do view, select the task and Options > Mark as done . To send a calendar note to a compatible device, select Options > Send . If the oth er device is not compatible wit h Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), the ti me information of received calendar entries may not be displayed correctly. Clock Set time and date Select Menu > Applications > Clock . Select Options > Settings and from the following: Time â Set the t ime. Date â Set the date. Automatic time up date â Set the network to a utomatically update the time, date, and time zone information for your device (network service). Alarm clock Select Menu > Applications > Clock . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 117
To set a new alarm , select New alarm . Set the alar m time. Select Repeat to set whether and when the a larm is repeated, and select Done . To view your active and ina ctive alarms, select Alarms . When the alarm is acti ve, is displayed. When the alarm is repeated, is displayed. To remove an alarm, select Alarms, scroll to the a larm, and select Options > Delete alarm . To turn off th e alarm when the alarm expires, select Stop . To snooze the alarm, select Snooze . If your device is switched o ff when an alarm ex pires, your device switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. To define the snooze time, select Options > Settings > Alarm snooze time . To change the alarm tone, select Op tions > Settings > Clock alarm tone . World clock Select Menu > Applications > Clock . To view the cur rent time in different locations, select World clock . To add locations to the list, select Op tions > Add location . To set your current location, scroll to a location, and select Options > Set as curre nt location . The tim e in your dev ice is changed according to the sele cted location. En sure that the time is correct and matches your tim e zone. RealPlayer With RealPlayer, you can pla y video clips or stream media files over the air without saving them to the device firs t. RealPlayer does not necessarily support all file formats or all the variations of file formats. Play vid eo clips Select Menu > Applications > RealPlayer . To play a video clip, select Video clips , and a clip. To list recently played files, in the application main view, select Recently played . In the list of video clips, scroll to a clip, select Op tions and from the following: Use video clip â Assign a video to a contact or set it as a ringing tone. Mark/Unmark â Mark items in the list to send or delete multiple items at the same time. View details â View details of the selected item, such as format, resolution, and duration. Settings â Edit settings for vi deo playback and streaming. In the Video clips, Recently played and Streaming links views, the following toolbar icons may be available: é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 118
Send â Send a video clip or streaming link. Play â Play the video clip or video stream. Delete â Delete the video clip or streaming link. Remove â Remove a file from the recently played list. Stream content ov er the air In RealPlayer, you can only open an RTSP link. However, RealPlayer plays a RAM fi le if you open an HTTP link to it in a browser. Select Menu > Applications > RealPlayer . To stream content over the air (network service), select Streaming links and a link. You can also receive a s treaming link in a text mess age or mult imedia message, or open a link on a web page. Before live content begins st reaming, your device connects to the site a nd starts loading the content. Th e content is no t saved in your device. RealPlayer settings Select Menu > Applications > RealPlayer . You may receive RealPlayer settings in a special messa ge from your service provider. For more information, contact your service provider. To select the settings for the video, select Option s > Settings > Video . To select whether to use a prox y server, to change the default access point, and to set th e port range used when conn ecting, select Option s > Settings > Streaming . For the correct settings, contact your service provider. 1 To edit the advanced settings, select Options > Settings > Streaming > Network > Options > Advanced settings . 2 To select the bandw idth used for a network ty pe, select the network type and the desired value. To edit the bandwidth yourself, select User define d . Recorder You can use the recorder to record voice memos and telephone conversations. You can a lso send sound clips to your friends. Select Menu > Applications > Recorder . Record a sound clip Select . Stop recording a sound clip Select . Listen to the sound clip Select . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 119
Send a sound clip as a message Select Options > Send . Record a telephone conversation Open the recorder during a voice call, and select . Both parties hear a tone at reg ula r intervals duri ng recording. Select the recordin g quality or where to save sou nd clips Select Options > Settings . The recorder cannot be used when a data call or GPRS connection is active. Notes Write notes To write a note, select Options > New not e . Tap the note field to enter text, and select . You can save p lain text files (. txt file format) you receive to Notes. Manage notes Select Menu > Applications > Notes . Select Options and from the following: Open â Open the note. Send â Send the note to other compatible devices. Delete â Delete a note. You can also delete several notes at once. To mark each note you want t o delete, select Options > Mark/Unmark , and delete the notes. Synchronisation â Synchronise the notes with comp atible applications on a compatible device, or define the synchronisation settings. Office File manager About File manager Select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . With File manager, you can brow se, manage, and open files on your device, mass memory, memory card, or a compatible extern al drive. The available options depend on the memory you select. Find a nd orga nise files Select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . To find a file, select Option s > Find . Enter a search text that matches the file name. To move and copy files and folders, or to create new folders in the memo ry, select Options > Organi se and the desired option. To sort files, select Options > Sort by and the desired category. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 120
Edit the memory card You can format a memory card to erase the data on it, or you can protect the data on the me mory card with a password. Select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . Rename or format a memory card Select Options > Memory card opti ons and the desired option. Password protect a memory card Select Options > Memory card pass word . These options are available only if a compatible memory card is inserted in the device. Back up files on a memory card Select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . To back up files, select the fi le types you w ant to back up o n a memory card and Options > Back up now . Ensure that your memory card has enough free memory for the files that you have chosen to back up . Format mass memory Select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . When the mass memory is refo rmatted, all data in the memory is permanen tly lost. Back up data you want to keep before formatting the mass memory. You can use Nokia Ovi Suite to back up data to a co mpatible comp uter. Digital rights management (DRM) tech nologies may prevent some ba ckup data from being restored. For more information about DRM used for your content, contact your service provider. To format the mass memory, select Op tions > Format mass memory . Do not format the mass memory using PC software because it may cause degraded per formance. Formatting does not guarantee that a ll confidential data s t o r e d i n t h e d e v i c e m a s s m e m o r y i s p e r m a n e n t l y d e s t r o y e d . Standard formatting only marks the forma tted area as available space and delet es the address to find the fi les again. The recovery of formatted or ev en overwritten data may still be possible with special recov ery tools and software . Dictionary Select Menu > Applications > Office > Dictionary . To translate words from one la nguage to another, enter text in the search field. As you en ter text, suggestions of words to translate are displa yed. To translate a word , select the word from the list. All languages may not be supported. Select Options and from the following: Listen â Listen to the selected word. History â Find previously translated words from th e current session. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 121
Languages â Change the source or target language, download languages from th e internet, or remove a language from the dictionary. You cannot remove the Eng lish language from the dictionary . You can have two addition al languages installe d, besides English. Speech â Edit the voice feature settings. You can adjust t he speed and volume of the voice. Quickoffice About Quicko ffice Select Menu > Applications > Office > Quickoffice . Quickoffice consists of Quickword for viewing Microsoft Word documents, Quicksheet for viewing Microsoft Excel worksheets, Quickpoint for Microsoft PowerPoint presentations, and Quickmanag er for purchasing software. You can view Microsoft Office 2000, XP, 2003, and 2007 documents (DOC, XLS, and PPT fi le formats) with Quickoffice. If you have the editor version of Quickoffice, you can also edit files. Not all file formats or features are supported. Converter With Converter, you can convert measures from one unit to another. The converter has limited accura cy, and rounding errors may occur. Currency converter Select Menu > Applications > Office > Converter . Select Type > Currency . Before you can make currency conversions, you must sele ct a base currency and add exchange rates. The defau lt base currency is Home. The rate of the base currency is always 1. 1 Select Options > Currency rates . 2 The default name for the currency i tems is Foreign. T o rename a currency, select Options > Rename currency . 3 Add the exchange rates fo r the currencies, and select Done . 4 In the other Un it field, sele ct the currency to which you want to convert. 5 In the first A mount field, enter the value you want to convert. The other Amount field shows the converted value automa tically. To change the base currency, select Option s > Currency rates , a currency and Options > Set as base currency . When you change base curre ncy, you must enter new exchange rates because all prev iously set exchange rates are cleared. Convert meas ures Select Menu > Applications > Office > Converter . 1 In the Type field, select the measure you want to use. 2 In the first Unit field, select the unit from which you want to convert. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 122
3 In the other Unit field , sele ct the unit to wh ich you want to convert. 4 In the first Amount field, enter th e value you want to convert. The other Amount field shows the converted value automatically. Calculator Make calculations Select Menu > Applications > Office > Calculator . This calculator has limited a ccuracy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculation, en te r the first number of the calculation. To remove a numb er, select the backspace key. Select a functi on such as a dd or subtract. Enter the second number of the calculation, and select = . Save calculations To save the results of a calculation, select Options > Memory > Save . The saved result re places the previously stored result in the memory. To retrieve the results of a ca lculation from the me mory and use them in a calculation, select Options > Memory > Recall . To view the last saved result , select Optio ns > Last result . Exiting the Calculator applicat ion or switching off the device does not clear the memory. You can recall the last saved result the next time you open the Calcu lator application. Zip manag er Select Menu > Applications > Office > Zip . With Zip manager, you can creat e new archive files to store compressed ZIP formatted file s; add single or multiple compressed files or directories to an archive; set, clear, or change the archiv e password for protected archives; and change settings, su ch as the level of compression used. You can save the archived files in the device memory or on a memory card. Active notes Active notes allo ws you to crea te notes that con tain images and sound o r video clips . You can als o link a note to a contac t. The note is displayed during a call with the contact. Create and edit no tes Select Menu > Applications > Office > Active notes . To create a note, start w riting. To edit a note, select the note and Options > Editing options . é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 123
To add boldface, italics, or underlining to your text or change the font colour, press and hold the Shift key, and scroll to select the text. Then select Options > Text . Select Options and from the following: Insert object â Insert images, sound or video clips, business cards, web bookmarks, and files. Send â Send the note. Link note to call â Select Add contacts to link a note to a contact. The note is di splayed when making a ca ll to or receiving a call from the contact. Settings fo r Active notes Select Menu > Applications > Office > Acti ve notes and Options > Sett ings . To select where t o save notes, select Memory in use and the desired memory. To change the layout of activ e notes, or to view the n otes as a list, select Change view > Gri d or Li st . To see a note in the backgrou nd when making or receiving phone calls, select Show note during call > Yes . Adobe Re ader Select Menu > Applications > Office > Adobe PDF . With Adobe Reader, you can rea d PDF documents with your device; search for text in th e documents; modify settings, such as zoom level and page vi ews; and send PDF files using e-mail. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 124
Settings Some settings may be preset fo r the device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change them. Phone settings Date and time se ttings Select Menu > Se ttings and Phone > Date and time . Select from the following: Time â Enter the current time. Time zone â Select your location. Date â Enter th e date. Date format â Select the date format. Date separator â Select the symbol that separates days, months, and years. Time format â Select the time format. Time separator â Select the symbol that separates hours and minutes. Clock type â Select the cloc k type. Clock alarm tone â Select the tone for the alarm clock. Alarm snooze time â Adjust the snooze time. Workdays â Select your working days. You can then set an alarm only for working da y mornings, for example. Automatic ti me update â To update the time, date, and time zone, select On . This network service may not be available on all networks . Speech Select Menu > Settin gs > Phone > Speech . With Speech, you can set the langu age, voice, and voice properties for the message reader. To set the language for the messa ge reader, select Langua ge . To download additional languages to your device, select Options > Download languages . Tip: When you download a new la nguage, you must download at least one v oice for that language. To set the speaking voice, select Voice . The voice depends on the selected language. To set the speaking rate, select S peed . To set the speaking volume, select Volume . To view details of a voice, open the voice tab, and select the voice and Options > Voice details . T o listen to a voice, select the voice and Options > Play voi ce . To delete languages or v oices, select the item and Options > Delete . Message reader settings To change the messa ge reader settings, open the S ettings tab, and define the following: é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 125
Language detection â Activate automatic reading language detect ion. Continuous reading â Activate continuous reading of all selected messages. Speech prompts â Set the message reader to insert prompts i n messages. Audio source â Lis ten to messages through the earpiece or loudspeaker. Language settings Select Menu > Se ttings and Phone > Language . To change the device language, select Phone l anguag e . To change the writing la nguage, select Writing language . To turn predictive text input on or off, select Predictive text . Display settings Select Menu > Se ttings and Phone > Display . Select from the following: Light sensor â Adjust the light se nsor sensitivity of your device. The light sensor turns th e lights on when the li ghting of your location is dim an d off when it is bright. Font size â Select the size of text and icons on t he display. Welcome note / l ogo â Select whether you want to display a note or image when you switch on the device. Light time-out â Set how long the light s tays on when you stop using the device. Voice commands To activate enhanced voice com mands, to start applications and profiles, press and hold th e call key in the home screen. To control your device with enhanced voice commands, press and hold the call key in the home screen, and say a voice command. The voice command is the name of the application or profile displayed in the list. Select Menu > Settin gs and Phone > Voice commands . Select Options and from the following: Change command â Edit the voice commands. Playback â Listen to the synthesise d voice tag. Remove voice command â Remove a voice command that you added manually. Settings â Adjust the settings. Voice command tutorial â Open the tutorial for voice commands. Sensor settings and display rotation When you activate the sensors in your device, you can control certain functions by turning the device. Select Menu > Settin gs and Phone > Sensor sett ings . Select from the following: é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 126
Sensors â Activate the sensors. Turning control â Select Silencing calls and Snoozing alarms to mute calls and snooze alarms by turning your device so that the disp lay faces down. Select Auto-rotate display to rotate the display content aut omatically when you turn the device on its left side or back to a vertical position. Some applications and features m ay not support rotating the display content. Slide settin gs Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Sl ide settings . To set the device to lock the keypad when you close the s lide, select Lock keys wit h slide close . Accessory settings Select Menu > Se ttings and Phone > Accessories . Some accessory connectors indi cate which type of accessory is connected to the device. Select an accessory and from the following: Default profile â Set the profile that you want activated each time you connect a certai n compatible accessory to your device. Automatic an swer â Select whether you want the device to answer an incomi ng call automatically after 5 seconds. If the ringing type is set to Beep once or Si lent , automa tic answer is disabled. Lights â Set whether lights rema in on after the time-out. The available settings depend on the type of accessory. TV-out settings To change the settings for a TV-out connection, select TV- Out and from the following: Default profile â Set the profi le that you w ant activated each time you connect a Nokia Video Connectivity Cable to your device. TV aspect ratio â Select the aspect ratio of the TV: Normal or Widescre en for widescreen TVs. TV system â Select th e analogue video signal syst em that is compatible with your TV. Flicker filter â To improve image quality on the screen of your TV, select On . The flicker filter may not diminish image flicker on all TV screens. Application se ttings Select Menu > Settin gs and Phone > Application sett. . In application settings, you can edit the sett ings of some of the applications in your device. To edit the settin gs, you can also select O ptions > Sett ings in each application. Device updates With Device updates, you can co nnect to a server a nd receive configuration settings for your device, create new server profiles, view existing software version and device information, or view and manage existing server profiles. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 127
Select Menu > Se ttings and Phone > Phone mg mt. > Device updates . If software updates over the air are supported by your network, you may a lso be able to request up dates through the device. You may receive server profiles and different configuration settings from your service providers and company information manage ment department. These configuration settings may include connection and other settings used by different applications in your device. Receive configuration settings 1 Select Options > Server prof iles . 2 Go to a profile, and select Op tions > Start configuration . Create a server profile Select Options > Server pr ofiles > Options > New server profile . Delete a server profile Select Options > Delet e . Security settin gs Phone and SIM Select Menu > Se ttings and Phone > Phone mg mt. > Security settin gs > Phone and SIM card . Select from the following: PIN code reques t â When active, the code is requested each time the device is switched on. De activating the PIN code request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. PIN code , PIN2 code , and Lock code â You can change the PIN code, PIN2 code, and lock code. These codes can only include numbers from 0 to 9. Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency number. If you fo rget the PIN or PIN2 code, contact your service provider. If you forget the lock code, contact a Nokia Care point or your service provider. Phone autolock p eriod â To avoid unauthorised use, you can set a time-out after which the device automatically locks. A locked device cannot be used until the correct lock code is entered. To turn off the autolock period, select None . Lock if SIM card changed â You can set the device to ask for the lock code when an unkn own SIM card is inserted into your device. The device mai ntains a list of SIM cards tha t are recognised as the ownerâÂÂs cards. Remote phone locking â Enable or disable remote lock. Closed user group â You c an specify a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you (network service). Confirm SIM ser vices â You can se t the device to display confirmation me ssages when you are using a SIM card service (network service). Certificate management Select Menu > Settin gs and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Security settings > Certificate management . Digital certificates should be used if you wan t to connect to an online bank or another site or remote server for actions é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 128
that involve transferring co nfidential information. They should also be used if you want to reduce the risk of viruses or other malicious software an d be sure of th e authenticity of software when downloadin g and installing software. Select from the following: Authority cert ificates â View and edit authority certificates. Trusted site ce rtificates â View and edit trusted site certificates. Personal certificates â View and edit personal certificates. Phone certificates â View and edit device certificates. Digital certificates do not guar antee safety; they are used to verify the origin of software. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connecti ons and software insta llation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; the certificate manager must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increased security to be available. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid y et" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, chec k that the current date and time i n your device are correct. View certificate details â check authenticity You can only be s ure of the co rrect identity of a server when the signature and the validity pe riod of a server certificate have been checked. You are notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the corr ect security certificate in your device. To check the details of a certificate, select Options > Certificate details . The validity of the certificate is checked, and one of the following notes may be displayed: Certificate not trusted â You have not set a ny application to use the certificate. Expired certificate â The certificate validity period has ended. Certificate not va lid yet â The certificate validity period has not y et begun. Certificate corrupted â The certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issuer. Change the tru st settings Before changing any certificat e sett ings, you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belong s to the listed owner. To change the settings for an authority certificate, select Options > Trust settings . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications th at can use the selected certificate is shown. For example: Symbian installation : Yes â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. Internet : Yes â The certificate is able to certify servers. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 129
App. installation : Yes â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Java⢠application. To change the value, s elect Opt ions > Change trust setting . Security module Select Menu > Se ttings and Phone > Phone mg mt. > Security settin gs > Security module . To view or edit a security module (if available), select it from the list. To view detailed information abou t a security module, select Options > Securi ty details . Restore origina l settings Select Menu > Se ttings and Phone > Phone mg mt. > Factory settings . You can reset some of the settings to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. After resetting, the device may take a long er time to power on. Documents and fi les are unaffected. Protected content To manage digital righ ts licences, select Menu > Settings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Security se ttings > Protected content . Digital rights management Content owners may use different types of digital rights management (DRM) technologies to protect their intellectual property, including copyrights. Th is device uses various types of DRM software to access DRM-protected cont ent. With this device you can access content protected with WMDRM 10, OMA DRM 1.0, and OMA DRM 2.0. If certain DRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask tha t such DRM software's ability to access new D RM-protected content be revoked. Revocation may also prevent renewal of such DRM- protected content already in yo ur device. Revocation of such DRM software does not affect the use of content protected with other types of DRM or the use of non-DRM-protected content. Digital rights mana gement (DRM) p rotected content comes with an associated licence that defines your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM-protec ted content, to back up both the activation keys an d the content, use the backup feature of Nokia Ovi Suite. If your device has WMDRM-p rotected content, both the licence and the content will be lost if the device memory is formatted. You may also lose the licence and the content if the files on your device get corrupted. Losing the licence or the content may limit your ability to use the same content on your device again. For more information, co ntact your serv ice provider. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 130
Some licence may be connected to a s pecific SIM card, and the protected content can be access ed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. Notification lights Select Menu > Se ttings and Phone > Notification li ghts . To turn the standby breathing light on or off, select Standby br. light . When the standby breathing lig ht is turned on, the menu key lights up periodically. To turn the no tification light on or off, select Notifi cation light . When the notification light is turned on, the menu key ligh ts up for a period you define to notify of missed events , such as missed calls or unrea d messages. Application manager About Applicati on manager Select Menu > Settings and Application mgr. . With Application mana ger, you can see the software packages installed in your de vice. You can view details of installed applications, remo ve applications, and define installation settings. You can install the followi ng types of applicati ons and software: ⢠JME applications based on Ja va⢠technology with .jad or .jar file extensions ⢠Other applications and software suitable for the Symbian operating system with .sis or .sisx file extensions ⢠Widgets with the .wgz file extension Only install software that is compatible with your device. Install applications You can transfer installation files to your device from a compatible computer, download them during browsin g, or receive them in a multimed ia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using other co nnectivity methods, such as Bluetooth connectivity. You can use N okia Application I nstaller in N okia Ovi Suite to install an application to your device. Icons in Application manage r indicate the following: SIS or SISX applicati on Java application widgets application installed in the memory card application installe d in the mass memory Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such a s applications that are Symbian Signed or hav e passed the Java Verified⢠testing. Before installation, note the following: é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 131
⢠To view the application type , version number, and the supplier or manufacturer of the application, select Options > View details . To view the security certificate details of the application, select Details: > Certificates: > View details . Control the use of digital certificate s in Certificate management. ⢠If you install a file tha t contains an update or repair to an existing application, you ca n only restore the original application if you ha ve the original inst allation file or a full backup copy of the removed software package. To restore the original applicat ion, remove the application, and install the ap plication again from the original installation file or the backup copy. The JAR file is required for in stalling Ja va applicat ions. If it is missing, the device may as k you to download it. I f there is no access point de fined for the application, you are asked to select one. To install an applicat ion, do the following: 1 To locate an insta llation file, select Menu > Settings and Application mgr. . Alternatively, search installation files using File manager, or select Messaging > In box , and open a message that contains a n installation file. 2 In Applicat ion manager, select Options > Install . In other applications, select the in stallation file to start the installation. During installation , the device shows information about the progress of the insta llation. If you install an application withou t a digital signature or certification, the device displays a warning. Continue installation only if you are sure of the or igin and contents of the application. To start a n installed applic ation , locate the application in the menu, and select the application. If the appli cation does not have a default folder defined, it is installed in the Installed apps. folder in the main menu. To see which software packages are installed or removed and when, select Opt ions > View log . Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one application wi th antivirus functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functi oning. After you install applications to a compatible memory card, installation files (.si s, .sisx) remain in the device memory. The files may use large amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To mainta in s ufficient memory, use Nokia Ovi Suite to back up installation files to a compatible PC, then use the file manager to remove the installation files from the device memory. If the .sis file is a message at tachment, delete the message from the Messaging inbox. Remove applications Select Menu > Settin gs and Application mgr. . To remove a software package, select Installed apps. > Options > Unins tall . Select Yes to confirm. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 132
If you remove software, you can only reinstall it if you have the original software package or a full backup of the removed software package. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to open documents created with that software. If another software packag e depends on the software package that you removed, the other software packag e may stop working. Refer to the do cumentation of the installed software package for details. Application manager settings Select Menu > Se ttings and Application mgr. . Select Installatio n settings and from the following: Software ins tallation â Select whether Symbian soft ware that has no verified digita l signature can be installed. Online certificate check â S elect to check the online certificates before inst alling an application. Default web address â Set the default web address used when checking onli ne certificates. Calling se ttings Call settings Select Menu > Se ttings . Select Calling > Call and from the following: S e n d m y c a l l e r I D â S e l e c t Yes t o s h o w y o u r p h o n e n u m b e r to the person you are calling. To use the setting agreed upon with your service provider, select Set by networ k ) (network service). Send my internet call ID â S e l e c t Yes to show yo ur internet call ID to the person you are calling. Call waiting â Activate your device to notify you of incoming calls while you are i n a call (network service), or check whether the function is activated. Internet call waiting â Activate your device to notify you of a new incoming internet call while you are in a call. Internet call ale rt â Select On to set your device to alert for incoming internet calls. If you select Off , you receive only a notification if you missed a call. Reject call with message â Activate rejecting a call with a text message to inform the caller wh y you could not answer the call. Message text â Write the standard text message that is sent when you reject a call. Own video in recvd. call â Selec t to allow or deny video sending during a video call from your device. Image in video call â If video is not sent during a video call, you can select a still im age to be displayed instead. Automatic redial â Set your device to make a maximum of 10 attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful call attempt. To stop automat ic redialling, press the end key. Show call duration â Set the length of a call to be displayed during the call. Summary after call â Set the length of a call to be displayed after the call. Speed dialling â Activate speed dialling. Anykey answ er â Activate an ykey answer. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 133
Line in use â This setting (network service) is shown only if the SIM card supports two su bs criber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phon e line you want to use for making calls and sending text messages. Ca lls on both lines can be answered irrespective of the selected line. If you select Line 2 and have not subscribed to this network service, you are not able to make calls. When line 2 is selected, is show n in the home screen. Line change â Select to prevent line selection (network service), if supported by your SI M card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Call divert Select Menu > Se ttings and Calling > Call divert . Call divert allows you to divert incoming calls to your voice mailbox or another phone number. For details, contact your service provider. 1 Select the type of calls to divert and a diverting option. For example, to divert all voice calls, select Voice calls > All voice calls . 2 To activate call divert, select Activate . 3 To divert calls to your voice mailbox, select To voice mailbox . 4 To divert calls to anot her phone number, select To other number , and enter the number, or select Find to retrieve a number saved in t he contacts list. Several diverting opti ons can be active at the same time. When all calls are diverted, is displayed in the home screen. Call barring Call barring (network service) a llows you to restrict the calls that you make or receive with the device. For example, you can restrict all outgoing intern ational calls or incoming calls when you are abroad . To change the settings, you need the barring password from your service provider. Select Menu > Settin gs and Calling > Call barring . When security features that re strict calls are in use (s uch as call barring, closed user group, and fixed dialling), calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at the sa me time. Voice call barring Select the desired barring option and Activate , Deactivate , or Check status . Call barring affects a ll calls, including data calls. Intern et call b arring To select whether anonymous calls are allowed from the internet, select Anonymous call barrin g . é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 134
Troubleshooti ng To view frequently asked ques tions about your device, see the product support pages a t www.nokia.com/support . Q: What is my pas sword for the loc k, PIN, or PUK codes ? A: The default lock code is 12345. If you forget the lock code, contact your device dealer. If you forget a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network service provider. For information about passwords, contac t your a ccess point provider, for example, a commerc ial internet service p rovider (ISP) or network service provider. Q: How do I close an applic at ion that is not responding? A: Select Options > Sh ow open apps. , and go to the application using the men u key. Press and hold the menu key to open the application, and s elect Optio ns > Exit . Q: Why do images l ook smudgy? A: Ensure that the camera len s protection windows are clean. Q: Why do missing, d iscoloured, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I switch on my d evice? A: This is a characteristic of this type of display. Some displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fau lt. Q: Why can't my No kia device establ ish a GPS connecti on? A: Establishing a GPS co nnection may t ake from a couple of seconds to several minutes. Establishing a GPS connection in a vehicle may take longer. If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better signal. If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. Ensure that your hand does not cover the GPS antenna of your device. If th e weather cond itions are bad, the signal strength may be affecte d. Some vehicles have tinted (athermic) windows, whi ch may block the satellite signals. Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs device while using Bluetooth connect ivity? A: Check that both devices are compatible , have activated Bluetooth connectivity, and are not in hidden m ode. Check also that the distance between the two devices is not over 10 metres (33 feet) and that th ere are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 135
Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a Bluetooth connection? A: If another device is connecte d to your device, you can close the connection from the other device or deactivate Bluetooth connectivity in your device. Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Bluetooth > Bluetooth > Off . Q: Why can't I see a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point even though I know I'm within it s range? A: The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You ca n only access networks that use a hidden SSID if you know t he correct SSID, and hav e created a WLAN internet access point fo r the network on your Nokia device. Q: How do I turn the wireless LAN (WLAN) off on my Nokia device? A: The WLAN on your Nokia device is deactivated when you are not connected or trying to conn ect to another access point, or not scanni ng for available networks . To further reduce battery cons umptio n, you can spec ify that your Nokia device does not scan, or s cans less often, for available networks in the background. The WLAN is deactivated in between background scans. To change the background scan settings, do the following: 1 Select Menu > Se ttings and Connectivity > WLAN . 2 To increase the background sc an time interval, adjust the time in Scan for networks. To stop background scans, select Show WLAN availa bility > Never . 3 To save your changes, se lect Back . When Show WLAN availab ility is set to Never , the WLAN availability icon is not displayed in the home screen. However, you can still manually scan for available WLAN networks, an d connect to WLAN networks as usual. Q: What do I do if the memory is full? A: Delete items from the memory. If Not enough memory to perform operat ion. Delete some data first. or Memo ry low. Delete som e data from phone memory. is displayed when you are deleting several items a t the same time, delete items one by one, beginning with the smallest ite ms. Q: Why canâÂÂt I sele ct a contact for my m essage? A: The contact card does not have a phone number, address, or e-mail address. Select Menu > Contacts and the relevant contact, and edit the contact card. Q: How can I end the data co nnection wh en the device starts a data connection again and again? A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia message ce ntre. To stop the device from making a data connection, select Menu > Messaging and Options > Sett ings > Multimedia message > Multimedia retrieval . Select Ma nual to hav e the multimed ia messag ing é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 136
centre save messages to be retrieved later, or Off to ignore all incoming multimedia messages. I f you select Manual , you receive a notification when yo u have a new message in the multimedia message centre. If you select Off , the device does not make any network connections related to multimedia messaging. To set the device to use a pa cket data connection only if you start an applicati on or action that needs it, s elect Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Admin. settings > Packet data > Packet data conne ction > When need ed . If this does not help, switch th e device off and then on again. Q: Can I use my Nokia devi ce as a fax modem with a compatible PC? A: You cannot use your device as a fax modem. However, with call diverting (network service) , you can divert incom ing fax calls to a fax number. Q: How do I calibra te the screen ? A: The screen is calibrated at th e factory. If it is necessary to recalibrate the screen, select Menu > Settings and Phone > Touch input > Touch screen calibratio n . Follow the instruct ions. Green tips Save energy You do not need to charge your battery so often if you do the following (if available for your device): ⢠Close applications and data connections, for example, your Bluetooth connection, when not in use. ⢠Decrease the brightness of the screen. ⢠Set your device to enter power saver mode after the minimum period of inactivity, if available in your device. ⢠Deactivate unnecessary so unds, su ch as key tones. Recycle All materials o f this device c a n be recovered as materials an d energy. For information on how to recycle your old Nokia products, go to www.nokia .com/werecycle, or using a mobile device, nokia.mobi/werecycle. Recycle packaging and user guides at your local recycling scheme. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 137
The crossed-out wheeled-bin symbol on your product, battery, literature, or packaging reminds you that all electrical and electronic products, batteries, and accumulators must be taken to sepa rate collection at the en d of their working life. This requirement applies in the European Union. Do not di spose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. Fo r more information on the environmental attributes of y our device, see www.nokia.com/ecodeclaration. Product and safety information Acces sori es Warning: Use only batter ies, chargers, and accessories approved by Nokia for use with this particular mod el. The use of any ot her types may invalida te any approval or warranty, and may be danger ous. In particular, use of unapproved chargers or batteries may present a risk of fir e, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. For availability of approved accessories, p lease check with your deale r. When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory , grasp and pull the p lug, not the cord. Battery and charger info rmation Battery and charger info rmation Your device is powered b y a rechargeable ba ttery. The ba ttery intended for use wit h this device is BP-4L . Noki a may m ake addi tional battery models availa ble for this dev ice. Th is device is in tended for use wh en supplied with power from the f ollowing char gers: AC-10. The exact charger model number may vary depending on the type of plug. The plug variant is identified by one of the follo wing: E, EB, X, AR, U, A, C, K, o r UB. The battery can be charged and discharged hund red s of times, but it will eventually wear out. When the tal k and standby times a re noticeably shorter than normal, re place the battery. Use on ly Nokia approved bat teries, and recharge your b attery only with Nokia approve d charger s desig nated for this de vice. If a battery is being used for the first t ime or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged period , it may be necessary to connect the charger, then disco nnect and reconnect it to begin ch arging the battery. If the battery is compl etely discharged , it may take several minutes befor e the charging indicator appears on the di splay or before any calls can be made. Safe removal. Alw ays switch the d evice of f and disco nnect the charger befor e removing the battery. Proper charging. Unplug the charger from the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave a fully charged battery connected to a charger, since o vercharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully char ged battery will lose its cha rge over time. Avoid extreme temper atures. Always try to keep the battery between 15 ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). Extr eme temperatures r educe the capacity and l ifetime of the batt ery. A device with a hot or cold bat tery may not work t emporarily. Battery per formance is parti cularly limited in tem peratures well below fre ezing. Do not short-circuit . Accidental short-cir cuiting can occur when a metallic obje ct such as a coin, clip, or pe n causes direct connection of the positive ( ) and negative (-) terminals of the batt ery. (These look like metal stri ps on the batte ry.) This might happen, for example, when yo u carry a spare battery in your pocket or pur se. Short-circ uiting the terminals may damage the batter y or the connecting object. Disposal. Do no t dispose of b atteries in a fire as they ma y explode. Di spose of batt eries according to local regulat ions. Please recycle when possib le. Do not dispose as household waste. Leak. Do not dismantle, cut, o pen, crush, be nd, puncture, or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a battery leak, prevent batte ry liquid con tact with sk in or eyes. If this happens, flush the affected are as immediately with water, or see k medical help. Damage. Do not mod ify, remanufacture, attempt to insert foreign obje cts into the battery, or immerse or e xpose it to water or othe r liquids. B atteries may ex plode if damaged. Correct use. U se the battery only for its in tended purpose. Improper b attery use may result in a fire, explosion, or other hazard. If the device or batte ry is dropped, especially on a hard sur face, and you bel ieve the batter y has been damaged, take it to a se rvice centre for inspection before continuing to use it. Never us e any charger or batter y that is damaged. Keep your batt ery out of the r e ach of small chi ldren. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 138
Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia bat teries for your sa fety. To check that you are gett ing an original Noki a battery , purch ase it from a No kia auth orised servic e centre or dealer, and inspect the ho logram label using the follow ing steps: Authenticate hologram 1 W hen you look at the hologram on t he label, you should see the Nokia conne cting hands symbol from o ne angle and the Nokia Origina l Enhancements logo when looking from another ang le. 2 When you a ngle the hologram left, right, down and up, you should see 1, 2, 3 and 4 dots on ea ch side respectively. Successful completion o f the steps is not a total ass urance of the authenti city of the battery. If you cannot confirm authenticity or if you have any reason to belie ve that your Nokia battery wi th the hologram on the label is no t an authentic Noki a battery, you should refrain fro m using it, and take it to the nearest Nokia authorised service centre or dealer for assi stance. To find out more about original No kia batteries, see www.noki a.com/battery. Taking car e of your device Your devi ce is a prod uct of sup erior des ign and craft smanship and should be tr eated with care. The following suggestions will he lp you protect your warranty coverage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Precipit ation, humid ity, and all types o f liquids o r moisture can contain minerals that will corr ode elec tronic circuits. If yo ur device does ge t wet, remove t he battery, and allow the de vi ce to dry compl etely before re placing it. ⢠D o no t u se o r s to r e t he d ev ic e in d us ty , dirty areas. Its moving parts and ele ctronic compone nts can be da maged. ⢠Do not store the device in high or cold temperature. H igh temperatures can short en the life of elect ronic devices, damage ba tteries, and war p or melt ce rtain plastics. When the device warms to its normal te mperature from a cold temperature, moisture ca n form inside the de vice and damage electronic circui t boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the device other t han as instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knoc k, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine mech anics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solv ents, or strong d etergents to clea n the device. Only use a soft, clean, dr y cloth to clean the surface of the device. ⢠Do not paint t he device . Paint can c log the mov ing parts a nd prevent proper operation. ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna . Unauthorised antennas, modifications, or atta chments could damage t he device and may vio late regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Backup all data you want to keep, such as contacts and cal endar notes. ⢠To reset the device from time t o time for optim um p erformance, power off the device and remove the batte ry. These suggestions apply eq ually to your device, batt ery, charger, or any accesso ry. Recycle Always return yo ur used electro nic products , batteries , and packaging mater i als to dedicated collection points. This way you help prevent u ncontrolled waste d isposal and promote the recycl ing of materials. Check pro duct environmental information a nd how to recycle your Nokia products at www.nokia.com/wer ecycle, or n okia.mobi/werecycl e. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 139
Additional safety information Small children Your devi ce and its acce ssorie s are not toys. The y may co ntain s mall par ts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Operating environment This device meets RF expo sure guidelines in the nor mal use position at the ear or at le ast 1.5 centimetres (5/8 inch) away from the body. Any carry case, belt clip, or holder for body-worn operation shou ld not contain metal and sho uld position the device t he above- stated dista nce from your body. To send data files or messages requires a quality connecti on to the network. Data files or messages may b e delayed until such a connect ion is available. Follow the separation distance instructions until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magne tic. Metallic mate rials may be at tracted to t he device. Do not place credit cards or other magneti c storage media near t he device, because information stored on them may be eras ed. Medical devices Operation of radio transmitt ing equipment, including wi reless phones, may in terfere with the funct ion of inadequa tely protecte d medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine whether they are adeq uately shielded from external RF energy. Switch off your de vi ce when regulations posted instruct you to do so. Hospital s or health care facili ties may use equipmen t sensitive to externa l RF energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacturers of medical devices re commend a minimum separation of 15.3 centi metres (6 inches) between a wireless device an d an implant ed medi cal devic e, such as a pacemaker o r implanted cardiover ter defibr illator, to avoid poten tial interfe rence wit h the medical device. Person s who have such devices should: ⢠Always keep the wireless device more t han 15.3 centimetres (6 inches) from the medical device. ⢠Not carry the wir eless device in a breast pock et. ⢠Hold the wireless devic e to the ear op posite the me dical device. ⢠Turn the wireless device off if there is any reaso n to suspe ct that i nterfe rence is taking place. ⢠Follow the manufacturer directions for the implanted medical dev ice. If you have any questi ons about using your w ireless device with an implanted medical device, consult your health care provider. Hearing aids Some digi tal wir eless dev ices ma y inter fere with s ome heari ng aids. Hearing aids Warning: For hearing aid compatib ility, you must turn off the Bluetooth connectivity. Your mobile device model complies with FC C rules governing hearing aid compati bility. These rules require an M3 microphone or higher value. The M-value, s hown on the de vice box , refers to lower radio frequency (RF) emis sions. A higher M-value generally indicates that a device mod el has a lower RF e missions level, whi ch may improve the likelihood that the device will op erate with certain hearing aids. Some hearin g aids are more immune than others to interference. Please consult yo ur hearing health profes sional to determine the M-ra ting of your hearing aid and whether your heari ng aid will work with this device. More information on accessibility can b e found at www.nokia accessib ility.com. This device has been tested and ra ted for use with hearing aids for som e of the wireless technologies that it uses. H owever, there may be some newer wir eless technologies used in this device tha t have not be en tested yet for use with hearing aids. It is impor tant to try the different featur es of this device thoro ughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid or cochlear impl ant, to determ ine whether you hear any interfering noise. Consult your service pr ovider about its retu rn and exchange policies and f o r information on hearing aid compatibility. Vehicles RF signals may affect impro perly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicle s such as electronic fuel inje ction, elec tronic an tilock bra king, elect ronic speed control, and air bag systems. For more information, check with t he manufacturer of your vehicle or its equipment. Only qualified personnel sh ould service the device or insta ll the device in a vehi cle. Faulty install ation or service may be dan gerous and may invalidate your warranty. Che ck regularly that all wirel ess device equipment in your vehicle is mount ed and operating é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 140
properly. Do not store or carry flammab le liquids, gases, or explosive materi als in the same compartment as the device, its parts , or accessories. Remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place your device or accessor ies in the air bag deployment a rea. Switch off your d evice before boarding an ai rcraft. The use of wirele ss teledevices in an aircraft may be dangero us to the operation of the aircraf t and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere. Obey all posted instructions. S parks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or death. Switch off the device at refue lling points such as near gas pumps at service stat ions. Observe restrictio ns in fuel depots, stor age, and distribution a reas; chemical plants ; or where bla sting operation s are in progress. Areas w ith a potentially explosive atmos p here are often, but not alwa ys, clearly marked. They include a reas where you would be advis ed to turn off your vehicle engine, below deck on boats, chemical transfer o r storage facili ties and where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. You should check with the manufacturer s of vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) to determine if this device can be safely used in their vicinity. Emergency calls Important: This device operates using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-progra mmed functions. If your d evice supports voice calls over the internet (internet calls), activate both the interne t calls and the cellular p hone. The device will attempt to make emergency calls ov er both the cellular networks and thr ough your internet c all provider if both are activated. Connectio ns in all c onditions cannot be guaranteed. You sho uld never rely solel y on any wireless d evice for essential communications like medi cal emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1 If the de vice is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. De pending on your device, you may also need to comp lete the followi ng: ⢠Ins ert a SIM card if your devi ce uses one . ⢠Remove ce rtain call restrictions yo u have activated in your device. ⢠Change your profile from offline profile mod e to an active profile. ⢠If the screen and keys a re locked, sl ide the lock sw itch on the si de of the device to unlock them. 2 Press the en d key as m any tim es as ne eded to c lear th e displa y and read y the devi ce for calls. 3 Open the di aller by selecting the dialle r icon ( ). 4 Enter the official emergency number for your prese nt location. Emergency numbers vary by locati on. 5P r e s s t h e c a l l k e y . When making an eme rgency call, gi ve all the necessary information as accurately as possible . Your w ireless d evice m ay be the only me ans of comm unicati on at the s cene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. Certification information (SAR) This mobile device meets guidelines for exposure to ra dio waves. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is des igned not to exceed the limits for exposu re to radio wa ves rec ommended by interna tional gu idelines . These guidelines were developed by the indepe ndent sc ientific organis ation IC NIRP and include safety margins designed to assure the prote c tion of all pers ons, regardless of age and health. The exposure guidel ines for mobile devices employ a unit of measurement known as the S p e c if i c A b s o r p t i o n R a t e o r S A R . T h e S A R l i m i t s t a t e d i n t h e I C N I R P g u i d e l i n e s i s 2 . 0 w a t ts / kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of t issue. Tests for SAR ar e conducted using standard operati ng positions with the d evice transmitting at its highest certified power level in all teste d frequency bands. The a ctual SAR level of an operating device can be below the maxim um value because the device is designed to use only the power requi red to reach the network. That amount changes depending on a number of factors such as how close you are t o a network base stat ion. The highest SAR value unde r the ICNIRP guidelines fo r use of the device at the ear is 0. 66 W/kg. Use of device a ccessories may result in different SAR val ues. SAR values may vary depending on natio nal reporting an d testing requirem ents and the network band. Additional SAR inform ation may be provided und er product information at www.nokia.com. é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 141
Copyright and other notices é 2009 Nokia. All rights reserved. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY He r e b y, N O K IA C O R PO R A T IO N d e cl a r e s t h a t th i s R M- 5 0 5 pr o d uc t i s in c o m pl i a n ce w i t h t h e essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Direct ive 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://www.nokia.com/phones/ declaration_of_conformity/. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Nser ies, N97, Nokia Original Accessories logo, and Ovi are trademarks or register ed trademarks of Nokia Corporat ion. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corpora tion. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks o r tradenames of their respective owners. Reproduc tion, trans fer, distri bution, or storage of p art or all of the conte nts in thi s document in any form w ithout the p rior writ ten permis sion of Nok ia is prohib ited. Nokia operates a policy of continuous de velopment. Nokia reserve s the right to make changes and impro vements to any of the pr oducts des cribed in th is docume nt witho ut prior notice. Java and all Java -based marks are trademarks or registe red trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Portions of the Nokia Maps software are é1996-2010 The FreeType Proj ect. All rights reserve d. This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Vi sual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in connection with information which has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a consumer engaged in a personal a nd noncommercial activity and (ii) for use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a licensed video provider. No license is granted or shall be implied for an y other use. Additional information, including that r elated to p romotional, int ernal, and com mercial uses, may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegla.com. TO THE MAXIMUM EX TENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, UN DER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NOKIA OR ANY OF ITS LICENSORS BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCID ENTAL, CONSEQUENT IAL OR INDIRE CT DAMAGES HOWSO EVER CAUSED. The third-party applicati ons provided with your dev ice may have been created and may be owned by per sons or entitie s not affiliated with or relate d to Nokia. Nokia does not own the copyrights or i ntellectual prope rty rights to the third-party app lications. As such, Nokia does not take any re sp onsibility for end-use r su pport, functionality of the applications, or the info rmation in the applicat ions or these mater ials. Nokia does not provide any warranty for the third-par ty applications. BY USING THE APPLIC ATIONS YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE AP PLICATIONS ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRES S OR IMPLIED, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW . YOU FURTHE R ACKNOWLEDGE THAT NEITHER NOKIA NOR ITS AFFILIATES MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WA RRANTI ES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIE D, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR THAT THE APPLICATIONS WILL NOT INFRI NGE ANY THIRD-PARTY PATENTS, COPYRIGHTS, TRADEMARKS, OR OTHER RIGHTS. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED "AS IS". EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO WA RRANTIES OF ANY KI ND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED , INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHA NTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCURACY, RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT. NOKIA RESERVES THE RI GHT TO REVISE THIS DOCUMENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WIT HOUT PRIOR NOTICE. Reverse engineering of software in the device is prohibite d to the extent permitt ed by applicable law. Insofar as this user gui de contains any limitations on Nokia 's representations, warr anties, damages and l iabilities, such limitati ons shall likewise limi t any representations, warranti es, damages and liabilities of Nokia's licensors. The availa bility of particular prod ucts and applications a nd services for these pr oducts may vary by reg ion. Please check wi th your Nokia deale r for details and availability of language options. This device may contain c ommodities, technolog y or software subjec t to export laws and r egulations from the US and other countries. Diversion co ntrary to law is p rohibited. é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 142
FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTIC E Your device may cause T V or radio interfere nce (for ex ample, when using a telephone in close prox imity to rece iving equipment). The FCC or I ndustry Canada can require yo u to stop using your telephone if such interfer ence cannot be el iminated. If you require assistance, contact your local service facili ty. This device complies wit h part 15 of the FCC rules. Operatio n is subject to the following tw o conditions: (1) This devic e may not cause harmful interference, and ( 2) this device must accept any interference rece ived, including interference that may cause undes ired operation. Any changes or mod ifications not expressly app roved by Nokia c ould void the user's authorit y to operate this equipment . /Issue 5 EN é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 143
Index Symbols/Number s 3-D ringing tones 115 A A-GPS (assisted GPS) 80 access codes 11 access points 66, 67 â groups 67 accessories 127 accounts 53 active notes 123 â settings 124 alarm â calendar note 116 alarm clock 117 albums, media 100 anniversary notes 116 answering calls 37 antennas 17 application manager â settings 133 application settings 127 applications 131 assisted GPS (A -GPS) 79 attachments 56, 57 audio messages 55 auto-update for time/date 117 B background image 115, 116 backing up device memory 120 barring calls 134 battery â charging 18 â inserti ng 15 â saving pow er 11 birthday notes 116 blogs 76 Bluetooth 71, 72 Bluetooth connectivity â blocking devices 72 â device visibility 71 â pairing device s 71 â security 71 â settings 70 â turning on/ off 70 bookmarks 77 browser â bookmarks 77 â browsing pages 75, 76 â cache memory 77 â searching content 76 â security 77 â settings 78 â toolbar 75 C cable connection 73 cache memory 77 calculator 123 calendar 116 â toolbar 116 calendar entry â deleting 117 â sending 117 call log 44 call waiting 38 calls 35 â answering 37 â conference 37 â dialled 43 â dialled numbers 30 â duration of 44 â internet calls 40 â missed 43 â options 36 â received 4 3 â redialling 133 â rejecting 3 7 â restricting See fixed dialling â settings 133 â video calls 38 camera â assigning imag es to contacts 95 â flash 95 â image mode 93 é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 144
â image quality 97 â indicators 94 â location information 94 â options 95 â recording 97 â scenes 95 â self-timer 96 â sending i mages 95 â sequence mode 96 â settings 92, 97 â video mode 96 â video quality 98 cell broadcast messages 58 certificates 128 charging the battery 18 chat services (IM) 51 clock 116, 117 â setting date 117 â setting ti me 11 7 computer connections 73 See also data connections conference calls 37 connectors 13 contacts â copying 47 â creating groups 48 â defaults 46 â editing 45 â favourites 28 â groups 48 â images in 45 â managing 45 â ringing tones 46 â saving 45 â synchronising 69 â voice tags 45 content â synchronising, sending, and retrieving 25 converter 122 copyright protection 130 currency â converter 122 D data connections 69 â cable 73 â PC connectivity 73 â synchronisation 69 date and time 117 date and time settings 125 declining calls See rejecting calls device â updating 127 dialled numbers 43 dictionary 121 dismissing calls 37 display settings 126 DRM (digital rights management) 130 duration of calls 44 E e-mail 63 â mailbox 57 â notifications 27, 28 e-mail messages 56 end all calls option 38 F factory settings â restoring 130 feeds, news 76 file management 121 file manager 120, 121 â backing up files 121 â organising files 120 fixed dialling 47 FM radio 111 FM transmitter 107 â settings 108 G general information 9 GPS â position requests 81 GPS (Global Positioning System) 79 é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 145
GPS (global positioning system) 79, 82 H headset 18 help application 9 home screen 28, 115, 116 â contacts 28 â music player 28 â notification s 27 HSDPA (high-speed downlink packet access) 32 I IAPs (internet access points) 66 icons 29 IM (ins tant mes saging) 51 images 100 â editing 102 â sharing online 104 inbox â message 56 inbox, message 56 indicators 29 installing applications 131 internet browser 75 internet calls 40 â log in 40 â making 40 â settings 40, 41 internet connection 75 See also browse r invitations â video sharing 43 J Java applicati ons 131 K keyboard 21 keypad lock 24 keys 13, 14 L landmarks 81 language sett ings 126 licences 130 location information 79, 82 lock code 11, 17 lock switch 24 locking â remotely 11 logs 44 loudspeaker 31 M Mail for Exchange 63 mailbox â e-mail 56 â video 36 â voice 36 Maps 8 4 â browsing 85 â changing views 85 â compass 84 â display elements 85, 91 â driving routes 91 â Favourites 88 â finding locations 86 â navigating 90, 91 â organising places 88 â organising routes 88 â planning routes 87 â saving places 88 â saving routes 8 8 â sending p laces 89 â sharing locations 89 â synchronising 89 â traffic information 9 1 â viewing location details 86 â voice guidance 90 â walking routes 90 mass memory â formatting 121 media â RealPlayer 118 meeting notes 116 meetings â setting up 116 memo notes é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 146
See to-do notes memory â clearing 1 2 â web cache 77 memory card 121 â backing up files 121 message reader â select ing vo ice 12 5 messages â e-mail 56 â folders for 54 â icon for incoming 56 â multimedia 56 â settings 59 â voice 36 MMS (multimedia message service) 55, 56, 59 multimedia messages 55, 56, 59 music player 28, 104, 106 â playlists 105 muting s ound 3 7 my music 104 N navigation tools 79 network settings 64 news feeds 76 Nokia account 33, 48, 53 Nokia support information 9 notes 120 notification light 131 O offline profile 32 outbox, message 54 Ovi by Nokia 32 Ovi Contacts 48, 49 â adding friends 50 â availabi lity status 49 â connection setti ngs 54 â landmarks 53 â personalisation 54 â presence 53 â profiles 49 â searching 50 â settings 52 â sharing your location 49, 53 â synchronising 52 Ovi Music 106 Ovi Store 33 â creating an accou nt 33 â details 33 â purchasing 34 â searching 33 â settings 34 â sharing with friends 34 â signing in 33 P packet data connection 44 â access point settings 68 â settings 74 page overview 76 PDF reader 124 personal certificates 128 personalisation 115 photographs See camera Photos 98 photos 100 â file details 99 â red-eye 103 â tags 100 â toolbar 100 â viewing 98 PIN code 11 pin code 17 PIN2 code 11 podcasting 108 â directories 110 â downloads 109 â playing 109 â searching 108 â settings 110 positioning information 79, 82 positioning settings 83 presence 53 presentations, multimedia 56 é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 147
profiles 26, 115 â changing profiles 30 â offline restrictions 32 â personalisation 26 proximity sensor 35 proxy se ttings 68 PUK codes 11 R radio 111 â listening 111 â stations 112 RealPlayer 118 recorder 119 recording â video clips 96 red-eye removal 103 rejecting calls 37 remote locking 11 remote mailbox 5 6 remote SIM mode 72 removing applications 132 ringing tones 26, 115 roaming 64 S scenes 95 search â settings 31 searching 30, 3 1 security â browser 77 â certificates 128 security code 11 security module 1 30 self-timer â camera 96 sensor settings 126 sent messages folder 54 service commands 59 service messages 56 settings 127 â access point name control 74 â access points 67 â active n otes 124 â applications 127 â Bluetooth connectivi ty 70 â browser 78 â call divert 134 â calls 133 â certificates 128 â date and time 125 â display 126 â e-mail notificati ons 28 â FM transmitter 108 â internet calls 40 â language 126 â message s 59 â network 64 â packet data 74 â packet data access points 68 â podcasting 110 â positioning 83 â SIP 74 â slide 127 â tv-out 127 â video 114 â video sharing 41 â WLAN 66, 69 Share online 28 shared video 41 sharing your location 52 shooting modes â camera 95 side keys 14 SIM card â inserting 15 â messages 58 SIM card security 128 SIP 7 4 slide settings 127 slide show 101 SMS (short mess age service) 55 software applications 131 software up dates 9, 10 songs 104 speakerphone 31 speech 125 speed dialling 37 support 9 é 2009 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 148
synchronisation 52, 69 T text input 21, 22 text messages â receiving and reading 56 â replying to 56 â sending 55 â settings 59 â SIM messages 58 themes 115 time and date 117 to-do no tes 116 tones 2 6, 115 â 3-D 115 toolbar 92 top keys 1 3 touch screen 19, 23, 35 transferring cont ent 24 troubleshooting 135 TV configuration 127 TV-out mode 101 U updates 1 0 â applications 9 â device 127 â device software 9, 1 0 UPIN code 11 UPUK code 11 USB cable connection 73 USB charging 18 useful information 9 V video â downloading 112 â my videos 11 3 â playing 113 â settings 114 â shared 43 â transferring video clips 114 â video feeds 113 â viewing 112 video calls 38, 39, 40 video clips 100 â editing 103 â shared 41 video settings 98 video sharing â requirements 41 â sharing live video 42 â sharing video clips 42 virtual keypad 23 voice calls See calls voice comm ands 30, 38, 126 voice control 126 voice dialling 38 voice mailbox 30 volume controls 3 1 W web browser 75 web connection 75 web logs 7 6 week settings â calendar alarm 116 wireless LAN (WLA N) 65 wireless LAN setting s 6 6 WLAN (wireless local area network) 65, 69 wrist strap 19 Z Zip manager 123 é 2009 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 149